TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - AWS

CITY OF FREDERICK, MD

RENOVATION AND IMPROVEMENTS

TO STORMWATER PUMPING STATION NO.3

CONTRACT NO.07.01

CIP NO.350020

BID #22-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

This page intentionally blank.

STORMWATER PUMPING STATION NO.3

TOC-ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01751 STARTUP

01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01783 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01784 SPARE PARTS

01790 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK (NOT USED)

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

03300 CAST – IN – PLACE CONCRETE

03450 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Section

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05210 STEEL JOISTS

05310 STEEL DECK

05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILING

DIVISION 6 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY


TOC-iii

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07210 THERMAL INSULATION

07411 METAL ROOF PANELS

07532 ETHYLENE – PROPYLENE – DIENE – MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07920 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

08111 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08332 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

08411 ALUMINUM – FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08710 DOOR HARDWARE

08800 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09221 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09290 GYPSUM BOARD

09310 CERAMIC TILE

09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING

09912 INTERIOR PAINTING

09960 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS

10440 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 – GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 – FURNITURE (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)


TOC-iv

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15010 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL

15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

15075 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL

15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION

15110 VALVES

15111 PROCESS SPECIALTIES

15120 PROCESS PIPING

15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

15190 FUEL TANKS, PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES

15200 OVERHEAD CRANE SYSTEM

15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES

15426 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15441 MODIFICATION OF VERTICAL PROPELLER PUMPS

15485 ELECTRIC, INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS

15762 UNIT HEATERS

15815 METAL DUCTS

15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

15830 HVAC FANS

15900 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16075 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16076 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL


TOC-v

16120 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16140 WIRING DEVICES

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

16414 ENGINE GENERATORS

16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES

16442 PANELBOARDS

16443 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

16461 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

16484 CONTACTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT

16511 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

16521 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 17 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

17000 INSTRUMENTATION

17010 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATORS

17100 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)

17101 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PROGRAMMING

17375 LEVEL MEASUREMENT (ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER TYPE)

17500 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SOFTWARE

PROGRAMMING


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1

SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: City of Frederick Stormwater Pumping Station No. 3.

1. Project Location: 407 Sagner Ave, City of Frederick, Maryland 21701.

B. Owner: City of Frederick, Maryland.

1. Owner's Representative: Etinosa Odia.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Construction of an above-ground pumping station on the footprint of the existing below-

grade pumping station that will house the refurbished pumps, new piping, and all new

electrical equipment. The new building will also house a new generator, new controls,

bridge crane for equipment removal and maintenance and miscellaneous heating and

ventilation upgrades. The project will also include the additional of public restrooms and

a parks maintenance storage room and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. The project shall conform to the Contract Documents herewith and additionally to City of

Frederick General Provisions and Standard Specifications and City of Frederick Manual

of Standard Details for Construction

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.



1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform

work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises

clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.

Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations.

1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of

7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. Contractor shall

notify the Owner in writing two (2) business days prior to Friday if the Contractor would like to

perform work on the weekend.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner not less than two (2) days in advance of

proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the

existing building is not permitted.

1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.



B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of

all Sections in the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01010


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process

Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as

separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to the City at earliest possible date, but no later than fifteen

(15) days after notice to proceed.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for

the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. This breakdown includes

separating items between City and FEMA funding sources.

2. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

3. Overhead Costs:

a. Each line item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor’s

overhead and profit.

b. Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost

of actual work-in-place as separate line items.

4. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or

Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least

one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit payment applications per City requirements including General Conditions and Special

Conditions.


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Requests for Information (RFIs).

2. Project Meetings.

3. Power Study.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract

Documents.

1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or

after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required

for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.



5. Progress meetings.

6. Pre-installation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor

with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work

or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Engineer.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow

ten (10) calendar days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer after 2:00

p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.



D. On receipt of Engineer's action, immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties.

Review response and notify Engineer within seven (7) calendar days if Contractor disagrees with

response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Engineer will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 15

calendar days after Notice to Proceed is issued.

C. Progress Meetings: Contractor will coordinate and conduct progress meetings at monthly

intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Contractor shall provide updated schedule at each

progress meeting.

3. Meeting Requirements: Contractor shall provide an agenda for the monthly progress

meeting at minimum 2 days prior to the meeting date and provide meeting minutes of the

meeting at maximum 2 days after the meeting date. Additionally, the Contractor shall

provide a Key Project Metrics sheet indicating at minimum the following:

a. Notice to Proceed Date

b. Current Date

c. Substantial Completion Date

d. Final Completion Date

e. Contract Days Used and Percent of Time Expended

f. Original Contract Amount

g. Approved / Execute Change Order(s) and Amount

h. Total Current Contract Amount

i. Total Invoiced to Date and Percent of Project Invoiced

j. Status of Shop Drawings and RFIs



1.6 POWER STUDY

A. Upon review and approval of Contractor’s power distribution equipment submittals during the

construction phase, KCI Technologies Inc. (KCI) shall utilize the services of a licensed

professional engineer (P.E.) to generate the following signed and sealed overcurrent protection

device reports:

1. Short Circuit Study.

2. Coordination Study.

3. Arc Flash Study.

B. The studies shall originate at the proposed utility company electrical service connection point and

include all downstream electrical distribution equipment, large motors and feeders as reflected on

the single line power distribution diagram. The studies shall also include the generator and

associated equipment. KCI shall determine optimal settings for all breakers at motor control

centers and associated feeder sizes.

C. KCI shall provide all required warning and hazard labels at proposed motor control centers and

panels in accordance with arc flash study to be performed.

D. Prior to any potential field adjustments as a result of the studies, KCI shall generate a report of

suggested field adjustments for Owner review and approval. The Contractor shall allow for a

minimum of twenty-one (21) business days for report generation, and Owner’s approval.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Site condition reports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume

time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project

where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine

when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network

schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file.

2. Two paper copies provided at each monthly progress meeting.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

C. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.



1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Proceed to date of final

completion.

B. Activities: Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 calendar days, unless

specifically allowed by Engineer.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead

items and major items, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities

include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Refurbishment of Vertical Propeller Pumps.

b. Motor Control Center (MCC)

c. Engine Generators

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01330

"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's

construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include days for startup and acceptance testing as indicated in

Section 01751 “Startup”.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for

certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include time for completion of punch list items and final

completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 15 or more calendar days behind

the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which

Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.



F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has

been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM schedule

for the Work.

1. Develop schedule in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use

no later than time frame specified in the General Conditions.

2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting

progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

3. Schedule shall show calendar days.

B. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship

of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the

following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.

c. Purchase of materials.

d. Delivery.

e. Fabrication.

f. Utility interruptions.

g. Installation.

h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

i. Testing.

j. Punch list and final completion.

k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim

completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract

milestone dates.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the

Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such

meeting.

2. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. City General Provisions

2. Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

4. Section 01783 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals (also Submittals or Shop Drawings): Written and graphic information and

physical samples that require Engineer’s responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Engineer’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with

requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Within 30 calendar days of issuance of Notice to Proceed, submit a schedule

of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include

time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing

dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by

Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.



1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract

Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work

to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for initial review of each submittal.

Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will

advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for review of each resubmittal.

C. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by

a hyphen and then a sequential number (e.g., SWPS3-06100-01). Resubmittals shall

include an alphabetic suffix with sequential number after another hyphen (e.g.,

SWPS3-06100-01-R1).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Engineer.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic

project management software or electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the

following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Engineer.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

g. Category and type of submittal.

h. Submittal purpose and description.

i. Specification Section number and title.

j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.



l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Related physical samples submitted directly.

n. Indication of full or partial submittal.

o. Transmittal number.

p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

q. Other necessary identification.

r. Remarks.

D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

E. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Include responses to Engineers comments on subsequent submittals and include all

submission materials in resubmittal, not just missing information.

4. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action

stamp.

G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities.

H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. All submittals shall be submitted electronically as PDF and emailed to the Engineer and

City Project Manager. PDFs over 10 pages shall include bookmarked navigation.

2. Samples shall be submitted as physical components.

3. City Project Manager shall provide final response to the Contractor.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

2. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.



f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

3. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Performance curves with project specific design conditions noted.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 11 by 17 inches, but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to

determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of

Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full sets of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return one submittal with options

selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from

same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or



containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) sets of Samples. Provide one (1) set of samples

to the City Project Manager / City Inspector and the Engineer will retain one (1)

Sample set; anything remaining will be returned.

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01320

"Construction Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with City General Provisions.

G. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01782 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

H. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply

with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification

and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel

certified.

I. Manufacturer Certificates: As specified below.

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE

A. As specified in the various sections of these Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish the

Engineer with manufacturer's certificates stating that the equipment and products have been

installed under either the continuous or periodic supervision of the manufacturer's field

representative, that they have been adjusted and initially operated in the presence of the

manufacturer's field representative, and that they are operating in accordance with the specified

requirements, to the manufacturer's satisfaction. A copy of all manufacturer's certificates shall

be bound in each Operation and Maintenance Manual. As a minimum the following items require

a manufacturer’s certificate.

1. Refurbishment of Vertical Propeller Pumps

2. Bridge Crane & Hoist

3. Water Heaters

4. Fuel Tank & Accessories

5. HVAC Equipment

6. Motor Control Center

7. Engine Generators

8. Transfer Switches

9. Instrumentation

10. Reduced Voltage Solid State Starters

B. A statement originating from the Contractor, or any of his subcontractors, suppliers, or any other

agent which merely indicates that a particular item of equipment, product, or component of a

product, meets the requirements of the Contract Documents shall not be considered a certificate.

Any such submittal made in this manner will not be approved and the corresponding equipment,

product, or component of a product, shall not be finally accepted.



C. The definition of "manufacturer's representative" shall be as follows: a representative from the

manufacturer's plant, familiar with the actual problems of manufacturing, installing and operating

the particular equipment or product and with enough years of experience in this field to determine

the successful operation of the equipment or product. Sales representatives or agents of the

manufacturers will not be acceptable.

2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design

professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products

and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Engineer.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional

registered in the State of Maryland, for each product and system specifically assigned to

Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval statement and signature before submitting to Engineer.

B. Approval Statement: Each submittal shall have an approval statement with signature. Include

Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of

reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed,

checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION

A. General: Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

will return them without action.

B. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in

the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and

facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and



A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with project permits.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Provide as required to secure the Work and Contractor’s property. Security

of the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Orange Safety Fencing: Provide as required to safeguard hazards such as open excavations.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor Office: Provide as required.



B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with

performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are

no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,

number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

E. Electric Power Service: Provide temporary electric power service and distribution system of

sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining temporary service from

Electric Utility.

F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.



3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within limits of

disturbance indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as

required to minimize dust.

B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas

in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads

and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,

within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site features to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Signs: Provide as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste

from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders

are not adequate.

J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,

provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial

Completion.



3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with project permits and authorities

having jurisdiction.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with project permits and requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure

fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance

gates.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of

construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and

similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible

signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject

to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and

keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

C. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level.



3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,

limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed

surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Comply with product requirements in the City General Provisions and as noted below.

1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to

determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Electrical and

controls equipment shall comply with this requirement.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties shall comply with the General Conditions.


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed

for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products.




STARTUP 01751-1

SECTION 01751 - STARTUP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Facility Startup is required to achieve and demonstrate Substantial Completion, therefore, shall be

completed within the Contract Time.

1. Facility Startup shall consist of the following stages:

a. Equipment Startup

b. Acceptance Test

B. Related Requirements

1. Other Technical Division Specification Sections for specific requirements for testing and

startup.

1.2 EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of an experienced and authorized representative of the

manufacturer of each piece of equipment, who shall visit the site of the Project and inspect, check,

adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the Contractor shall ar-

range to have the manufacturer’s representative visit the job site as often as necessary until any and

all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall provide Manufacturer’s Certificates prior to testing.

C. Individual equipment shall be tested to ensure proper operation.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all equipment testing. The Contractor is advised

that the Engineer and the City’s operating personnel will witness operations testing.

E. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five (5) days in advance of each equipment test.

F. The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease, and all other

necessary equipment, facilities, and services required for conducting the tests.

G. All defects in materials or quality of Project which appear during this test period shall be immedi-

ately corrected by the Contractor.

1.3 ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. All equipment must have had proper, successful startup and all mechanical, electrical, controls and

SCADA work shall be complete prior to commencing the Acceptance Test.

B. City’s acceptance criteria shall be followed.


STARTUP 01751-2

C. Test Duration: 6 hours

D. Requirements: Facility and its appurtenant equipment systems shall be operated together in an au-

tomatic mode with no intervention from Contractor or City. Modes shall include testing under

standby power. Defects detected by the test shall be repaired/ corrected and the test duration shall

be reset to that listed above.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. Complete the Work to bring the facility to a state of Substantial Completion.

B. Requirements for individual items of equipment are included in the technical sections.

C. Procedures include but are not limited to the following:

1. Check power, control and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power

source.

2. Check voltage of all circuits.

3. Verify piping systems are cleaned and ready for use and are free of construction debris.

4. Verify equipment is properly lubricated.

5. Verify equipment and piping has proper connections, alignment and adjustment.

6. Verify piping systems are properly primed with test fluid.

7. “Bump” start electric motors to verify proper rotation.

8. Operate the various systems to verify that all conditions of operation (normal, emergency,

etc.) are met and that equipment functions properly.

9. Some systems may require temporary closed loop piping to conduct tests. Contractor shall

provide as necessary.

10. Demonstrate various operation conditions to the City and Engineer.

11. City reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine

maintenance scenarios, etc. to verify the functional integrity of the various systems.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Coordinate Acceptance Test scheduling with City.

B. Acceptance Test shall be conducted as fully automatic using the permanently mounted control

system to operate all the various systems as one facility. No manual operation shall be allowed.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals for equipment.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual

content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Submissions:

1. Prior to completion of the Work, and at least 30 calendar days prior to the 50% payment,

provide preliminary operation and maintenance manuals for review. Provide 1 paper copy

and 1 electronic PDF copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.

Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. All copies will be returned.

2. Prior to completion of the Work, and at least 60 calendar days prior to the 75% payment,

provide final operation and maintenance manuals for review. Final manuals shall

incorporate all review comments from the preliminary submittal. Provide 1 paper copy and

1 electronic PDF copy. All copies will be returned.

3. Final manual shall be approved by the Engineer before a final inspection of the Work will

be conducted.

4. Subsequent to the Engineer’s approval of the final manuals, provide 3 final, complete paper

copies and 1 electronic PDF copy to the Owner. Complete manuals shall be delivered prior

to training and issuance of Substantial Completion.

5. Electronic PDF submissions shall be bookmarked. PDFs that are not bookmarked will be

returned without review and shall require Contractor to add bookmarks and resubmit.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each piece of equipment, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance

documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and

source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as

described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

5. Recommended lubricants.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Lubrication guidelines.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and

service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources

of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data

indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part

of a system. Manuals shall be organized by equipment systems.

B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

C. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.



PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 01783 - 1

SECTION 01783 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,

including the following:

1. Record Drawings.


1. Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.

2. General Provisions.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Drawings 5 calendar days prior

to Engineer’s final as-built inspection of the project site.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall maintain Record Drawings and submit to Engineer to aid Engineer in the creation

of As-Built Drawings as required by General Provisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings, incorporating new and

revised Drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether

individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for

preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.


PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 01783 - 2

2. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at

recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,

and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Record prints shall be incorporated into the Record Drawings.

2. Organize Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover

sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

3. Format: 24”x36” paper with changes printed in red ink.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)



SPARE PARTS 01784-1

SECTION 01784 - SPARE PARTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SPARE PARTS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT

A. When called for in other sections of this Contract, the Contractor shall supply all spare parts in

the number and quality specified.

B. Spare parts shall be properly wrapped for long term storage according to all manufacturers’

directions, and if appropriate, coated with protective oil or grease. In addition, all parts shall be

boxed or crated and suitably labeled to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner.

C. Crates over 100 lbs. shall be furnished on a pallet.

D. Spare parts shall be delivered to the storage area at once by the Contractor as directed by the

Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of parts including part number and

unit cost of each required spare part prior to turning the parts over to the Owner.

F. List of spares and spare parts shall be provided prior to substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used



SPARE PARTS 01784-2



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01790 - 1

SECTION 01790 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,

including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


A. Instruction Program: Prior to substantial completion, submit outline of instructional program for

demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates,

times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning

objective and outline for each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance

personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and

whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning

performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative experienced in operation

and maintenance procedures and training.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved operation, and maintenance

manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been

reviewed and approved by Engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for

each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a

description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each

module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or

component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Operations and maintenance manuals.

b. Project record documents.

c. Warranties and bonds.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.



5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with

requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to

coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of

participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation

and maintenance data submittals.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and the requirements of the General Provisions apply to all work under this section.

B. General Conditions and the City of Frederick Standard Specifications and Details, latest

edition, as modified and added to, apply to this section.

C. Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified by manufacturer’s name

and catalogue number in order to establish standards of quality and performance and not for

the purpose of limiting competition. Alternate methods and/or materials may be submitted to

the City’s Representative for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified will

receive written approval.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.

2. Foundation grade walls.

3. Slabs-on-grade.

4. Drilled Piers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-

furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop

spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Qualification Data: For installer and testing agency.



E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating

compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Curing compounds.

G. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to the City, qualified

according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician

- Grade II.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand

from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures

through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the

Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,

and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of

joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm),

minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling

of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane

of exposed concrete surface.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel

wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES



A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports

from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard

Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,

use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar

supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,

and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm)

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing

calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended

adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Available Products:

a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra.



b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10.

c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,

Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a

No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of

inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that

penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.


a. Burke by Edoco; Titan Hard.

b. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus.

c. ChemTec International; ChemTec One.

d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

Intraseal.

e. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.

f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard.

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard.

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard.

k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Duranox.

m. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Buff Hard.

n. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal.

o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.


a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.

b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm.

c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.

d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

Aquafilm.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.

h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.

j. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm.

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.



l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.

m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.

n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.

o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.

p. Unitex; Pro-Film.

q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER.

r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

D. Epoxy Broadcast Primer Layer: SPE-FLEX or approved equal.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not

interfere with bonding of floor covering.


a. Burke by Edoco; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent.

b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.

c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

High Seal.

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19).

e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Diamond Clear VOX.

f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion.

g. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.

h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.

i. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; MasterKure-N-Seal VOC.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.

k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Cure & Seal 200E.

m. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal.

n. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.

o. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Clearseal WB STD.

p. Unitex; Hydro Seal 18.

q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Radiance UV-25

r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber

or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.



C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of

grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

portland cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete with a water-

cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.



2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings, Foundation Grade Walls, Drilled Piers and Exterior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion

normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 6 inches (150 mm) for concrete with verified

slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing

admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-

mm) or 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m).

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).


5. Air Content: 2 1/2 percent, plus or minus 0.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch

(25-mm) or 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F

(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.



D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of

formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely

braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at

inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,

and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work

that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges."

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that

does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than

50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be

damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.



B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by the Engineer.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) minimum and seal with manufacturer's recommended

tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps

with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by the Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into

concrete.

3. Unless indicated otherwise, locate joints for slabs in the middle third of spans.



4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at

least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete

when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before

concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no

new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to

ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement

and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits

of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.



1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work

from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or

low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)

for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement.

Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided

water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid

nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie

holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed

specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged

in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes

and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching

adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly

across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS



A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and broom finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free

of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to interior slabs exposed to view.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155

(ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots

and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete slabs, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish

with the Engineer before application.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,

after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend

with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required

to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-

weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,

or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before

and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.



C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the

remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with

the following materials:

a. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends

lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure

for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period

using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project..

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy

rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and

repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging

concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer

unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of

floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain

continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in

formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: All defective concrete shall be removed and replaced unless the Engineer

approves that repairs will be acceptable. Concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to the

Engineer's approved standards shall be removed and replaced.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to

two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough

water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25

mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen

with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching

mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by the Engineer.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish

and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test

surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or

that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless

of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent



floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas

with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and

apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original

concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with

adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching

mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,

dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.

Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and

finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72

hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to the Engineer's approval, using epoxy

adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to the Engineer's

approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture. plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength

tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five

randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.



2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite

sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature

is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one

test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set

of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age

indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive

strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive

strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to the Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of

concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design

compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device

may be permitted by the Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or

rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by the Engineer. Testing and inspecting

agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders

complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by the Engineer.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not

comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)

within 48 hours of finishing.


STORMWATER PUMPING STATION NO. 3

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 - 1

SECTION 03450 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Precast sill.

2. Precast concrete coping.

3. Precast concrete lintel.

4. Precast concrete belt course.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for thin brick setting materials and installation after

precast concrete panel production.

2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for furnishing and installing connections attached to

structural-steel framing.

3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum – Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for windows set into

architectural precast concrete units.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of

withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-

absorption tests.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.

Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.



Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at

building corners.

1. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.

2. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in

hardware and connections.

3. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or

attached to structure or other construction.

4. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.

5. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special

conditions.

6. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark

placed on panel.

7. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.

8. Indicate locations and details of brick units, including corner units and special shapes,

and joint treatment.

9. Indicate locations and details of stone facings, anchors, and joint widths.

10. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance

requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings to the

Engineer for review and approval prior to proceeding. Do not adversely affect the

appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and

maintain the general design concept.

11. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional

engineer responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and

types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type,

magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from

architectural precast concrete.

D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete

units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected;

approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).

1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating

workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.

2. Samples for each brick unit required, showing full range of color and texture expected.

Include Sample showing color and texture of joint treatment.

a. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of

grout showing manufacturer's full range of colors.

b. Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.



H. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.

3. Admixtures.

4. Bearing pads.

5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

6. Brick units and accessories.

7. Stone anchors.

I. Source quality-control test reports.

J. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate

of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load bearing members.

B. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector who has retained a "PCI-Certified Field

Auditor" to conduct a field audit of a project in same category as this Project before erection of

precast concrete and who can produce an Erectors' Post-Audit Declaration.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural

precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes

preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer.

1. Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant

for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

E. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of

PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types

of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

F. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-

control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with

PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast

Concrete Products."

G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

H. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete

units, produce a minimum of 2 sample panels approximately 16 sq. ft. in area for review by

Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and

transitions in sample panels.



1. Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and

demonstrate adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes.

3. After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant

and one at Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the

completed Work.

4. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

I. Mockups: After sample panel approval but before production of architectural precast concrete

units, construct full-sized mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup as indicated on Drawings including brick cavity system and architectural

precast concrete complete with anchors, connections, flashings, and joint fillers.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of

Substantial Completion.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.


A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit

unloading units temporarily on the ground.

B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.

C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to

prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid

excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.

F. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other

construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Old Castle Infrastracture, Inc., Fredericksburg, VA

2. Atlantic Concrete Products Co., Cockeysville, MD

2.2 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will

provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated;

nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond

with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent

surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration to match those used

for precast concrete design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-

release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and

will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

C. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of

newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.

2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars,

ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized, and chromate wash treated

after fabrication and bending.

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60

deformed bars, assembled with clips.

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized steel wire

into flat sheets.

F. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

G. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other

devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement

in place according to PCI MNL 117.



2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same

type, brand, and mill source.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.

2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.

3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical

requirement.

4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse

aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of

exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that

reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Uniformly graded

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material

as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 330, with absorption

less than 11 percent.

E. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored

water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

F. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or

strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

required admixtures.

H. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight

of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017 M.



2.5 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished,

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of

PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.

D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

H. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.

I. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);

carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and

flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

J. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units

1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene

(neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer

hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa),

ASTM D 412.

2. Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented

synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D 2240;

capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking,

splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test one specimen for every

200 pads used in Project.

3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered

cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100,

ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor

Design (LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications, Division II, Section 18.10.2, or with MIL-

C-882E.

4. Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to

stainless or mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.

5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.



2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories

required to install architectural precast concrete units.

2.8 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 144, or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume,

with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing

and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B

and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working

time.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit

metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified

precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by

ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or

field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide

normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.


E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to

PCI MNL 117.

F. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or

field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide

lightweight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).

2. Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus

or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.



H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2.10 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures

due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and

detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before

reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by

release agent.

1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid

backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form

liner with form-release agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and

dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.

2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage

hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.

Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting

operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement

or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,

cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to

supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as

indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings

or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or

destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds

limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with

coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.



2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during

concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to

prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage. Arrange,

space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while

placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm)

minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2

inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure

conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement

in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed

concrete surfaces.

5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of

adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection

stresses.

G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring,

mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be

added.

H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm)

or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover

specified.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming

in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating

or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or

entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with

permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or

permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will

not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat

or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure

units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect

on performance or appearance of final product.

N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements,

including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements

in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.



2.12 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed

edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product

tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

B. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed

edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with the following product

tolerances:

1. Total Thickness or Flange Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2. Rib Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Rib to Edge of Flange: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

4. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal

Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 1830 mm) or 1/2 inch

(13 mm) total, whichever is greater.

5. Length and Width of Block-outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch

(6 mm).

6. Dimensions of Haunches: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

7. Haunch Bearing Surface Deviation from Specified Plane: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

8. Difference in Relative Position of Adjacent Haunch Bearing Surfaces from Specified

Relative Position: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

9. Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch (25 mm).

10. Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch per 10 feet (6 mm per 3 m).

11. Warping: 1/16 inch per 12 inches (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of distance from nearest

adjacent corner.

12. Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop

Drawings.

1. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches (75 mm).

4. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Fabric: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) where

position has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus

1/2 inch (13 mm).

5. Reinforcing Steel Extending out of Member: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of plan

dimensions.

6. Tendons: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm), vertical; plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm),

horizontal.

7. Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

8. Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

9. Location of Bearing Surface from End of Member: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

10. Position of Sleeve: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).



2.13 FINISHES

A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including

false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural

precast concrete units to match approved and as follows:

1. Smooth-Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs.

2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117

requirements.

B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete

fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production

equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing

agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for

additional testing and evaluation.

C. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with

ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength.

D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not

comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing

agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine

compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.

1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength,

from locations directed by Architect.

2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.

3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average

compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive

strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to

Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the

following:

a. Project identification name and number.

b. Date when tests were performed.

c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.

d. Name of concrete testing agency.

e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core

tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks,

corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation

to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with

requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that

has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions

affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing

has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other

structure is complete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural

precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable

tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability,

and alignment as units are being permanently connected.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units

are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection

progresses.

3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices

flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as

otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon

as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding

electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field

welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum

fillet as specified by AWS.

3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and

apply a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized

surfaces according to ASTM A 780.

4. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and

reprime damaged painted surfaces.



5. Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent

loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding

connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For

friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random

by calibrated torque wrench.

F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place

until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids

are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete

surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove

grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without

exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the

following noncumulative erection tolerances:

1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Plan Location from Centerline of Steel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

3. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

b. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:

a. Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

5. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

6. Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

7. Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm).

8. Joint Taper in 10 Feet (3 m): 1/4 inch (6 mm).

9. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

10. Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:

1/4 inch (6 mm).

11. Opening Height between Spandrels: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections

and prepare test reports.



B. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to

ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply

with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the

right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and

uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between

original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20

feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to

ASTM A 780.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop

primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply

with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete

surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment

to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's

recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using

stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from

staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed

concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. City of Frederick Standard Design and Construction Details, and City of Frederick Standard

Design and Construction Specifications, as modified and added to, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

2. Concrete brick.

3. Face brick.

4. Precast architectural concrete.

5. Mortar and grout.

6. Reinforcing steel.

7. Masonry joint reinforcement.

8. Ties and anchors.

9. Embedded flashing.

10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

11. Cavity-wall insulation.


1. Division 2 Section "Unit Pavers" for exterior unit masonry paving.

2. Division 3 Section “Precast Architectural Concrete”.

3. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face

of backup wythes of cavity walls.

4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.

5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit

masonry.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame,

installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."



D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:

1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."

2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2

in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Colored mortar.

3. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

3. Weep holes/vents.

4. Accessories embedded in masonry.

E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with

manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,

source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix

proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup

constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations

are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.



F. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

G. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.

Provide for each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to

ASTM C 67.

d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

5. Reinforcing bars.

6. Joint reinforcement.

7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

H. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780 for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification.

2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

I. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type

and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,

mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to

Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602

J. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be

used to comply with cold-weather requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093

for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one

source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.



D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those

of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and

inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 72 inches (1800 mm) high

by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in mockup.

b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of

exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of

mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit

masonry above half of flashing).

3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing

surface.

4. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

5. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

6. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities

of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved

by Architect in writing.

7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of


F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If

units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and

emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on

elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with

weatherproof cover.



E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover

securely in place.

2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe

and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7

days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified.




4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the

standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified

dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will

impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa)

2. Weight Classification: Medium weight

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's

sample.

5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of

plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.



2.4 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces

finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special

conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on

exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in

sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 Grade SW, Type FBS.



2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when

tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced."

4. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by

7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long.

5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect.

a. Brick Type A: Field

b. Brick Type B: Soldier base course, corbelling at parapet and quoined corners.

7. Products:

a. Modular Colony Red Range A by the Belen Brick Company

C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62 Grade MW or SW.



2. Size: Match size of face brick.

3. Size (Actual Dimensions: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-

5/8 inches (194 mm) long.

4. Size (Actual Dimensions): 90 mm wide by 57 mm high by 190 mm long.

5. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color

indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.



C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,

Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91

1. Products:

a. Color Masonry Cement:

1) Gelen-Gery Mortar or color selected by Architect.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60

(Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm)

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm)

5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with

single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches

(100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less

in width.

2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe

and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with

at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face

shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have

two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular

to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-

mm) cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal

wire in the facing wythe.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from

materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1

coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating.



3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway

through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires

are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood

or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-

N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in

excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,

Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat

washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions

indicated.

2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where

indicated, complying with “SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and as follows:

1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not

exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with

ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.

a. Products:

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail); Cheney 3-Way

Flashing (Sawtooth).

2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall

Flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated

to receive counterflashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending

flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending

metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inch

(10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.



6. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same

metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall with hemmed

inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper

surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water.

7. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into

wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and

hemmed.

8. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75

mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back

on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for

retaining sealant backer rod.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt

between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in

masonry.

a. Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

2) AFCO Products Inc.; Copper Fabric.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.

4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.

5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products

or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other

and to substrates.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,

urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying

with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to

maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).



D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm)

less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.

2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.

3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.

4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.

5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not

degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7

inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.

b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) wide,

with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes

from being clogged with mortar.

c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

d. Sheets or strips not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and installed to full height of

cavity with additional strips 4 inches (100 mm) high at weep holes and thick

enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from being clogged

with mortar.

2. Products:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break

b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.

c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.

d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from

0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either

two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

1. Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or

D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.

d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.11 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, closed-cell product extruded

with an integral skin.



B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation with Increased R-Value: ASTM C 578, Type IV, but

with an aged thermal resistance (R-value) for 1-inch (25-mm) thickness of 5.6 deg F x h x sq.

ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.0 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) at 5 years; closed-cell product with a carbon-

black filler and extruded with an integral skin.

C. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I.

D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (aluminum-foil-faced), Class 2

(glass-fiber-reinforced).

E. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.

2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.

4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.



D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and

natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Mix to match Architect's sample.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces

and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's

written instructions.


A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control

testing indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at

Contractor's expense.

B. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 67.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install

cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.

(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they

are damp but not wet at time of laying.

H. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3

mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6

m), or 1/2-inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary

from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more

than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances

specified for warpage of units.

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line

by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.



3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at

other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face

dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less

than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use

units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,

beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.



B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head

joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch (19 mm) or more in width.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending

across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type

reinforcement.

2. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds

away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or

remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

D. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous

Dampproofing."

E. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12

inches (300 mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic

fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other

confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against

inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and

masonry.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).



1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls.

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to

comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and

structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other

rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and

attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36

inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to

comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and

masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor

design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each

stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space

between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down.


inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq.

m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at

intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.




inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. (0.33 sq.

m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at

intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-

plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side

of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for

application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.10 LINTELS

A. Install steel and cast stone lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,

other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on

sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal

penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing

manufacturer.



2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer

wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and through inner wythe to within

1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of

wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and

turn flashing up approximately 2 inches (50 mm) on interior face.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into

masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and

turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2

inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with

elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"

for application indicated.

5. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges

to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements

in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible

flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to

top of metal drip edge.

7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop

flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible

flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is

completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges

located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of

wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU

webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be

built into masonry.

E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately

above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking

down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.

3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

4. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation.

F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity

drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.



G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent

products to form vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install

through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of

reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on

them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and

prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform

inspections.

1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at


C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion

thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.



F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780.

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.14 PARGING

A. Parge masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19

mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to

subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface

variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at

bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding

with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking

tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical

Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's


7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to

type of stain on exposed surfaces.



3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-

contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill

material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. General Conditions and the City of Frederick Standard Specifications and Details, latest

edition, as modified and added to, apply to this section.




the City’s Representative for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified will

receive written approval.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Architecturally exposed structural steel.

3. Steel lintels and built-up fabricated door jambs

4. Steel bearing plates.

5. Grout.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other

metal items not defined as structural steel.

2. Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally

exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings.



3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply

with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.

2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

3. Shear stud connectors.

4. Shop primers.

5. Nonshrink grout.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2."

3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and

Plastic Design."

4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."

5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."

6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members

off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become

dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying

the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for

installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and

ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain for painted steel assemblies and hot-dip zinc coating,

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C for galvanized assemblies.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,

Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat

washers.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Configuration: Hooked.

2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.

3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.



D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.





E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

F. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel.

G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

H. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type [I] [II], iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.

2.4 GROUT

A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 404, Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with

minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including

tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for

structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes

including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and

roughness.

2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,

treating, and shop priming.

C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.



D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning and SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of

other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt

holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other

work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth on

architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances.

a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.



4. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not

less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,

corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.

2. Galvanize and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior

walls.


A. Owner may engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and

inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with

the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections may be tested and inspected according to

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections may be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing

agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.0

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors may be tested and inspected

according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:



1. Bend tests may be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous

360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear

connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with

requirements.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's

"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural

Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base [plates.

1. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate

before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids

remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel

within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will

be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.



E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug

welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must

be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of

paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth on

architecturally exposed steel.

3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances.

a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect

field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections shall be inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and

the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be

accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.



D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with

the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint

according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories and

abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.




PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1

SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. General Conditions, City of Frederick Standard Design and Construction Details, and City of

Frederick Standard Design and Construction Specifications, as modified and added to, apply

to this section.




the Engineer for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified will receive written

approval.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Open-web K-series steel joists.

2. Joist accessories.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in unit

masonry.

2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for furnishing steel bearing plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the manufacturer to support nonuniform,

unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate SJI's "Standard Specifications Load

Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding the

following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Dead Loads: Actual calculated weights of materials supported.



2. Live Loads: As indicated in the drawings’ general structural notes.

3. Snow loads: As indicated in the drawings and the general structural notes.

4. Wind Loads: As indicated in the drawings’ general structural notes.

5. Earthquake Loads: As indicated in the drawings’ general structural notes.

C. Design joists to withstand design loads with total load deflections no greater than the

following:

1. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include

joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations

and details; and attachments to other construction.

1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded

in other construction.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with

specified requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information

specified.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel joists' compliance with building code in

effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI

standard specifications and load tables.

2. Assumes responsibility for engineering special joists to comply with performance

requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

3. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in

providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined



as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this

Project in material, design, and extent.

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight

Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of

joists indicated.


Code--Steel"; and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates and other devices to be built into concrete and masonry

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members.

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,

Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and

flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

D. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel

structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.2 PRIMERS



A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's

standard shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these red-oxide

primers.

2.3 OPEN-WEB K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-

Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung

ends, and parallel top chord; of joist type indicated.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions

where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where

indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).

2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of

material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing,

and span.

1. Furnish additional erection bridging if required.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated.

Shop prime paint.

C. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit

of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of

finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist

manufacturer to complete joist installation.

2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING



A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists

and accessories to be primed by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning,

SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a

continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting

construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written

recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.

2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.

3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead

loads have been applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure

with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and

tightening requirements.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are

applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or

beams.




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect

field welds and bolted connections.

B. Field welds shall be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

C. In addition to visual inspection, field welds shall be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the

following procedures, as applicable:

1. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.

2. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.

3. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

D. Bolted connections shall be visually inspected.

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in

compliance with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with

specified requirements.


A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing

plates and abutting structural steel].

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning,

SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent

surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of




STEEL DECK 05310 - 1

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. General Conditions, City of Frederick Standard Design and Construction Details, and City of

Frederick Standard Design and Construction Specifications, as modified and added to, apply

to this section.




the Engineer for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified will receive written

approval.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing

channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other

construction.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel deck's compliance with building code in

effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in

construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as

documented according to ASTM E 548.


Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

D. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's

"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

E. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide,

Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,

and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.

b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

c. Epic Metals Corp.

d. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.

e. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div.

f. Roof Deck, Inc.

g. United Steel Deck, Inc.

h. Verco Manufacturing Co.

i. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.



2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with

"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, and

the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),

G90 (Z275) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib

3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch (0.91 mm).

5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same

material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless


G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa),

of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI

Publication No. 29 for overhang and slab depth.

H. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,

finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and

finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B, with arc shields.

L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a

minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection

limitations.

C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately

aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or

contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to decking.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of decking, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds

per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of the

roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area

definitions of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 or as indicated, whichever is more

stringent.



B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches (450

mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-steel

screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking and weld

flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least 1

weld at each corner.

E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover

plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written

instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where

indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

complete closure.

3.4 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm)], nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds a

maximum of 12 inches (305 mm) apart.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910

mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-steel

screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.

3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped.



D. Shear Connectors: Weld shear connectors through deck to supporting frame according to

AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels; do not

overlap. Remove and discard arc shields after welding shear connectors.

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting

structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and

sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless


G. Install piercing hanger tabs not more than 14 inches (355 mm) apart in both directions, within

9 inches (228 mm) of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches (305 mm) from walls at

sides, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control

testing.

B. Field welds shall be inspected.

C. Shear connector stud welds shall be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 for stud

welding and as follows:

1. Shear connector stud welds shall be visually inspected.

2. Bend tests shall be performed if visual inspections reveal less than a full 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector stud.

3. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connector studs if weld fracture occurs on

shear connector studs already tested according to AWS D1.1.

D. Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to the Contractor and the

Engineer.

E. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of

deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. General Conditions, City of Frederick Standard Design and Construction Details, and

City of Frederick Standard Design and Construction Specifications, as modified and add-

ed to, apply to this section.

2. Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified by manufacturer’s

name and catalogue number in order to establish standards of quality and performance

and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Alternate methods and/or materials may

be submitted to the Engineer for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified

will receive written approval.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof rafter framing.

2. Soffit joist framing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal

framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,

bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that

each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

for current products:

1. Steel sheet.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Mechanical fasteners.

4. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house

testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,

including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical

requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the

Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing - General Provisions."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during

delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid

condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Allied Studco.

2. AllSteel Products, Inc.

3. California Expanded Metal Products Company.

4. Clark Steel Framing.

5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.

6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC.

7. Custom Stud, Inc.

8. Dale/Incor.

9. Design Shapes in Steel.

10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).

12. Innovative Steel Systems.

13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.

14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.

15. SCAFCO Corporation.

16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.

17. Steel Construction Systems.

18. Steeler, Inc.



19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.

20. United Metal Products, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST50H (ST340H).

2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

2.3 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,

unpunched or punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm).

2. Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm), minimum.

3. Section Properties:

a. Calculated Strong Axis Section Modulus: 1.014 in3 minimum.

b. Calculated Strong Axis Moment of Inertia: 3.340 in4 minimum.

c. Calculated Allowable Bending Moment without contribution due to cold working:

30.371 kip-inch minimum.

2.4 SOFFIT JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Soffit Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,

unpunched or punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm).

2. Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm), minimum.

3. Section Properties:

a. Calculated Strong Axis Section Modulus: 1.014 in3 minimum.

b. Calculated Strong Axis Moment of Inertia: 3.340 in4 minimum.

c. Calculated Allowable Bending Moment without contribution due to cold working:

30.371 kip-inch minimum.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural

Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.



B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Joist hangers and end closures.

9. Hole reinforcing plates.

10. Backer plates.

2.6 CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.

Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for

placement and hydration.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.



B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent

requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and

complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in

intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,

undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent

connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard

punched openings.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 RAFTER AND JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,

brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,

steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.



B. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm).

C. Install bridging at mid span. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist

webs.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated

and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to

bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

D. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

E. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,

clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete

and stable joist-framing assembly.


A. Testing: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified

requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine



A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and


B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time

of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

4. Shelf angles.

5. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

6. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.

7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete

or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe

sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other

items indicated to be built into unit masonry.

3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel Framing."

4. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.


A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by

preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and

other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due

to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Paint products.

3. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.


D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without

field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that

actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor

bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver

such items to Project site in time for installation.



B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified

in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in

time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:


specified.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.3 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is

indicated or required by structural loads.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with

MFMA-3.

F. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by

structural loads.

2.4 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior

walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade,

and class required.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Painting Sections.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for

interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated

installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)

screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a

minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches

(200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,

hangers, and similar items.

1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members

together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span

but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.



2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two

integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed

field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with

other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.13 BICYCLE RACKS

A. Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe, fully welded together, to lengths indicated.

B. Fabricate with NPS 3 (DN 80) top rails and end posts, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) bottom rails and

NPS 3/4 (DN 20) vertical separators at approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c.

C. Make top rails 36 inches above pavement/floor and bottom rails 4 inches above pavement/floor.

D. Fabricate end posts with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.

Drill end post baseplates at all 4 corners for 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) anchor bolts.

E. Galvanize bicycle racks after fabrication.

2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.



B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and

other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.



1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column

baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and

leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not

exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless


2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS

A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or

other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-

inch (19-mm) bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches (660 mm)

above driving surface.

3.5 INSTALLING BICYCLE RACKS

A. Anchor bicycle racks to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) bolts at each end post.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.


A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads

and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.

(0.093 sq. m).

b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.

c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from

the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing

buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other

detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to

both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.



D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.


the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field

measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual

dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.



1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

a. Pisor Industries, Inc.

b. Sharpe Products.

c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as

supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless

another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for

electrodeposited zinc coating.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching

them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard

fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed

in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as

determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded.

1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to

be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated

items.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Painting Sections.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-

coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and complying with

SSPC-Paint 5.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for

interior and exterior applications.



G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion

cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,

and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to

erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating

and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide

weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with connections, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.




3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method.



J. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. As detailed.

2. By bending

3. By flush bends.

4. By radius bends of radius indicated.

5. By inserting prefabricated.

K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature

for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire

bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of

components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers

made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall

finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of

substrate.

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with

inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with

steel plate forming bottom closure.

Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized

for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not

more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist

being dislodged.

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.



C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of

railings.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and

other ferrous components.

D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or

masonry.

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil,

flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.

F. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with

minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and

environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:

1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast

Cleaning."

2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast

Cleaning."

3. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast

Cleaning."

G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with

requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be

embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify

that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate

reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or

other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5

mm in 3 m).

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.

Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether

welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than

required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2

inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate

joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have

been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written

instructions.



B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than

OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill

annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout mixed and placed to

comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring

material.

D. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm)

buildup, sloped away from post.

E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS

A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and

anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to

railing ends.

3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)

clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

2. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or

lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of


B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required

alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

2. Plywood backing panels for metal roof.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least

dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.

3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency.



3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include

physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated

temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to

ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.

B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.

C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in

effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

3. Power-driven fasteners.

4. Powder-actuated fasteners.

5. Expansion anchors.


A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood

product through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood

obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,

"Principles and Criteria":

1. Dimension lumber framing.

2. Miscellaneous lumber.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed

sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2[, except that lumber that is not in

contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated

according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX)].

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical

formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise

adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry

or concrete.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Cants.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 15

percent maximum moisture content of any species.



C. For items of dimension lumber size, provide, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 15 percent

maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

4. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.

5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

7. Northern species; NLGA.

8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

D. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the

following species and grades:

1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or

No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Mixed southern pine, No. 1 grade; SPIB.

3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.

4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D

Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch

(13-mm) nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.



C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill

sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from

manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-

propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active

ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other

construction.

B. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

C. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.

Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not

countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other

work involved.



B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not

less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact

thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,

apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-

registered label.



BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07111 - 1

SECTION 07111 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing.

2. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of

application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source

from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of

primary materials.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING






following:

1. ChemMasters Corp.

2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.

3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.

4. Henry Company.

5. Karnak Corporation.

6. Koppers Inc.

7. Malarkey Roofing Products.

8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.

9. Tamms Industries, Inc.

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered.

E. VOC Content: 2.5 lb/gal. (300 g/L) or less.

2.2 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick,

multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between

layers of asphalt-saturated felt and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.

B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on

one side with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of not

less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6

percent per ASTM C 272.

C. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal

thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm) with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per

ASTM D 1621.

D. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with

ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type III.


A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

D. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by

dampproofing manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering

and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other

imperfections.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve

coverages indicated.

2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure six hours before applying subsequent coats.

3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling.

B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces

building interior occupied space.

1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.

2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto

surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes

in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an

8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of

dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats

required.



C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe

of exterior masonry cavity walls.

1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer

ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.

2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that

interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles

supporting veneer.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at

not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply

with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection

course.

1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by

protection board manufacturer over cured coating.

2. Install protection course on same day of installation of dampproofing (while coating is

tacky) to ensure adhesion.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.



THERMAL INSULATION 07210 - 1

SECTION 07210 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation.

2. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation.

3. Auxiliary Insulating Materials.

4. Insulation Fasteners.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls and

masonry cells.

2. Division 7 for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency for insulation products.


A. All materials and assemblies shall comply with International Building Code 2006 and IECC.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method

indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.



1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,

and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project

site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:




specified.






2.2 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION (For Horizontal Application)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. Johns Manville.

3. Owens Corning.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than 10 percent.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=956&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456798269&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd





C. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; FSK faced, with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

1. (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C) (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C) 5-inch thickness, FSK faced,

R=15 min.

2. Nominal density of 4.25 lb/cu. ft. (68 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq.

ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

3. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.4 deg F x h x sq.

ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (30.5 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

2.3 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products.

b. Dow Chemical Company.

c. Owens Corning.

d. Pactiv Building Products Division.

2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated.

3. Type X, 1.30 lb/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m).

4. Type VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m).

5. Type VII, 2.20 lb/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m).

6. Type V, 3.00 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m).

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below and

fabricated with one side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Dow Chemical Company.

c. Owens Corning.

2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m).

3. Type VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m).

4. Type VII, 2.20 lb/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m).

C. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Manufacturers:


b. Manufacturers with a third-party certification program satisfying model building

code mandatory requirements for foam plastics.

2. Type I, 0.90 lb/cu. ft. (15 kg/cu. m).

3. Type VIII, 1.15 lb/cu. ft. (18 kg/cu. m).

4. Type II, 1.35 lb/cu. ft. (22 kg/cu. m).



2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation

manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation

securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.5 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer

in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.

c. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030-inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2-inches

(50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105-inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick

galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.

b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150.

c. Gemco; Dome-Cap.

d. Gemco; R-150.

e. Gemco; S-150.

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Crawlspaces.

b. Ceiling plenums.

c. Attic spaces.

d. Where indicated.

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to

substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive.

c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of

Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting

performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any

time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit

tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere

with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation

encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from

manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units

to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make

up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below

exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.



C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying

protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's


D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying

protection course with joints butted.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24

inches (610 mm) O.C. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit

courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both

directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

B. Install units of cellular-glass insulation with closely fitting joints using method indicated:

1. Gob Method: Apply 4 gobs of adhesive per unit and set units firmly against inside wythe

of masonry or other construction as shown. Apply gobs at each corner; spread gobs to

form pads 4 inches (101 mm) in diameter by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.

2. Serrated-Trowel Method: Apply adhesive to entire surface of each cellular-glass

insulation unit with serrated trowel complying with insulation manufacturer's written

instructions.

3. Coat edges of insulation units with full bed of adhesive to seal joints between insulation

and between insulation and adjoining construction.

4. Coat exterior face (cold face) of installed cellular-glass block insulation course with

asphalt coating.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to

edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed

installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless


1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation

anchors as follows:



1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to

insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and

application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between

concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over

spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not

to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers

to tips of spindles.



METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1

SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal roof panels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for steel roof deck supporting metal roof panels.

2. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for custom-fabricated and on-site, roll-formed

sheet metal roofing.

3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashing other sheet

metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies.


A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design

criteria indicated.

C. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the

following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).

2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. (720

Pa) and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design

positive wind-pressure difference

3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure

difference

D. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.



E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for

wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 30

F. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the

effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa), acting inward or outward.

b. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

2. Snow Loads: 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1197 Pa)

3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads

with vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar

heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient, material surfaces.

H. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal roof panel assemblies with thermal-resistance

value (R-value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C 518.

I. Solar Reflectance: Initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.65 when tested according to

ASTM E 903, and maintained, under normal conditions, solar reflectance of not less than 0.50

for 3 years after installation.

J. Minimum Emissivity Rating: Provide roofing materials with 0.75 or greater emissivity when

tested according to ASTM E 408.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of

roof panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge

conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings,

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled

work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2

inches per 12 inches (1:10):

a. Flashing and trim.

b. Gutters and downspouts.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory-applied

color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and

coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Roof panels and attachments.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.

F. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single

manufacturer.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal roof panels having insulation core material with

the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate

markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be

damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and

handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,

and surface damage.

C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and

ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels

in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high

humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.



E. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to

Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.



conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written

instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof

panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of steel

framing, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip

process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating

designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Embossed finish.

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'


4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-

colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a

minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

5. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


the following:

A. MBCI

B. Berridge Manufacturing Co.

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,

nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant;

of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels

and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel

manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum,

consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-

modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C);

ASTM D 1970.



3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.;

CCW WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra.

c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.

d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.

e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying

with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to

substrate.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion

resistance unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements

2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22 mm).

C. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange.

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated.

3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness

of 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire.

D. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall

attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements

E. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,

holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to

substrates.




A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded

studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-

applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil

(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of

asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping side

edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners

in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Roof Panels: Formed with alternating curved ribs

spaced at 2.67 inches (68 mm) o.c. across width of panel.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “7/8”

Corrugated” by Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation or comparable product by one of

the following:

a. AEP-Span.

b. Alcoa Inc.

c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.

d. Copper Sales, Inc.

e. Fabral.

f. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.

g. Galvamet; Galvacer Building Systems.

h. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L. P.

i. McElroy Metal, Inc.

j. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.

k. Metecno-Morin Corporation; Division of Metecno Inc.

2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 20ga. Standard nominal thickness.

a. Exterior Finish: Kynar (PVDF)

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range

3. Panel Coverage: 34.67 inches (881 mm)

4. Panel Height: 7/8”

2.7 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and

interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to

supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight

installation.



B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels.

1. Finish: White

2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.

C. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges and

intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with flush joint between

panels.


following:

a. AEP-Span.

b. Architectural Building Components.

c. ATAS International, Inc.

d. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

e. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.

f. Copper Sales, Inc.

g. Dimensional Metals, Inc.

h. Englert, Inc.

i. Fabral.

j. IMETCO.

k. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L. P.

l. McElroy Metal, Inc.

m. Merchant & Evans.

n. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.

o. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.

p. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

q. Ultra Seam Incorporated.

2. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels.

3. Panel Coverage: 16 inches (406 mm)

4. Panel Height: 1.0 inch (25 mm).

5. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as

required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,

ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match

material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof

panels.

2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.



B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating,

minimum 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against

weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves,

rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with

same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.

C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with

end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-

(2400-mm-) long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) o.c.,

fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at

outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.

D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot- (3-m-) long

sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,

by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated

performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural

requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight

and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,

and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

2. End Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form

seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. End Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.

Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for

application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.



2.10 FINISHES



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels,

and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within

alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel

manufacturer.

D. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel

installation.

E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of

interfering with insulation attachment.

B. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof sheathing on entire roof surface. Attach

with substrate-board fasteners.

1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof

slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

2. Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated construction.



C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof

panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with

requirements for assemblies indicated.

3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or

restricted by shipping limitations.

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location

for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction.

Predrill panels for fasteners.

1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at center of panel

length.

2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal

movement.

C. Install metal roof panels as follows:

1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. (27.8 sq. m.)

in presence of factory-authorized representative.

2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted.

3. Install panels perpendicular to purlins.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

5. Provide metal closures at rake edges and rake walls.

6. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of

all openings.

7. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

8. End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports.

Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four-panel splice condition.

9. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.

D. Fasteners:

1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place,

using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.



F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by

applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent

separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact

wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for

weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and

sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.

Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

3.4 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. In addition to complying with requirements in "Metal Roof Panel Installation, General" Article,

install metal soffit panels to comply with requirements in this article.

B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels

perpendicular to support framing.

1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at

perimeter of all openings.

C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping

screws. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower

panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,

copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,

and similar items.



B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners

where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to

form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in

waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24

inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be

used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints

of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic

sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to

eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using manufacturer's

standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal

expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold

downspouts securely 1-inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at

approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

E. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases

where they meet metal roof panels.

F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to

metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4

inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-

mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do

not comply with specified requirements.



C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07532 - 1

SECTION 07532 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered membrane roofing system.

2. Roof insulation.


1. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for furnishing acoustical deck rib insulation.

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking

3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration

flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.

5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's

"Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems,"

before multiplication by a safety factor.

C. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in

SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing

Systems," after multiplication by a safety factor.


A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not

permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,

and exposure to weather without failure.



B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply

with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that

are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as

applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

D. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that

have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist the factored

design uplift pressures calculated according to SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully

Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems."

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other Work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Insulation fastening patterns.

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system.

H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed

roofing installation.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's warranty.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane

roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method

below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency

representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck

Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's


3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for

storing and mixing with other components.



B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored

liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.



conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, and other components of

membrane roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following

requirements apply for product selection:


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Sure Seal, adhered 90 mil thick non-reinforced

EPDM membrane.

b. Firestone Building Products; Rubber Gard/EPDM Platinum Membrane.

c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company; EPDM NR 90 mil.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457005613





2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet

made from EPDM, and as follows:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Celotex Corporation.

c. ERSystems.

d. Firestone Building Products Company.

e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.

f. International Diamond Systems.

g. Johns Manville International, Inc.

h. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.

i. Protective Coatings, Inc.

j. Roofing Products International, Inc.

k. Stafast Roofing Products.

l. Versico Inc.

2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.

3. Exposed Face Color: Black.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to

application.

C. Epichlorohydrin Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, unreinforced flexible sheet with the following

typical properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:

1. Tensile Strength: 1500 psi (10.3 MPa); ASTM D 412.

2. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent; ASTM D 412.

3. Tear Resistance: 150 lbf/in. (26.3 kN/m); ASTM D 412.

4. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C); ASTM D 746.

5. Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated

sample at 104 deg F (40 deg C) and 100-pphm (100-MPa) ozone; ASTM D 1149.

6. Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours' immersion

in diesel fuel No. 2 at 158 deg F (70 deg C); ASTM D 471.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.

E. Cold Fluid-Applied Membrane Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied bonding

adhesive formulated to adhere fleece-backed roofing membrane to substrate.

F. Seaming Material: Single-component butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner



G. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing

membrane.

H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

I. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

J. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-

resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and

acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and

referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 aluminum foil facer on both

major surfaces.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AlliedSignal Inc.; Commercial Roofing Systems.

b. Apache Products Company.

c. Atlas Roofing Corporation.

d. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

e. Celotex Corporation.

f. Firestone Building Products Company.

g. GAF Materials Corp.

h. GenFlex Roofing Systems.

i. Hunter Panels, LLC.

j. Johns Manville International, Inc.

k. Koppers Industries.

l. RMAX.

C. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728, rigid, mineral-aggregate thermal insulation board

composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top

surface seal-coated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AlliedSignal Inc.; Commercial Roofing Systems.

b. Celotex Corporation.

c. GAF Materials Corp.

d. Johns Manville International, Inc.

e. Koppers Industries.

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch

per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.



2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-

resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and

acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated

to adhere roof insulation to substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof

drains are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with

requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."

4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary

moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is

forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Division 05 Section "Steel

Decking," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions.



3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof

insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.

Where overall insulation thickness is 1 inch (25 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with

joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in

each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does

not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch

(6 mm) with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units.

H. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq.

m) and allow primer to dry.

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus

or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.

3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.

I. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof

insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified

Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

J. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first

layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for

fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for

specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of

roof.



3. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied

within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.

4. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.

K. Install protection boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end

joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified

Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.4 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system

manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before

installing.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's

technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum

dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at

rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane.

Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.

E. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Apply a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt to substrate at temperature

and rate required by manufacturer and install fleece-backed roofing membrane. Do not apply

roofing asphalt to splice area of roofing membrane.

F. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Apply cold fluid-applied adhesive to substrate at rate required

by manufacturer and install fleece-backed roofing membrane.

G. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and

perimeter of roofing.

H. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

I. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly

roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written

instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges

of roofing membrane terminations.

1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by

membrane roofing system manufacturer.

J. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and

firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's



written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed

edges of roofing membrane terminations.

K. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.

L. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing

membrane in place with clamping ring.

M. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie into existing roofing.

N. Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow

to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping

sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of

sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars.

3.6 COATING INSTALLATION

A. Apply coatings to roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written recommendations, by

spray, roller, or other suitable application method.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to

inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or

inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.



D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine


3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction

period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to

Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with

requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition

free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty

requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:

1. Manufactured reglets.

2. Formed roof drainage system.

3. Formed wall flashing and trim.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing through-wall flashing,

reglets, and other sheet metal flashing and trim.

2. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for factory-formed metal roof panels and

flashing and trim not part of sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Division 07 Section “EPDM Roofing” for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral

with roofing membrane.

4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim

sealants.


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,

thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and

fastener disengagement.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by

preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist

rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base

engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and

nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.

C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to

building interior.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and

dimensions.

3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,

including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.

4. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and

contraction.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are

indicated.

1. Copper Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in


1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of

roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members.

4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.


A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing

and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent

bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated

covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials

that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:



2.2 SHEET METALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

1. Finish: No. 2D (dull, cold rolled)

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with

ASTM D 4397.

B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing

and trim installation.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or

factory-applied coating.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with

hex washer head.

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal

gutter width.

C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by

stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape

with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.



E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain

watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,

polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited

movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted

joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil



I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Through-Wall Ribbed Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for

embedment in masonry with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide

an integral mortar bond.

1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

a. Products:

1) Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail).

2) Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth).

3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking

Thruwall Flashing.

B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of

separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.

b. Fry Reglet Corporation.

c. Heckmann Building Products Inc.

d. Hickman, W. P. Company.

e. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.

f. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick

3. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

4. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure

flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal

counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

5. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before

counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.




A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and

other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field

measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks

and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams

and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-

lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric

sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot

be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)

deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal

flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or

from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

2.7 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,

and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.

Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of

size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate

expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Gutter Style: A

2. Expansion Joints: Lap type.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with

metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material:

a. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.



C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to

exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm)

beyond can’t or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.

1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material:

a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick.

2.8 FINISHES



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.





minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding

rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other

permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

1. Coat side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where

flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.



2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a

course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof

performance.

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks.

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two

fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600

mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be

used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked

flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within

joints.

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)

for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.

3. Copper: Use copper, hardware bronze, or stainless-steel fasteners.

4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than

1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient

temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and

21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting

proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-

type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).


"Joint Sealants."

I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges

of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except where pretinned surface

would show in finished Work.

1. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Pretin edges of uncoated sheets to be soldered using solder

recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux

residue from metal after soldering.



2. Copper Soldering: Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets using solder

recommended for copper work.

3. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated, do not tin edges, but wire brush lead

coating before soldering.

4. Lead-Coated Copper Soldering: Wire brush edges of sheets before soldering.

5. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow

solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from

exposed surfaces.

J. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support

scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered

edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.

2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.

3. Seal or solder exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head.

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements

and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where

possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams

that will be permanently watertight.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top

edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base

flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend

counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum

of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.

1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead

wedges and sealant.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with

flashing.

2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead

flashing on vent piping.

3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture

according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall

flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.



B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of manufactured through-wall flashing is specified in

Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

C. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar

flashings to extend [4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused

fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition

during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.

c. Tile control and expansion joints.

d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry.

e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows.

f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint

fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.

3. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous

joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-

resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product

manufacturer.

C. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's

Sealant Validation Program.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for

installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint

substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than four pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and

compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"

Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a

36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work.



1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to

ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to

ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for

compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and

cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing

standard specifications and test methods.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their

adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of

product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory

adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to

joint substrates during testing.

F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made

under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for

materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive

elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in





A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or

replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint

sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by

structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2

articles.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other

Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply

with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D

(EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each

liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920

classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be

nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to

ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for

joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone

testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference

to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless


D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will

come in repeated contact with food; provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Multicomponent Nonsag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 H.P.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).

3. Class: 50.

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated

with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, and ceramic tile

F. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

c. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).

d. GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.

e. Pecora Corporation; 864.

f. Pecora Corporation; 890.



g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641.

h. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal.

i. Tremco; Spectrem 3.

j. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.

k. Dow Corning Corporation; 795

l. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000.

m. GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.

n. Pecora Corporation; 865.

o. Pecora Corporation; 895.

p. Pecora Corporation; 898.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 100/50.


5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated

with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, ceramic tile

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per

ASTM C 1248.

G. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.

c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 Clear.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25.


5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: Perimeter of toilet fixtures and toilet accessories.

H. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:

1. Products:

a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.

b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE.

c. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type I (Self Leveling).

d. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 Type I (Self Leveling).

e. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.

f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270SL.

g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7201.

h. Tremco; THC-901.

i. Tremco; THC-900.

j. Tremco; Vulkem 245.

k. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type H.

l. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type M.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).

3. Class: 25.

4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: Use in the following Joint Substrates: brick, ceramic

and other horizontal substrates.



2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311 or FS TT-S-00230.

1. Products:

a. Schnee-Moorehead, Inc.; Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant.

b. Tremco; Mono 555.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.

B. Products:

1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.

2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.

4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.

5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured

low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-

curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.

c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.

d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal.

B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam

sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying,

water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint

widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with

protective wrapping; develops a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree

specified by manufacturer; and complies with the following:

1. Products:

a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.

b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600.

c. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite B.

d. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite Standard.

e. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.

2. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and

compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants.

a. Density: Manufacturer's standard



2.7 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a

solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;

with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application

indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281

and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with

adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and

complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid

sealant.

2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications

indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface

skin), O (open-cell material) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-

sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant

depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying

with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at

temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low

compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and

to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-

adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.



B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote

optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-

sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean, porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable

of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after

cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed

air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply

primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to

areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.



C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by

cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for

use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and

conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform

beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of

sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.



5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed

tooled joints.

H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.

2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with

preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a

bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6

mm) inside masking tape.

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet

extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform

contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical

joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion

with a razor knife.

J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after

removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal

continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient

temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to

sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric

sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor

per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab:

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration

complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion

passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.



5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints

were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration,

and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures

used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new

sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or

noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove

sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately

so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1

SECTION 08111 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into

masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.

3. Division 9 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow

metal doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design.

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.



C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision

of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to NFPA 252.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,

provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard

construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for

size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors

that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250

deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a

vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood

blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air

circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor

bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.

2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.

3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Firedoor Corporation.

7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.

8. Habersham Metal Products Company.

9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.

10. Kewanee Corporation (The).

11. Mesker Door Inc.

12. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

13. Security Metal Products Corp.

14. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

15. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating

designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.



E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m)

density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50,

respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil



2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with

smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection [and temperature-rise]

ratings indicated.

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu

(0.704 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

1) Locations: Exterior doors.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge

a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).

4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm)

radius.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end

closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."



B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors

complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and

model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet

is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing

ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates

from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel

sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated.

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is

indicated.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated.

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates

from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not

less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2

inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177

inch (4.5 mm) thick.



B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,

and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for

adjoining hollow metal work.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from

same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16

mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from

same material as frames in which they are installed.

D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm)

above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet

closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground

smooth and flush with frame.

1. Provide terminated stops.

2.8 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or

baffles formed of 0.020-inch- ((0.5-mm-)) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-

(0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped

blades.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.



2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where

practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project

site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,

flush, and invisible.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners


3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot

welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as

follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.

4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as

follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or

hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door

Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door

Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware.



3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form

corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow

metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors

and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.11 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer

manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite

prolonged exposure.

B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3 for

performance and acceptance criteria.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line

from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with

ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;

grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.



4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm).

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08332 - 1

SECTION 08332 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of manual and electric-motor-operated overhead

coiling doors:

1. Service doors.

2. Insulated service doors.


1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.

2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and

accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to

the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of

door components:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward

and outward.

2. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to

ASTM E 1886.

a. Level of Protection: Basic Protection.

b. Wind: 110 mph pressure test to 1/2 and 1-1/2 x design pressure (positive and

negative).

B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators

capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the

following:

1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in

manufacturer's product data.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single

manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.

2. Atlas Door; Div. of Clopay Building Products Company, Inc.

3. Cookson Company.

4. Cornell Iron Works Inc.

5. Dynamic Closures Corporation.

6. Mahon Door Corporation.

7. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.

8. Metro Door.

9. Overhead Door Corp.

10. Pacific Rolling Doors Co.

11. Raynor.

12. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.

13. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

14. Windsor Door, a MAGNATRAX Corporation.



2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to

withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended

by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS)

sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.

a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm).

b. Flat profile slats.

2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or

polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and

smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose

insulation completely within metal slat faces.

3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat

B. Endlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to

curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than

alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8

inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum extrusions to suit type

of curtain slats.

D. Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape,

either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.

1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible

vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion

bumper for interior door.

E. Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or

channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to

operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- (5-

mm-) thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and

ASTM A 123/A 123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on

guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism

at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top

and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide

fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide

intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Fabricate hoods for steel doors of minimum 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, hot-dip

galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M.



2. Fabricate hoods for stainless-steel doors of minimum 0.025-inch- (0.65-mm-) thick

stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying with ASTM A 666.

3. Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame.

4. Fabricate hoods for aluminum doors, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum

thickness, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

5. Shape: Square.

6. Exterior-Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying joint

sealant.

B. Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal; 0.078-inch

(2.0-mm) minimum thickness.

C. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping

gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use

1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.

1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

2. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick

seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized

steel lifting handles on each side of door.

1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

E. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by

padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

F. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

G. If door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when

door is locked.

H. Provide automatic-closing device that is inoperative during normal door operations, with

oscillating governor unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80 and with an easily tested

and reset release mechanism, and designed to be activated by the following:

1. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F (74

deg C); interconnected and mounted on both sides of door opening.

2. Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled smoke detector and door-holder-release devices.

3. Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled heat detector and door-holder-release devices.

4. Building fire alarm and detection system and door-holder-release devices.

2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring

mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with

barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating

members.



B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or

seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up

curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5

mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs.

Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from

outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring

ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-

rolled steel plate.

2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and

provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, with

electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-

operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking

door, and accessories required for proper operation.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically

engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation

while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and

operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically

prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and

without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,

with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.

F. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft-type door operator

unit consisting of electric motor, belt-reduction drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive.

1. Through-wall-mounted motor operator.

G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated,

electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start,

accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2

m/s) and not more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type.

2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.



3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building

electrical system.

4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

5. Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motor, fitted with plugged drain,

and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated.

H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-

button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-

purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type,

NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

I. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic

safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor

immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction

in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to

detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring

feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

2. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located

within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor

immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using

manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.

1) Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device.

J. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to

automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

K. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.

2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATOR

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Chain-hoist operator: consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and

guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf force for door operation. Provide

alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

C. Provide operator with through-wall shaft operation.

D. Provide operator with manufacturer’s standard removable operating arm.




A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are




minimize contrast.

2.8 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES

A. Factory Primer for Field Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied

finish according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,

application, and minimum dry film thickness.

1. Apply to ferrous surfaces except zinc-coated metal.

B. Baked Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked finish consisting of primer and topcoat according

to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application,

thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.

C. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish consisting of primer and

topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment,

application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.

1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or

distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.



3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release

system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training."



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1

SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts.

a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with

aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this

Section.


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,

without failure, the effects of the following:

1. Structural loads.

2. Thermal movements.

3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

5. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.

b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing.

d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.

e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

g. Sealant failure.

h. Failure of operating units to function properly.



B. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-

framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. Provide sealant that fails cohesively

before sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each

substrate and joint condition required.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no

sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate

from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal

strength.

C. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural-sealant joints

of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).

D. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: 20 psf.

E. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6

inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than

13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing

lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which

reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces

edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly

below to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units

directly below to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

F. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to

ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent

deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.

Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain

and nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.

H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed

glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested

according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)



I. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not

evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to

ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load

design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing

areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to

AAMA 1503.

K. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and

framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq.

m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.

2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.

3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,

functions, quantities, and locations.


D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, compatibility and

adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint

substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with

sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results for sealant performance

and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems.

G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.




A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work

of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including

Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard

units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of

tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

a. Include structural-sealant-glazing quality-control program development and

reporting complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not

limited to, system material qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant-testing

program, and procedures and intervals for system fabrication and installation

reviews and checks.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by

dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate

to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are

indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction

testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory

data to Architect for review.


Code--Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed

systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.


the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems

without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions

correspond to established dimensions.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with

requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.

c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.

e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.

f. Failure of operating components to function properly.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on Vistawall

Architectural Products, Aluminum Storefront Series 3000. Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.

2. CMI Architectural Products, Inc.

3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.

4. EFCO Corporation.

5. Kawneer.

6. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

7. Tubelite Inc.

8. United States Aluminum.

9. Vistawall Architectural Products.

10. YKK AP America Inc.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with

SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and

prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-

aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal

conductance.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural

movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts

complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing

compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to

match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible

deflection.



F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer

for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,

that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to

which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for

joint type and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with

system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for

use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in

aluminum-framed systems indicated.

a. Color: Black

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and

O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other

system components with which it comes in contact; and recommended by structural- and

weatherseal-sealant and aluminum-framed system manufacturers for this use.

a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per

coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or

grinding.



C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II,

clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration.

6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing

nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting

contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section

"Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp

or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:

a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.

Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and

according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof

joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to

produce weathertight installation.



I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum

tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3

mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware

manufacturers' written instructions.

1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second

closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75

mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge.



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.


1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".

2. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of

overhead door assemblies.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,

purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

1. Thresholds, weather stripping, and cylinders for locks specified in other Sections.

2. Permanent cores to be installed by Owner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors

complies with listed fire door assemblies.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.



a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's

"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and

number and date each page.

b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as

in the Contract Documents.

c. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door

and frame.

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware

item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening

including name and manufacturer.

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.

5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

7) Mounting locations for door hardware.

8) Door and frame sizes and materials.

9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,

sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions

that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to

enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to

enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.

10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and

frame.

d. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,

particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of

other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,

Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other

information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key

set to unique door designations.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a

qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to

consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard

units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,


1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,

unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that

are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

are acceptable.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to

Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,

and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or

package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring

inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in

Division 03.

B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to

be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply

with indicated requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY


replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.



2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:

a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and

removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and

adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as

those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and

door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named

manufacturers' products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and

requirements for description, quality, and function.

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:






2.2 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm).

2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm).

B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into

wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.

2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.

3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.

D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin

2. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.

E. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.

2. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.

3. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors.

Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product

Directory."

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).

2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).

4. Hager Companies (HAG).

5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).

6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).

7. PBB, Inc. (PBB).

8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).



2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans

with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not

require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool,

or special knowledge for operation.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Wrought.

a. Corbin/Russwin; trim design shall be “Newport”.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought

3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

4. Lockset Designs: Corbin/Russwin or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer,

provide designs that match those designated.

D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.

2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) bolt throw.

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with

curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply

with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1

1. Manufacturers:

a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. (ALH).

b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).

c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).

d. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).

e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).

f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR).

g. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS).



h. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL).

i. Marks USA (MKS).

j. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).

k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

l. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

m. Security Door Controls (SDC).

n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(YAL).

2.6 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices

are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not

require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool,

or special knowledge for operation.

D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection,

based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors.

H. Manufacturers:

1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).

2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).


4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).

5. Detex Corporation (DTX).

6. Door Controls International (DCI).

7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH).

8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR).



9. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE).

10. Monarch Exit Devices & Door Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (MON).

11. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH).

12. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. (RCI).

13. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

14. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).

15. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).

2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless

steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Five.

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.

3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring.

4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.

a. High-Security Grade: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying

with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (Suffix A).

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the

following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other

manufacturers' cylinders.

2. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core

manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of

construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.

Provide 10 construction master keys.

a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

F. Manufacturers:

1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL).

2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).

3. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ASA).

4. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).

5. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).

6. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL).



7. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED).


9. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

10. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).

2.8 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.

2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

b. Master Keys: Five.

c. Grand Master Keys: Five.

d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.9 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;

containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-

gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; percent of the number of locks.

1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding

panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.

B. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL).

b. Knox Company (KNX).

c. Supra Products (SUP).

2.10 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1

B. General: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices.



C. Manufacturers:

1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).

2. Brink, R. R. Locking Systems, Inc. (RRB).

3. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS).

4. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES).

5. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE).

6. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH).

7. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. (RCI).

8. Security Door Controls (SDC).

9. Trine Access Technology (TAT).

10. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).

2.11 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices

are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not

require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open

door to minimum required width.

C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and

anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions

and requirements for opening force.

D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1: Provide type of arm required for closer to be located

on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR).

c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH).

d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR).

e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).

f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC).

g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).

h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(YAL).



2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.

Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are

not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum

diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).

2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).

3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).


5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).

6. Door Controls International (DCI).

7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH).

8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR).

9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).


11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES).

12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).

13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).

15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).


17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

18. Trimco (TBM).

2.13 DOOR GASKETING

A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.

B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,

light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive

fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is

closed.

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for

gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.



D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-

control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure

F. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are

easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

G. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

H. Manufacturers:


2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD).

3. National Guard Products (NGP).

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

5. Reese Enterprises (RE).

6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).

7. Zero International (ZRO).

2.14 THRESHOLDS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility

requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.

D. Solid Aluminum Threshold for heavy traffic overhead coiling door.

E. Manufacturers:


2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD).

3. National Guard Products (NGP).

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

5. Reese Enterprises (RE).

6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).



7. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).

8. Zero International (ZRO).

9. Elite Garage Floors

2.15 SANITARY DOOR OPENER

A. Description: Sanitary Door Openers are made of aluminum with a stain silver finish for pull-

open access to rooms. It is forearm operated which ensures arm is naturally released as door

swings inward without hand exposure.

B. Construction: Steel

C. Dimensions: 4” wide, 4” deep, 2” high

D. Basis of Design: Sanitary Door Opener by Global Industries, Model #WC641472.

2.16 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade

name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as

otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.

Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and

BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if

different from specified standard.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to

commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum

fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match

surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for

installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means

of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door

and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:

a. Mortise hinges to doors.

b. Strike plates to frames.

c. Closers to doors and frames.



3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is

provided:

a. Surface hinges to doors.

b. Closers to doors and frames.

c. Surface-mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

2.17 FINISHES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.





minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and

other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring

connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to

ANSI A250.6.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."



B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system

cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying

with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent

Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in

each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,

including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely

from an open position of 30 degrees.

2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage

lock bolt.

3. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep

period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds

to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the

door.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion,

Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting

operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door

hardware, and electrified door hardware.




A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 1

Section "Demonstration and Testing."


GLAZING 08800 - 1

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those

specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this

Section:

1. Windows.


1. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as

defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a

specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the

manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining

and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include

peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to

the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for

maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.

Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of

glass.


GLAZING 08800 - 2


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage

attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of

sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other

defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.

Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass

lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than

thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following

criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements:

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 90 mph

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set

vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 60 seconds

c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4

edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind

pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.

2) For insulating glass.

3) For laminated-glass lites.

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass

framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures

indicated below:

1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program

for the following methodologies:

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.

c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.


GLAZING 08800 - 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in

preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.

1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that

manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For installers.

E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer

indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and

for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

F. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:

1. Insulating glass.

2. Glazing sealants.

3. Glazing gaskets.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass

installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass

installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified

Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single

manufacturer for each glass type: insulating glass

C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-

control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator

program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units

from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source

from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article

from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience

and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.


GLAZING 08800 - 4

2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports

in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant

formulations within a 36-month period.

1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to

ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by

reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

G. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant

manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant,

gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric

glazing sealants:

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,

tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data

based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility

with, glazing materials matching those submitted.

H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently

marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another

certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2

articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one

side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft.

(0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that

comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II

materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."


GLAZING 08800 - 5

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units."

J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and

inspecting agency:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.

2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct

exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid

hermetic seal ruptures.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions

are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4

deg C).

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out

to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units

that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project

site, within specified warranty period indicated below.



GLAZING 08800 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:



2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class

indicated.

1. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent visible

light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87.

a. Products:

1) AFG Industries Inc.; Krystal Klear.

2) Pilkington Building Products North America; Optiwhite.

3) PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

B. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units

and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed

to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to

comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"

Article.

2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.

3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-

glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly

from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

b. Polyisobutylene and polysulfide.

c. Polyisobutylene and silicone.

d. Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.

e. Polyisobutylene and polyurethane.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

6. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction

complying with the following requirements:

a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish

b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.


GLAZING 08800 - 7

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,

complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile

and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.

3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.

5. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of

material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and

hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene.

2. EPDM.

3. Silicone.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.

5. Any material indicated above.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames

with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.


GLAZING 08800 - 8

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing

ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint

substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants GS-<#>:

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).

4) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.

5) Pecora Corporation; 864.

6) Pecora Corporation; 890.

7) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641.

8) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal.

9) Tremco; Spectrem 3.

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

c. Class: 50.

d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum

coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids

content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with

or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for

application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with

ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with

AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.


GLAZING 08800 - 9

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness

required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and

face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of

product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces

square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units MG: Class 1 (clear)

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units (IG)<:#>:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon Solarscreen Low-E, VE 1-55 #2 or a comparable

product by one of the following:

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch (25mm) and 1/4 inch

(6.0mm).

3. Interspace Content: Air.


GLAZING 08800 - 10

4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.

5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.

6. Visible Light Transmittance: 29 percent minimum.

7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .34 maximum.

8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .29 maximum.

9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 45 percent maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable

tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or

other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and

appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.


GLAZING 08800 - 11

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as

follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances

and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed

thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is

subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.


GLAZING 08800 - 12

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket

by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of

removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.

Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers

to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove

nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do

come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass

manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,

alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


GLAZING 08800 - 13

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GLAZING 08800 - 14



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09221 - 1

SECTION 09221 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Section 05400 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and

exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof

trusses.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Not lighter than 18 gate and 20 gage galvanized

steel, C-shaped, with 1-1/4 inch and 3/4-inch flange.

b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch



2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire,

or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch

b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.







PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building

structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that

hangers will develop their full strength.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.



D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to

inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or

otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.



D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems

meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other

and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet

measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between

parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 09290 - 1

SECTION 09290 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


Interior gypsum board.

Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

Gypsum board edge reveals.


Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" that supports gypsum board.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the following products:

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory

indicated.

1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from

weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat

to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area

and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to

type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


the following:

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. G-P Gypsum.

c. Lafarge North America Inc.

d. National Gypsum Company.

e. PABCO Gypsum.

f. USG Corporation.

g. Or engineer approved equal.

2.3 EXTERIOR SOFFIT BOARD

A. Fiber Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Gypsum Board Panels: ASTM C 931/C931M, with

manufacturer's standard edges.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's

standard edges.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment, BackerBoard.

b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.










C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

c. Lafarge North America Inc.

d. USG Corporation.

Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Edge reveal trim.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.









A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames

and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.



F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim

where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces

with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Single-Layer Application:

On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end

joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings according to

ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.

LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

L-Bead: Use where indicated.

U-Bead: Use where indicated.



3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended

for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM

C 840:

Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic mosaic tile.

2. Stone threshold installed as part of tile installation.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile

substrates.

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint

width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the

following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and

locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished

tile surfaces.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of

accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each

color and finish required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel.

Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or

producer.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and

physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate

from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this

Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Stone thresholds.

2. Waterproofing.

3. Joint sealants.

4. Cementitious backer units.

5. Metal edge strips.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.



C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and

contamination avoided.

D. Store liquid latexes in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces

from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,

remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for

product selection:



2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for

Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in

Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI

standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,

grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other



appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following

requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample

submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same

range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard

with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is

suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous

film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

2. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.

3. Buchtal Corporation USA.

4. Cerim-Floor Gres Ceramiche.

5. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P.

6. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc.

7. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.

8. GranitiFiandre.

9. Interceramic.

10. KPT, Inc.

11. Laufen USA.

12. Lone Star Ceramics Company.

13. Metropolitan Ceramics.

14. Monarch Tile, Inc.

15. Porcelanite, Inc.

16. Quarry Tile Company.

17. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

18. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

19. United States Ceramic Tile Company.

20. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Company.



B. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile CT-1: Factory-mounted flat tile as follows:

1. Composition: Porcelain

2. Module Size: Nominal 3 by 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).

4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.

5. Finish: Mat, clear glaze.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Crossville “Cross-Colors Mosaics” or a comparable product.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between

adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit

height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353

or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.

1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2. Description: Match Architect's sample.

3. Description: Provide the following:

a. Provide grey slate complying with ASTM 629, Classification II Interior, with fine,

even grain, honed finish.

2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.

2. Boiardi Products Corporation.

3. Bonsal, W. R., Company.

4. Bostik.

5. C-Cure.

6. Custom Building Products.

7. DAP, Inc.

8. Jamo Inc.

9. LATICRETE International Inc.

10. MAPEI Corporation.

11. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

12. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

13. TEC Specialty Products Inc.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive

to which only water must be added at Project site.



2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive.

a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-

4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base

polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed

joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;

Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with

fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that

are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.

b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.

c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.

d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not

change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products:

a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer.

b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer.

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.

d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard, Grout and Tile, Grout Sealer.

e. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer.

f. MAPEI Corporation; KER, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and

Tile.

g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.



h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.

i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and

curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108

Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before

installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,

or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives that comply with flatness

tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product

specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.



C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,

verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package

show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If

not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to

prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous

film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for

Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to

methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with

TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile

fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.

Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar

beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.


"Joint Sealants."



H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and

latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

3. For chemical-resistant furan grouts, comply with ANSI A108.8.

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule,

including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation

standards.

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation

standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

a. Tile floors in wet areas.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed

as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would

otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove

excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall

Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI

setting-bed standards.

B. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.

C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are

free of foreign matter.

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.



2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners

recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners

are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect

metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean

water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer

that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it

from clogging drains.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed

tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during

construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.07 CERAMIC TILE SCHEDULE

A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Crossville “Cross-Colors Mosaics”

1. Drawing Designation: CT-1, CT-2, CT-3

2. Application: For use on floor & floor

3. Composition: Porcelain

4. Surface: Smooth, Cross-Sheen (UPS)

5. Module Size: Nominal 3 by 3 inches

6. Actual Thickness: 1/4 inches

7. Face: Plain with cushion edges

8. Base: Provide integral cove base to transition floor tile to wall tile.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

exterior substrates:

1. Concrete.

2. Steel.

3. Galvanized metal.

4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).


1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this

Section.

2. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this

Section.

3. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on interior substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved

Products List."



2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material

and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co., Limited (Canada).

3. Bennette Paint Mfg. Co., Inc.

4. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing.

5. California Paints.

6. ChemRex.

7. Cloverdale Paint.

8. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.

9. Columbia Paint & Coatings.



10. Coronado Paint.

11. Davis Paint Company.

12. Del Technical Coatings.

13. Diamond Vogel Paints.

14. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.

15. Durant Paints Inc.

16. Duron, Inc.

17. Envirocoat Technologies Inc.

18. Farrell-Calhoun.

19. Flex Bon Paints.

20. Frazee Paint.

21. General Paint.

22. Griggs Paint.

23. Hallman Lindsay Quality Paints.

24. Hirshfield's, Inc.

25. ICI Devoe (Canada).

26. ICI Paints.

27. ICI Paints (Canada).

28. Insl-x.

29. Iowa Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.

30. Kelly-Moore Paints.

31. Kryton Canada Corporation.

32. Kwal-Howells Paint.

33. M.A.B. Paints.

34. McCormick Paints.

35. Miller Paint.

36. Mills Paint.

37. NCP Coatings.

38. Northern Paint.

39. PARA Paints.

40. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.

41. Porter Paints.

42. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

43. Rodda Paint Co.

44. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

45. Sico, Inc.

46. Sigma Coatings.

47. Smiland Paint Company.

48. Spectra-Tone.


50. Tower Paint.

51. Vista Paint.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

B. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.


C. Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69.


2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.


B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.


C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.


D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.

E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.




2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).


B. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg).


2.6 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS

A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).


2.7 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

1. VOC Content: E Range off E1.

2.8 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Plaster: 12 percent.

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.



D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-

applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do

not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

I. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might

impair bond of paints to substrates.



3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,

and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product

requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-

paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are

incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.



D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

2. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 3.1K.

a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer.



3. High-Build Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1L, applied to form dry film thickness of not less

than 10 mils (0.25 mm).

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior).

4. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 3.1N.

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

c. Topcoat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).

2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).

3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI EXT 5.1K.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.

c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.



C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.



2. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.



3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.



D. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.



2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.





INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Concrete.

2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

3. Steel.

4. Galvanized metal.

5. Gypsum board.


1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this

Section.

2. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this

Section.

3. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on exterior substrates.

4. Division 9 painting Sections for special-use coatings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:



2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.




A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved

Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).




A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and

color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co., Limited (Canada).

3. Bennette Paint Mfg. Co., Inc.



4. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing.

5. California Paints.

6. ChemRex.

7. Cloverdale Paint.

8. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.

9. Columbia Paint & Coatings.

10. Coronado Paint.

11. Davis Paint Company.

12. Diamond Vogel Paints.

13. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.

14. Durant Paints Inc.

15. Duron, Inc.

16. Envirocoat Technologies Inc.

17. Farrell-Calhoun.

18. Flex Bon Paints.

19. Frazee Paint.

20. General Paint.

21. Griggs Paint.

22. Hallman Lindsay Quality Paints.

23. Hirshfield's, Inc.

24. ICI Devoe (Canada).

25. ICI Paints.

26. ICI Paints (Canada).

27. Insl-x.

28. Iowa Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.

29. Kelly-Moore Paints.

30. Kryton Canada Corporation.

31. Kwal-Howells Paint.

32. M.A.B. Paints.

33. McCormick Paints.

34. Miller Paint.

35. Mills Paint.

36. Northern Paint.

37. PARA Paints.

38. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.

39. Porter Paints.

40. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

41. Rodda Paint Co.

42. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

43. Sico, Inc.

44. Sigma Coatings.

45. Smiland Paint Company.

46. Spectra-Tone.

47. Sterling Paint.


49. Tower Paint.

50. Vista Paint.



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that

comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following

chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a

fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more

benzene rings).

4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.

b. Acrylonitrile.

c. Antimony.

d. Benzene.

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.

f. Cadmium.

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

k. Diethyl phthalate.

l. Dimethyl phthalate.

m. Ethylbenzene.

n. Formaldehyde.

o. Hexavalent chromium.

p. Isophorone.

q. Lead.

r. Mercury.

s. Methyl ethyl ketone.

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

u. Methylene chloride.

v. Naphthalene.

w. Toluene (methylbenzene).

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.


2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1

2. Environmental Performance Rating: E1

B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.


2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.


B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.


C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR1

D. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.


2.6 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR1

B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR1.



2.7 ALKYD PAINTS

A. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).


B. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).


2. Environmental Performance Rating: E1

2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1/

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.



B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-

applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do

not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.



C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear.

b. Panelboards.

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,

and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-

paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are

incompatible.




A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.


defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior latex eggshell

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.


c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel semigloss.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.


c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss.



E. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd semigloss.



HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 1

SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating

systems on the following substrates.

1. Process piping.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and

application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of

topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Signed documentation from the coating manufacturers identifying their authorized

surface preparation inspection representatives.

E. Surface preparation certifications from the coating manufacturers' authorized

representatives.

F. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:



2. Printout of current data from manufacturer that demonstrates performance and

product equal to specification.

3. VOC content.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary

selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set

quality standards for materials and execution.



1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each coating system specified in Part 3.

a. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

mockups of additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to

Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves

such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of

the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

B. For all surfaces to be coated, an authorized representative of the coating manufacturer,

for the coating to be applied to a particular surface, shall inspect the surface and provide a

written and signed certification to the Engineer, certifying that he has inspected the

surface to be coated, that the surface preparation has been performed in accordance with

the coating manufacturer’s surface preparation recommendations, and that the surface is

ready to be coated.

C. Contractor shall not start application of any coating until the Engineer has inspected and

accepts the surface preparation and authorizes the Contractor to proceed with application

of the coating. Engineer will not authorize the Contractor to proceed with application of

the coating until the Engineer receives an acceptable surface preparation certification

from the coating manufacturer’s authorized representative.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with

ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.



1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less

than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


the following:

1. Tnemec

2. Sherwin Williams Industrial

3. Carboline.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. ASTM or other National Standards: Provide products that meet or exceed test data as

listed below. Only products with comparable or superior results shall be excepted.

B. Materials must be of same generic type. No submittals will be approved that reduce the

number of coat or raise the VOC levels.

C. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with

one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application

as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Primer/Intermediate Coat- High Solids Polyamide Epoxy.

1. Abrasion- ASTM D4060 (CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 gram load) No more than 68.5 mg loss

after 1,000 cycles, average of three tests.

2. Adhesion- ASTM D4541 No less than 1,909.3 psi adhesion after 10 freeze/thaw cycles,

average of three trials.

3. Cyclic Salt Fog- ASTM D5894 No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of the

film after 10,000 hours.

4. Hardness- ASTM D3363 No less than 4H pencil.

5. Humidity- ASTM D4585 No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of the film after

10,000 hours.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=548&mf=04&src=wd



6. Immersion- ASTM D870 No blistering, cracking or delamination of the film after 2 years

continuous immersion in tap water.

7. Salt Spray- ASTM B117 No blistering, cracking or delamination of them film and no

creepage at the scribe after 5000 hours.

8. Scrubbability- ASTM D2486 No less than 10,000 cycles scrub resistance, average of 2

panels.


A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following

procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when

samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project

site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and

certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove

non-complying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat

surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove

rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with

complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with

existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates

and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable

and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or

weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and

painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved

to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt,

oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using

methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. But not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to

comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed

equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged

items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple

coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish

coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate

coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until

cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,

brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass

lines and color breaks.




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Testing, at Contractor’s expense shall be conducted by a

firm or individual whose qualifications are subject to approval of the Engineer.

Contractor shall document the testing results, and submit to the Engineer for approval.

Inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply

with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for

testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that

complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials

from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent

finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by

cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an

undamaged condition.


defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fitting:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Primer- Series 66HS Epoxoline (4-6 mils DFT)

b. First Coat: Series 66HS Epoxoline (4-6 mils DFT)

c. Second Coat: Series 1081 (2-3 mils DFT)

2. Color selection shall be as specified in Division 15.



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1

SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows:

1. Toilet Enclosures: Floor anchored.

2. Urinal Screens: Floor anchored


1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse

shelves, and similar accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction

contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings.


the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without

field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction

to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL UNITS




following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. All American Metal Corp.

3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.

4. Ampco.

5. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

6. Flush Metal Partition Corp.

7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

8. Global Steel Products Corp.

9. Hadrian Inc.

10. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp.

11. Lambaton Universal.

12. Metpar Corp.

13. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.

14. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc.

2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS




following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. Ampco.

3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

4. Capitol Partitions, Inc.

5. Comtec Industries.

6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

7. Global Steel Products Corp.

8. Metpar Corp.

9. Santana Products, Inc.

10. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.

11. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc.

C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel

material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous

color and pattern throughout thickness of material.



1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.

2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, stainless-steel strip fastened to

exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

3. Polymer Panel Finish: Two colors and patterns in each room.

a. Panel Screen Color and Pattern: Linen, smooth texture.

b. Door Panel Color and Pattern: Metallic Grey EX, Dot Texture.

D. Pilaster Shoes: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer.

1. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster.

E. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer.

F. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to

exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware

and accessories.

1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized

aluminum.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for

anchoring to floor construction.

D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.

Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip

galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for

setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to

conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters

for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.



C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant

anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters.

Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for

standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a

minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible

to people with disabilities.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors

open at any angle up to 90 degrees.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide

units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at

compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides

of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended

anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure

continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops

of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when

doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into

structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,

and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters

when doors are in closed position.

D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level,

plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when

doors are in closed position.



E. Wall-Hung and Post-Supported Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit

supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written

instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors and doors in entrance screens to return doors to fully closed position.



LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, formed-aluminum louvers.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between

louver frames and adjoining construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames” or “Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames”.

3. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to

this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.


A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads

and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without

permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade

rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be

considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbs per sq. ft. acting

inward or outward.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing

buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other

detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to

both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


material surfaces.



C. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide

louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing

manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to

AMCA 500-L.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for

their preparation.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of

louver.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer

where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without

field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions

correspond to established dimensions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




following:

1. Louvers:

a. Airolite Company (The).

b. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.

c. Construction Specialties, Inc.

d. Greenheck.

e. Industrial Louvers, Inc.

f. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.

g. Metal Form Manufacturing Company, Inc.

h. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

i. Nystrom Building Products.

j. Reliable Products; Hart & Cooley, Inc.

k. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for

product selection:



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required

for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless

otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made

from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4

times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined

by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.




A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.

B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head

and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances

made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter

sealant joints.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by

manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less.

G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from

view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between

frame members necessary.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded

fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise

indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members

necessary.

2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver

1. Louver Depth: 4 inches

2. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle.

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance

requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for frames.

4. Mullion Type: Exposed.

5. Performance Requirements:

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver.

2.5 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Bird screening

B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6

inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.



C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are

attached.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.

3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.6-mm)

wire.




B. Finish louvers after assembly.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,

integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying

with AAMA 611.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of industry colors and color densities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of

anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery

of such items to Project site.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where

required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no

evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the

factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying

a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,

or dissimilar metals.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,

where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"

for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to

remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final

cleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not

harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains

of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect,

remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss

of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10440 - 1

SECTION 10440 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for

fire extinguisher.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule

with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance

manuals.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,

"Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an

independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and

function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10440 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection device indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from

the following manufacturers or approved equal:

a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

d. Potter Roemer LLC.

e. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location,

inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container FE-1: UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C,

10 LB. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in

enameled-aluminum container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Under lavatory guards.

3. Custodial accessories.

4. Grab bars.


1. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.

2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products

of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,

cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness,


B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-

inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

E. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES



B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of

the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

4. Bradley Corporation.

5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).



C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser

1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick Double Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted.

3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle

4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls.

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)

D. Warm-Air Dryer:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Xerator XL-BW-ECO.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted 40” (within ADA height range) above finished floor.

3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.

a. Operation Time: 80 seconds.

4. Cover Material and Finish: Zinc Dye Cast, Chrome-plated.

5. Electrical Requirements: Per manufacturer.

6. Stainless steel wall plate, 15-3/4 inch Wide by 33-3/4 inch Long by 1/16 inch Thick

beneath each dryer and mounted flush to wall, above coved ceramic base.

a. Xlerator stainless steel wall guard, Model Number 89S, mount with stainless steel

screws, dimpled plate for countersinking screws, minimum 3 screws at each

vertical site of plate.

b. Mount plate centered under air-dryer for equal extension of width beyond dryer

width.

E. Automatic Soap Dispenser:

1. Description: Automatic wall dispensers which releases premeasured amount of soap.

2. Hygiene Form: Foam, gel or liquid

3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.

4. Refill Size: 1,200 mL.

5. Materials: Plastic

F. Grab Bar:

1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish

3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings

G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:


2. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover

3. Receptacle: Removable.

4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).



H. Mirror Unit: Tilted and adjustable tilting mirrors are for use by persons in wheelchairs.

Adjustable tilting mirrors are prone to vandalism. In lieu of tilted mirrors, standard flat mirrors

can be mounted at heights to accommodate users in wheelchairs.

1. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard

2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove.

3. Size: As indicated on Drawings

4. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-165.

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS




following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to


the following:

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

2. TCI Products.

3. Truebro, Inc.

D. Under Lavatory Guard:

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that

prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without

removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to


the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

4. Bradley Corporation.

5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).



B. Utility Shelf:

1. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and

supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.

2. Size: 16 inches (406 mm) long by 6 inches (152 mm) deep.

3. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel,

No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-239.

2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf

3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm).

4. Hooks: Three.

5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.


a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.

b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.

D. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser:


2. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels


4. Lockset: Tumbler type.

5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser

1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.

2. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.

3. Capacity: 20 oz.

4. Materials: Translucent, shatter-resistant soap container

5. Lockset: Tumbler type.

6. Refill Indicator: Window type.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and

access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and

with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units’ level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested

according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 15010 - 1

SECTION 15010 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL

GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



B. The provisions of this section of the specifications are intended to govern the quality of

design, fabrication, workmanship, operation, etc., of all materials, equipment and

appurtenances to be provided under the various sections of the mechanical specifications and

all other sections that include equipment as part of the specified items.

C. Provide all coordination, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and

incidental to, the complete and satisfactory installation of process components and

appurtenances as shown and as specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish detailed shop drawings including dimensioned drawings, descriptive literature,

performance data, electrical characteristics, materials of construction and in general all

information necessary to prove compliance with the specifications.

B. Furnish detailed Operation and Maintenance manual for all items specified. As a minimum

manuals shall include operation and maintenance information and sequence of operation on

all systems and items of equipment. The data shall consist of: catalogs, dimensioned

drawings, brochures, bulletins, charts, schedules, assembly drawings, wiring diagrams,

recommended lubricant charts and schedules, operating weight, and other information

necessary for the Owner to establish an effective operating maintenance program.

1.3 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall provide warrants and guarantees to the Owner that all work will be in

accordance with the Contract Documents and that the equipment, material, workmanship,

performance and installation will not be defective. Contractor shall make the necessary

repairs and replacements any defective equipment at the convenience of the Owner for a time

Period, as noted in the respective equipment sections, after the completion of the Contract.

Unless specified otherwise Period shall be one year.



1.4 STANDARDS

A. References to standards, codes and specifications including amendments and errata are the

latest edition at the time the bids are taken. A list of these References is listed below:

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air

Conditioning Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers

MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association

SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.5 GENERAL DESIGN OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY

A. Equipment and machinery provided shall be of the latest and most improved design suitable

for the service of which it is to be used. Equipment and machinery shall be designed and

constructed to operate efficiently, continuously and quietly under the specified requirements

with a minimum of labor, power, maintenance, renewals and repairs. The design and

construction of equipment and machinery shall be such as to permit operation with minimum

noise, wear and vibration (maximum velocity of 30 feet per second unless otherwise

specified) when properly installed.

B. Ample room for erecting, repairs, inspecting and adjusting all equipment and machinery shall

be provided. The design, construction and installation of equipment and machinery shall

conform to and comply with the latest safety codes and regulations.

C. The design and construction of several similar units shall be such that they shall present a

uniform appearance and the arrangement shall be such that their operation is similar in all

respects. Fittings and fixtures of the same make and model shall be used. Equipment of

identical type and service shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

D. Equipment selected shall be of such size and general arrangement to suit the space in which

it is to be installed.



E. The various parts of the equipment and machinery shall be of plain shape and good lines,

especially designed and constructed for strength and durability. Castings shall be designed

and constructed to cool uniformly without shrinking strains and shall have good sized fillets

at all re-entrant corners. Sudden change of section shall be avoided.

F. Whenever possible, parts of each unit shall be made to gauge and be a duplicate of and

interchangeable with the same parts of other machines of the same size and kind.

G. All assemblies shall be completely shop fabricated and structural steel parts shall be shop

erected. Assemblies and structural steel parts shall be match-marked before being

disassembled for shipment. Parts shall be shipped assembled in as large unit as possible to

minimize reassembling in the field. All parts shall be amply proportioned for all stresses

which may occur during operation, and for any additional stresses which may occur during

fabrication and erection.

H. Unless otherwise specified, welding shall be in accordance with the latest standard

specifications for "Gas Tight Welding" of the American Welding Society.

I. Unless otherwise specified, galvanizing shall be hot-dipped, in accordance with the latest

standard specifications for "Zinc Coating" of the ASTM, Serial Designation A-123.

J. Unless otherwise specified, starters, H-O-A switches, pushbuttons and other electrical

devices shall be specified in Division 16 and 17, and shall be arranged as shown on the

Contract Drawings.

1.6 EXAMINATION

A. The general arrangement of piping and equipment shall be as shown on the Contract

Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Drawings and shall be

responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment in each installation, as intended,

without substantial alteration. Due to drawing scales it is not possible to indicate the exact

location of all piping and ductwork, offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required.

B. The Contractor shall carefully investigate space requirements for proper clearances and the

structural and finish conditions affecting the Work, and shall arrange such work accordingly,

furnishing such offsets, fittings, valves and accessories as required to meet such conditions.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The equipment shall be packaged to minimize possible damage from moisture, temperature

variations and impact due to shipping conditions. Exposed threads shall be protected with

tape or caps, openings shall be closed by caps or plugs. Detailed installation instructions

shall accompany the equipment.

B. The Contractor shall inspect the equipment when it is delivered to ensure that it is not

damaged. Store the equipment in a dry location and maintain the equipment per

Manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Dispose of packing materials in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.



PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. The specifications are based on products and equipment available at the time of design.

Coordinate any additional features or components that the manufacturer may have introduced

into the specified product and equipment in the interim. Specifically note manufacturer

modifications in the submittal and how the additional features impact the project. At the

discretion of the Engineer, changes in the equipment may disqualify a manufacturer as an

approved manufacturer.

B. The presence of a manufacturer or supplier name does not relieve the manufacturer from

meeting the performance and mechanical requirements shown in the Contract Documents.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials shall be in accordance with the following latest

Standard Specifications of the ASTM:

Structural Steel A-36

Gray Iron Castings A-48 or A-126

Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe A-53

Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip Galvanized) A-123

Carbon Steel Bolts A-307

Babbitt Metal B-23

Copper Alloys B-30

Copper Silicone Alloys B-98

Bronze (Manganese) B-138

B. All materials shall, if required, be tested and shall fulfill all requirements specified. Physical

tests may be made by the Owner. The Contractor at his own expense shall furnish test pieces

and samples in the number, shape, size and finish required by the Engineer. All broken

material shall become the property of the Owner. The failure of test specimens to fully

conform to the requirements of the specifications shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the

whole melt or stock from which samples were obtained.

C. Iron castings shall be smooth, clean and free from scale, lumps, blisters and other defects. No

plugging, welding or filling will be allowed.

D. The alloy grade number of all babbitt shall be that bearing alloy of a composition

recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment or machinery for the service required,

subject to the approval of the Engineer.

E. All bronze shall be made of new material and shall be free from objectionable imperfections.

If the materials show signs of improper mixing when being machined, the castings will be

rejected.



2.3 JOURNALS, BEARINGS AND KEYS

A. Journals and bearing surfaces shall be of sufficient size and properly proportioned for the

least wear and to avoid heating under all conditions, and where necessary, provisions shall

be made for easy removal and for proper adjustments. Journals shall be suitable boxes which,

where necessary, shall be lined with babbitt metal hammered into grooves and bored in place.

B. If bearings are of the ball bearing type, both inner and outer races as well as the balls shall be

heat treated steel to resist wear. The balls shall be of ample size to carry the maximum loads

with a large factor of safety to prevent flaking, spalling, or crushing. The balls shall be

properly spaced and held in position by rugged continuous spacing or retainer rings.

C. For press fit bearings, the shaft and housing tolerance shall be as defined by the Annular

Bearing Engineering Committee (ABEC), ABEC 1 through 7 depending on the equipment

application.

D. Unless otherwise specified, all anti-friction bearings, including ball, roller, and tapered roller

bearings, shall have a minimum ABMA B-10 life rating as follows:

Application B-10 Design Life

Blowers:

Continuous 8-h service 20,000-40,000

Continuous 24-h service 40,000-60,000

Continuous 24-h service

(extreme reliability)

100,000-200,000

Compressors 40,000-60,000

Conveyors 20,000-40,000

Electric Motors 20,000-30,000

Fans 40,000-50,000

Pumps 40,000-60,000

Mixers 60,000-100000

E. Rating life is defined as the number of hours that 90% of a group of bearings will complete

or exceed before the first evidence of fatigue develops in the material of either ring or any of

the rolling elements.

F. Unless specified with the equipment, as a minimum, submit B-10 bearing life calculations for

equipment listed above that are 20 Hp and larger.

G. Pins and keys shall be properly proportioned. Keys, nuts and all other parts which might

otherwise work loose shall be secured with approved locking devices.

2.4 LUBRICATION

A. All bearings, except those specifically requiring oil or water lubrication shall be pressure

grease lubricated. All lubrication points shall be readily accessible, away from locations

dangerous to personnel. Pressure grease lubrication fittings shall be the "Alemite" type as



made by the Stewart Warner Corporation, or equal with plastic caps to protect fittings from

corrosion and debris. The pattern of the fitting shall be selected for accessibility in lubricating

and shall meet the approval of the Engineer. Housings of grease lubricated bearings shall be

automatically exhausted to atmosphere to prevent excessive greasing.

B. Furnish lubrication charts and schedules for each piece of equipment or machinery.

Lubrication shall be Premium Grade. The charts and schedules shall designate each point of

lubrication, the type of lubricant to be applied and the frequency of lubrication. Charts and

schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer in quadruplicate, bound in folios, with each chart

and schedule protected by a transparent plastic envelope.

C. Furnish premium grade lubricants for the equipment provided under this contract.

D. Furnish one year's supply of each type of premium lubricant required. A printed list shall be

furnished with the lubricants, designating the specific lubricant to be used with each piece of

equipment. This is in addition to the required operating and maintenance manuals, which will

also contain lubrication requirements.

E. Provide stainless steel grease header blocks and extension hoses that are supported and

properly secured for grease fittings that are located in difficult to reach locations or near

rotating and dangerous equipment. The header block shall be adjacent to the equipment and

easily accessible as determined by the Engineer.

2.5 MOTORS AND CONTROLS - GENERAL

A. Motors and controls shall conform to the latest requirements of IEEE and NEMA, and where

required, shall be UL listed. Sizes are specified with the driven equipment. Motor starting

and control equipment is specified either with the motor which is controlled or in an electrical

or controls specification section. Consult all specification sections to determine responsibility

for motors and controls and provide complete motor performance specifications with shop

drawings submittal data. All shop drawings and motor submittal data shall identify motor

duty type and model in addition to nameplate data and performance specifications, including

efficiencies and power factors.

B. Motors shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest revision of NEMA

Standard MG 1.

C. Motors shall be suitable for use under the conditions and with the equipment to which applied

and designed for operation on the electrical systems indicated.

D. Motor capacities shall be such that the horsepower rating and the rated full-load current is not

exceeded while operating under the specified operating conditions. Under no condition shall

the motor current exceed that indicated on the nameplate.

E. Motor sizes noted in the individual equipment specifications are minimum requirements only.

Provide motors, electrical circuits and equipment of ample capacity to operate the equipment

without overload, without exceeding the rated full-load current, or overheating at full-load

capacity under the most severe operating service of this equipment. Motors shall have

sufficient torque to accelerate the total WR squared of the driven equipment to operating

speed.



F. Motors shall be continuous duty type and shall operate quietly at all speeds and loads. The

sound level shall not exceed that which is published by the manufacturer.

G. Motors shall be designed for operation on 60 hertz power service. Unless otherwise specified

or shown, motors smaller than 3/4 horsepower shall be single phase, and motors 3/4

horsepower and larger shall be 3 phase.

H. Motors shall be mounted so that the motor can be removed without removing the entire driven

unit.

I. Motors mounted in an explosive vapor or gas environment shall be explosion proof, rated for

Class 1, Division 1. Motors mounted in an explosive dust environment shall be explosion

proof, rated for Class 2, Division 1.

J. Single phase motors smaller than 1/20 horsepower shall be 115 volt, permanent split capacitor

or shaded pole type with ball or sleeve bearing. These motors shall not be used for general

power purposes and shall only be provided as built-in components of such mechanical

equipment as fans, unit heaters, humidifiers and damper controllers.

K. Single phase motors 1/20 horsepower and larger shall be ball bearing, drip-proof, totally

enclosed or explosion proof, as indicated, with Class A or B insulation, as standard with the

motor manufacturer; 115, 115/230, 208 or 230 volts as required; capacitor start-induction run,

permanent split capacitor, or repulsion start-induction run type.

L. Except as otherwise specified in the various specification sections, 3 phase motors shall meet

the requirements of this paragraph. Motors shall be NEMA design B squirrel cage induction

type. Insulation shall be Class F and motor shall be rated at no greater than 50 deg. C rise for

open motors and 65 deg C rise for closed motors both above an ambient temperature of

45deg.C. At 40 deg. C ambient temperature explosion-proof and totally enclosed motors shall

have a 1.00 service factor and drip-proof motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 or higher.

Motors specified for operation at 480 volts shall have a nameplate listing of 460 volts.

M. Motor Enclosures: Unless otherwise noted, provide the following motor enclosures based on

installation environment:

Dry conditioned spaces ODP

Equipment spaces- low risk of splashing ODP

Equipment Space- splashing hazard TEFC

Equipment Spaces- splashing & corrosive TENV

Equipment Spaces- explosive TEXP



N. Unless otherwise specified, three phase motors shall be the NEMA Premium™ type.

Minimum three phase motor efficiencies at full load for motors having nominal rated speeds

of:

ODP MOTORS RPM

HP 3600 (2-pole) 1800 (4-pole) 1200 (6-pole)

1 -- 85.5 82.5

1-1/2 84 86.5 86.5

2 85.5 86.5 87.5

3 85.5 89.5 88.5

5 86.5 89.5 89.5

7-1/2 88.5 91.0 90.2

10 89.5 91.7 91.7

15 90.2 93.0 91.7

20 91.0 93.0 92.4

25 91.7 93.6 93.0

30 91.7 94.1 93.6

40 92.4 94.1 94.1

50 93.0 94.5 94.1

60 93.6 95.0 94.5

75 93.6 95.0 94.5

100 93.6 95.4 95.0

125 94.1 95.4 95.0

150 94.1 95.8 95.4

200 95.0 95.8 95.4

TEFC

MOTORS

RPM

HP 3600 (2-pole) 1800 (4-pole) 1200 (6-pole)

1 77.0 85.5 82.5

1-1/2 84.0 86.5 87.5

2 85.5 86.5 88.5

3 86.5 89.5 89.5

5 88.5 89.5 89.5

7-1/2 89.5 91.7 91.0

10 90.2 91.7 91.0

15 91.0 92.4 91.7

20 91.0 93.0 91.7

25 91.7 93.6 93.0

30 91.7 93.6 93.0

40 92.4 94.1 94.1

50 93.0 94.5 94.1



60 93.6 95.0 94.5

75 93.6 95.4 94.5

100 94.1 95.4 95.0

125 95.0 95.4 95.0

150 95.0 95.8 95.8

200 95.4 96.2 95.8

Three phase motors shall be the Premium Efficiency Motor of U.S. Electrical Motors,

the MAC II High Efficiency motor of Westinghouse Electric Corporation, or equal.

O. Motors 25 horsepower and larger shall be as specified with the driven equipment in these

specifications.

P. Belt-connected motors shall have adjustable bases and set screws to maintain proper belt

tension. All motors shall have adjustable sheaves for speed adjustment.

2.6 FLANGES AND BOLTS

A. Flanges shall be cast solid, and bolt holes shall be drilled and spot-faced on the back. Stud

holes shall not be drilled through. Flanges shall be uniform in thickness and , where required,

shall be machined smooth.

B. Jacking screws shall be provided for covers, etc. where required, and also suitable eye bolts

for lifting.

2.7 DRIVE COUPLINGS

A. Unless otherwise noted for a particular item of equipment, all equipment where flexible drive

couplings are specified, shall be provided with a flexible coupling between each motor and

its driven equipment. A heavy duty self-aligning forged steel coupling with sealed

lubrication. Couplings shall be of all metal construction and shall be moisture proof and

dustproof as manufactured by Falk, Sier-Bath, or equal.

B. One hub of the coupling shall be firmly fixed and keyed to the equipment shaft with the other

hub similarly secured to the abutting drive shaft. Couplings shall be placed as close as

possible to the driven equipment and the motor bearings to make compactly arranged units.

Arrangement of couplings shall be such that there is sufficient room to place a dial indicator

for alignment checking of shafts of the motor driven equipment.

C. Size the coupling in accordance with coupling and motor/drive manufactures

recommendations.

D. Each coupling shall be provided with an easily removable guard meeting all OSHA

requirements.

E. Pumping equipment shall be field aligned using a dial indicator in accordance with the

procedures established by the latest revision of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Parallel and

angular misalignment shall not exceed the limits recommended by both the equipment and

the coupling manufacturer.



F. Other motors/drives equipment that uses a flexible coupling shall be aligned in accordance

with the procedures established by the latest revision of the Governing Body and Standard

that establishes the criteria for the type of equipment installed. If no such Governing Body

or Standard exist, the acceptable angular and parallel misalignment shall not be greater than

0.70 times the coupling manufacturers recommended maximum misalignment.

2.8 EQUIPMENT BEDPLATES

A. Mechanical equipment mounted on masonry floors shall be provided with a concrete pad that

is, unless otherwise indicated, a minimum four inches high. Higher pads shall be provided if

required to accommodate piping connections to equipment. Where motors 10 horsepower

and larger, and equipment driven by motors 10 horsepower and larger, are to be mounted on

a raised concrete pad, L-shaped threaded mounting studs shall be cast into the concrete; insert

type anchors installed after setting of the concrete will not be acceptable for these

applications.

B. The various items of motor driven equipment, such as pumps, shall be mounted on structural

steel bedplates. The bedplates shall be adequate size to accommodate the equipment and its

motor, to form an integral rigid mounting platform. Steel or brass shims shall be used to level

equipment bedplates mounted in contact with concrete pads or floors. Jacking bolts or jacking

(leveling) nuts on mounting studs shall not be used in lieu of shims. Bedplates shall be grouted

to the concrete base and shall be filled with grout in all instances where the manufacturer has

made provision for introducing grouting mixture into bedplate cavities. It shall be the

contractor's complete responsibility to determine the proper method, to provide all materials

and components required, and to coordinate the work, to set, couple, align and install all

equipment in a satisfactory manner.

C. All centrifugal fans and air compressors shall be mounted on steel springs or rubber-in-shear

vibration isolation units as recommended by the manufacturer. These may be either shop

provided with the equipment or separately field mounted.

2.9 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

A. Anchors shall be in accordance with Division 5 or manufacturer’s recommendation. The

more stringent requirement shall be used.

B. Supports shall be as specified elsewhere in this Division of the Specifications and as shown

on the Contract Drawings.

C. Provide foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers required for all equipment, piping,

pumps, tanks, compressors and for all other equipment provided. Submit drawings to the

Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication or construction of same. Construction of

foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers, where mounted on the floor, shall be of the same

materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material.



2.10 CONTROLS

A. Controls shall be as described in Divisions 16 and 17 and as shown on Contract Drawings.

Where packaged manufacturer controls are specified, controls shall provide all of the

functionality indicated in the Contract Documents to achieve the specified operation.

Packaged control components shall comply with Divisions 16 and 17.

2.11 BELT DRIVEN EQUIPMENT

A. The sheaves and belts shall be properly sized to maximize longevity, efficiency and

performance of the drive system in accordance with the MPTA and RMA. The service factor

for the V-Belt drive shall be 1.3 and have a minimum system efficiency of 93%, allowing for

7% belt slip.

B. At a minimum, the sheaves shall be of heavy-duty construction, with the maximum rpm

stamped or cast onto the sheave and shall be designed to carry the total load that the belts are

rated for. Sheaves and bushings shall be statically balanced. The minimum sheave diameter

shall not be less than motor manufacturer’s recommendations and NEMA. At a minimum,

the maximum RPM of the sheaves shall be 1.25 times the maximum operating rpm. The

sheaves shall be manufactured by TB Woods or equal.

C. The belts shall be banded, Premium Grade Gates Predator Series, similar of TB Woods or

equal. The belts shall be protected with guards in oily atmospheres. The belts shall be suitable

for operation in hazardous atmospheres that are typically encountered in wastewater and

water facilities. Belts that are used in explosive environments shall use belts that comply

with RMA’s belt conductivity standard and a grounding brush at the belt to dissipate static

discharge generated from the belt. Provide all necessary components to connect grounding

brush to the grounding system specified in Division 23.



2.12 WALL PENETRATIONS

A. Pipe Sleeves: Generally, except where otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings, sleeves

shall be as listed below.

1. Masonry Walls: Galvanized Steel sleeves. Sleeves shall be constructed to ASTM A53,

Schedule 40 with bituminous coating and lining. Where shown provide escutcheon

plates.

2. Concrete Walls and Floors: PVC sleeves. PVC sleeves shall be constructed to ASTM

D1785, Schedule 40.

3. Sized as required to fit the pipe O.D and modular mechanical seals.

B. Modular Mechanical Expanding Seal


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

a. Link Seal, by Thunderline Corporation.

b. Pen Seal, by Proco Products.

c. Metraseal, by Metraflex.

d. Or equal.

2. Description: Consist of interlocking elastomer links shaped to continuously fill the

annular space between the pipe and the pipe sleeve. Bolts and nuts shall be stainless

steel. Link material shall be selected by manufacturer to suit installation requirements

and be compatible with the liquids to be conveyed in the carrier pipe. Links shall be

loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous belt around the pipe. When the seal

is in place the bolts are tightened and a watertight seal is made. Sized as recommended

by the manufacturer to fit the pipe O.D. and sleeve I.D. involved.

2.13 WELDING

A. Contractor shall have the following qualifications:

1. Independent Inspection and Testing Agency:

a. Ten years’ experience in field of welding and welded pipe and fittings’ testing

required for this Project.

b. Calibrated instruments and equipment, and documented standard procedures for

performing specified testing.

c. Certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A for testing procedures required

for this Project.

d. Testing Personnel: Qualified for nondestructive test methods to be performed.

e. Inspection Services: Qualified welding inspector.



2. Welding Inspector: AWS certified, AWS QC1 qualified, with prior inspection

experience of welds specified.

3. Welder and Welding Operator Qualifications:

a. Qualified by accepted inspection and testing agency before starting Work in

accordance with Section IX, Article III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code.

b. Qualified to perform groove welds in Positions 2G and 5G for each welding

process and pipe material specified.

c. Retesting: Upon Engineer’s written request, retest qualified welder(s).

4. Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) for Shop Welding: In accordance with AWWA

C200 and as follows:

a. Responsibilities:

1) Verify conformance to use of specified materials and their proper storage.

2) Monitor conformance to approved WPS.

3) Monitor conformance of WPQ.

4) Provide 100 percent visual inspection before, during, and after shop

welding.

5) Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and

testing.

5. Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) for Field Welding: In accordance with AWWA

C206, AWS D1.1, and as follows:

a. Responsibilities:

1) Verify conformance to use of specified materials and their proper storage.

2) Monitor conformance to approved WPS.

3) Monitor conformance of WPQ.

4) Provide 100 percent visual inspection before, during, and after field

welding.

5) Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and

testing.

EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The general arrangement of pipe and equipment shall be as shown on the Drawings. Detailed

drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings

and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment as indicated, without

substantial alteration. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

the exact location of piping, all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The

Contractor shall carefully investigate the space requirements for proper clearances and the

structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,



furnishing such offsets, fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such

conditions.

B. The Contractor shall determine the location, size, etc. of all chases and openings required for

the proper installation of its work, and shall see that such are provided. Where it is necessary

to run pipes or ductwork through walls or fittings, the trade performing the work shall notify

the Contractor so that proper provisions can be made for same. Each trade shall furnish and

set all inserts, sleeves, hanger supports, etc. required for its work and shall be responsible for

their proper and permanent location.

C. All piping and ductwork exposed to view shall be run generally parallel with the lines of the

structure and as close to walls and columns as may be practical and consistent with proper

grade and the maintenance of proper clearances for access to all parts requiring servicing.

D. The Contractor, in the prosecution of the work, shall do no cutting of masonry, concrete or

other materials after same have been installed, without the written permission of the Engineer.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment manufacturers shall provide templates, certified drawings showing all anchors

bolt locations and sizes as required for proper embedding in the concrete equipment support

structure. The Contractor shall provide all anchor bolts in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Unless otherwise noted, anchor bolts shall be type-316 stainless steel.

D. Tolerance on concrete work shall be in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s

recommendations.

E. Installation of equipment shall not be attempted until the equipment manufacturer has

provided detailed installation manuals to the Contractor and the Contractor and manufacturer

have instructed key field personnel in detail regarding installation of the equipment.

F. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

G. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation prior to startup and

refill as necessary until the operation of the equipment is turned over to the Owner.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Journeymen millwrights shall perform alignment of equipment provided. Carpenters,

laborers, or any other trades are specifically excluded from performing this work. In locations

where such trades are not available, the Contractor shall retain the services of a firm



specializing in this type of work to perform the setting and alignment work. The firm shall

have a minimum of 7 years of experience in the alignment of similar equipment. The

Contactor shall submit the qualifications of the proposed firm to the Engineer for review prior

to performing the work.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Furnish qualified personnel to balance and adjust equipment to minimize reactionary forces,

excess noise and vibration that are outside the limits of the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Provide corrective measures as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner’s representative.

3.5 TESTING

A. After erection, the Contractor shall adjust and balance all equipment and systems, and shall

demonstrate that all equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner in accordance with

process requirements for the project. Adjustments shall be made as necessary. All defective

parts on machinery shall be replaced.

B. The Engineer shall be notified in advance of all tests and all tests shall be conducted to

Engineer’s entire satisfaction.

C. See paragraph, MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE, for further requirements on selected

major items of equipment.

3.6 VIBRATION AND NOISE

A. All equipment and connections shall have vibration isolations as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer to reduce and mitigate vibration propagation to connecting

equipment or structures.

B. In the event that the installed equipment is experiencing excessive vibration or noise, outside

the normal operating range established by the manufacturer or applicable standard, (e.g.

ANSI/HI for pumps, ASHRAE and SMACNNA for ventilation equipment, etc.) whichever

standard is more stringent shall apply. The Contractor shall retain the services of a firm

specializing in vibration and or noise measurements to perform testing and shall submit the

results to the Engineer for review. The firm shall have a minimum of 7 years of experience

in the measurement of field vibration or noise.

C. If the noise or vibration is in excess of that recommended by the manufacturer for the

equipment, the Contractor shall submit a plan of action for review to the Engineer, indicating

what measures will be taken to mitigate the problem.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Finished parts shall be well protected in the shop, during transportation and before and after

erection to prevent damage of any kind. In the opinion of the Engineer, parts that are damaged

or which cannot be refitted shall be promptly replaced by the Contractor without expense to



the Contract. All exposed finished parts of machinery shall be greased or oiled before

shipment.

B. Furnish all tools of special nature which are required for making adjustments (by the Owner

after the work has been turned over) to equipment, but will not be required to furnish standard

tools that are not typically available from most supply companies.

C. Exposed belts, gears, and drives shall be protected with guards. Guards may be of the

equipment manufacturer's standard design, and comply with OSHA Standards.

3.8 PAINTING AND LABELING

A. Fabricated or assembled surfaces normally painted shall be thoroughly dry and free from all

rust, grease, dirt or scale. Unless otherwise specified, shop prime painting and field finish

painting shall be as specified in Division 9 Finishes. The Contractor is reminded to correlate

the selection of shop prime coats to be compatible with subsequent field applied coats of

paint.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials

and procedures to match original factory finish.

C. Control panels, valve operators, etc., shall have identifying nameplates screwed or bolted to

the enclosure. Nameplates shall be minimum 3/4 inches high plastic with white background

and 1/4 inch high engraved black letters.

3.9 ADJUSTMENTS TO RELATED WORK

A. The final work shall include any adjustment that may be required by the approved equipment

furnished, with modifications made to concrete shapes and to dimensions shown on the

Contract Drawings as may be required to suit the details of the approved equipment furnished,

all at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.10 CERTIFICATION OF WELDERS

A. Welding piping systems shall be done by experienced operators who are skilled and have had

experience in the method and materials used. All welders shall be qualified as specified in

the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Paragraph U-70.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review and approval a certified statement,

from an approved testing agency for each welder he proposes to use for welded piping. Each

certified statement shall indicate that the welder has, within six months from proposed

employment on this project, been successfully qualified under the requirements of Section IX

of the ASME Boiler Construction Code. All certificates and qualifications shall be at the

Contractor's expense. The Engineer will return the certified statements to the Contractor for

retention on job in the Contractor's field office. Work installed by an individual who is not

qualified by the testing agency and approved by the Engineer shall be removed by the

Contractor and shall be replaced with work installed by qualified and approved welders at the




C. Care shall be exercised during all welding operations to prevent injury or damage to personnel

and property.

3.11 SCAFFOLDING - RIGGING - HOISTING

A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall design and provide scaffolding, rigging,

hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery onto the premises of materials and

equipment. Remove from the premises when no longer required.

3.12 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTING STEEL

A. Supplementary supporting steel required to support ducts, piping, electrical services,

equipment, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.13 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION AND START-UP

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer's qualified field

representative to inspect the equipment installation, provide startup services, supervise all

initial start-up operations, as required to determine satisfactory operation of all the equipment

provided as specified under Division 1. Unless otherwise noted, services shall be provided

for a minimum of one 8-hour day.

B. In the event that the equipment does not perform as specified, the Contractor, at no additional

expense to the Contract, Owner or the Owner’s representative, shall make provisions for the

field representative to stay on site until all problems are resolved to the Owners satisfaction.


A. For each piece of equipment, furnish a Manufacturer’s Certificate certifying the equipment

has been correctly installed per manufacturer’s instructions. Certification shall be signed by

a person factory authorized to represent the manufacturer. See additional requirements in

Division 1 specifications.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Contactor shall demonstrate the operation of the equipment to the Owner and provide

instruction in its use as specified in the Contract Documents.

3.16 TRAINING

A. Upon completion of all work and testing, furnish the necessary technicians, skilled laborers

and helpers to operate all systems and equipment for the period specified in Division 1.

During this period, fully instruct the Owner and his representatives in the operation,

maintenance, lubrication and adjustment of all systems and equipment.



B. The Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be available at the time of the instruction

period.

C. Schedule the instruction period for a time mutually agreeable with the Owner and Engineer.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Clean the equipment and work area from all construction debris in accordance with Division

1. The equipment provided shall be free from debris prior to placing into service.

3.18 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide Record Drawings as delineated in Divisions 0 and 1.

B. Record Drawings for process systems showing all equipment, piping and valves, shall show:

1. Valve Tag identification numbers and letters

2. Equipment identification numbers and letters

3. Construction deviations/field modifications for all items.

4. Confirmed pipe, equipment and control elevations and dimensions. Confirmed

elevations shall be based on surveyed structure elevations.

C. Maintain a set of construction markups at the job site for the Engineer and Owner to

periodically review and provide comment on during the progress meetings. Make the

drawings available at each progress meeting.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports

to building structure.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, support, and channel support system component

indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




following:

1. Pipe Hangers:

a. Anvil International

b. Cooper B-Line

c. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

e. Or equal.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and

support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: unless otherwise indicated, provide hot dipped for all

components

2. Nonmetallic Coatings:

a. On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact

with copper tubing.

b. On attachments for physical protection for direct contact with plastic piping

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded stainless-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.

b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

d. MKT Fastening, LLC.

e. Powers Fasteners.

f. Or equal.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and



building materials where used. Coordinate subparagraph and list below with Part 2

"Manufacturers" Article.


a. Hilti, Inc.

b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

c. MKT Fastening, LLC.

d. Powers Fasteners.

e. Or equal.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior

and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

3. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 20, from single rod, if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types:



1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports,

clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal

piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

C. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space

attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-58. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion

joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;

fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to

powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Metal Framing System Installation: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for configurations

and load requirements.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span arc of 180 degrees.



3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply




IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL 15075 - 1

SECTION 15075 - IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.



1. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

2. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-

inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule

shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment (General Usage):

1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Content: Use designations on Drawings

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.



B. Plastic Labels for Equipment (Corrosive Areas):

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Content: Use designations on Drawings

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate

valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve

(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Valve-tag schedule

shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating flow stream, and showing flow direction.

B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping flow stream using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.



2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. At least 1/2 inch for

viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing

distances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.2 VALVE TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units; and shutoff valves. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.



B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

Service Pipe Coating and ID

Band Color

Letter and Flow Arrow

Color

1. Stormwater Gray Black

2. Potable Water Dark Blue White

3. Cold Water Dark Blue White

4. Hot Water Crimson Black

5. Drains/Gray Water Black White

6. Vents Buff White

7. Sanitary Drains Dark Gray Yellow

8. Fuel Oil (Supply and

Return)

Safety Red Black



MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 1

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Calcium silicate.

b. Flexible Elasotmeric

2. Section includes insulating the following piping services

a. Domestic cold-water piping.

b. Domestic hot-water piping.

c. Supplies and drains for lavatories.

3. Insulating cements.

4. Adhesives.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.



B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Mechanical."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and

for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.



D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Calcium Silicate:



a. Johns Manville Thermo-12 Gold.

b. Or equal.

2. Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F.

3. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply

with ASTM C 533, Type I.

4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for

dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.



a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. RBX Corporation.

d. Or equal.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature

rating of 1200 deg F.

1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Flexible Elastomeric: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.



a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.



d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

e. Or equal.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Provide securement bands of similar construction.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.



a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

e. Or equal.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456822558&mf=95&src=wd






3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including

fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

C. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

D. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

E. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Plumbing Piping and Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick. PVC jacket.

B. Internal Combustion Engine Piping: Calcium Silicate, 4 inches thick. Aluminum jacket.



VALVES 15110 - 1

SECTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Gray-iron swing check valves.

2. Butterfly valves.

3. Well Service Air Valve

4. Miscellaneous Valves

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure.

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

5. SWP: Steam working pressure.

6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;

valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;

dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include

rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and

accessories.


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and

design criteria.


VALVES 15110 - 2


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





the manufacturers specified.

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Golden Anderson of GA Industries

2. Henry Pratt

3. Dezuirk-Apco

4. Or equal.

B. Construction:

1. Complies with AWWA C508.

2. Body: Cast Iron, ASTM A126 class B or Ductile iron, ASTM A536.

3. With outside weight and lever, and air cushions.

4. Hydraulic or hydro-pneumatic cushions or operator are not acceptable.

5. Seat Rings: Stainless Steel, ASTM A276 grade 316

6. Flanges drilled and faced: ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125.


VALVES 15110 - 3

7. Internal and external coatings: 2-part epoxy, AWWA C550

2.4 WELL SERVICE AIR VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Valmatic

2. Dezurik-Apco

3. Or equal.

B. Construction:

1. Float actuated deep well service valve for vertical pumps designed to exhaust air in the

pump column on pump start and allow air to re-enter column on pump shutdown.

2. Body and Cover: cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B.

3. Float, shafts, bushings: stainless steel, Type 316

4. Seats: Buna-N

5. Air Control: Regulated exhaust device.

6. Coatings: interior and exterior, fusion bonded epoxy, AWWA C550.

C. Regulated Exhaust Device

1. Reduces pressure surges due to column separation or rapid changes in velocity.

2. Mounts on inlet of air/vacuum valve

3. Style: globe

4. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

5. Seat: Bronze

2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Henry Pratt

2. Dezuirk-Apco

3. Valmatic

4. Or equal

B. Construction:

1. Standard: AWWA C504

2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig

3. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

4. Disc: Ductile iron, ASTM A536

5. Shaft: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304

6. Packing: Chevron type

7. Body Seat: Buna-N

8. Ends: Flanged, AWWA C115

9. Actuator: Worm gear

10. Operation: Manual, handwheel

11. Hardware: 304 Stainless steel.

12. Coatings: interior and exterior, fusion bonded epoxy, AWWA C550.


VALVES 15110 - 4

2.6 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

f. Legend Valve.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Red-White Valve Corporation.

j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

k. Or Equal.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

g. Stem: Bronze.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

j. Size: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

k. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance.


B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.


VALVES 15110 - 5

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping joint

construction.



VALVES 15110 - 6



PROCESS SPECIALTIES 15111 - 1

SECTION 15111 - PROCESS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Items in this section shall comply with NSF-61 lead free requirements for potable water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: include material information and dimensional drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same

area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations,

and elevations.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare process specialties according to the following:

1. Ensure that items are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. Provide caps and plugs.

3. Set items in best position for handling.

B. During Storage:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.



2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when

outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle items if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig to avoid

damage to exposed parts.

D. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS.



1. Romac Style 501

2. Smith-Blair.

3. Dresser Manufacturing.

4. Or equal.

B. Each shall be so designed and constructed to withstand an internal line pressure equal to that of

the pipeline in which it is to be installed. The couplings shall be suitable for the class and size of

ductile iron pipe as required at the various locations, and shall be without pipe stops.

C. Materials:

1. Followers: Ductile iron ASTM A536

2. Middle Ring: Ductile iron ASTM A536

3. Nuts & Bolts: S.S. AWWA C111

4. Gaskets: SBR ASTM D2000

5. Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy

2.2 RESTRAINED FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTORS (RFCA)



1. Dresser Manufacturing

2. Romac Style RFCA 501

3. Smith-Blair Model 911 Flange-Lock

4. Or equal.

B. Each shall be so designed and constructed to withstand an internal line pressure equal to that of

the pipeline in which it is to be installed. The flange adaptors shall be suitable for the class and

size of ductile iron pipe or steel pipe as required at the various locations, and shall be without

pipe stops. RFCA shall fully restrain the piping without the use of tie rods.

C. Materials:

1. Body: Ductile iron ASTM A536 or Carbon Steel ASTM A36



2. Gland Nuts & Bolts: Low alloy steel, AWWA C111

3. Restraining Bolts: Ductile iron ASTM A536

4. Restraining Lugs: Ductile iron ASTM A536

5. Gaskets: SBR ASTM D2000

6. Flange: ANSI Class 125 dimensions

7. Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy

2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS



1. Mercer

2. Metraflex

3. Proco Products

4. Or equal.

B. Expansion joints shall be flanged, single arch expansion joints, designed to alleviate piping

stress and vibrations, permit axial compression and elongation, and compensate for axial and

lateral movements. The flexible body shall be constructed of neoprene, with woven polyester

reinforcing, and solid round steel wire reinforcing.

2.4 SPECIALTIES

A. Pressure gauge- Water Piping

1. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, or equal.

2. Type: Bourdon Tube

3. Tube: phosphor bronze

4. Fill: NSF 61 approved liquid

5. Size: 4-1/2 inch

6. Max pressure rating: See Drawings

7. Accessories: shutoff valve and pressure snubber

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate types to be used.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Per manufacturer’s instructions.



PROCESS PIPING 15120-1

SECTION 15120 – PROCESS PIPING

GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior and exterior exposed process piping, except for piping

systems specified in other Sections.

B. Provide all coordination, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and

incidental to, the complete and satisfactory installation of process components and

appurtenances as shown and as specified.

C. Items in this section shall comply with NSF-61 lead free requirements for potable water.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 15010 Common Work Results for Mechanical

C. Section 15060 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical

D. Section 15075 Identification for Mechanical

E. Section 15110 Valves

F. Section 15111 Process Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME International (ASME)

1. B16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25. 125 and 250

2. B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300.

3. B31.3 Process Piping

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

2. A53/A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless



3. A106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

4. F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

5. F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300

2. B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series

3. B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

1. C104 American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron

Pipe and Fittings for Water

2. C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

3. C115 Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Threaded Flanges

4. C151 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for

Water

5. C153 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall conform to Division 1.

B. Submit manufacturers’ written installation instructions for the following.

1. Tapping instructions for ductile iron piping.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of

dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Support piping during delivery, storage and handling to prevent sagging and bending.

C. Dispose of packing materials in accordance with state and federal regulations.

D. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Division 1.



PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Selected piping systems may be specified in other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Miscellaneous piping systems which may not be described specifically by any Section

of these Specifications shall be of the type of pipe and fittings as directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions of valves, special castings and fittings, pipe,

equipment, etc., so that all of the Work performed will fit together properly and will conform to the arrangement as shown on the Contract Drawings.

D. All fittings shall be of the type indicated on the Contract Drawings unless otherwise

specified. Ferrous piping shall be provided with ferrous fittings; PVC piping shall be provided with PVC fittings; copper pipe shall be provided with copper fittings. In

general, all fittings shall be as specified hereinafter in paragraph entitled "Pipe and

Fittings Schedule."

E. Where eccentric reducers are indicated to be used, the reducer shall be installed with its straight side at the top of the piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Refer to Pipe and Fitting Schedule in Part 3 of this Specification.

2.2 JOINTS

A. General

1. Piping shall not be sprung to make a joint.

B. Flanged Ductile Iron Joints

1. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C115.

2. Fabrication of flanged pipe, including assembly of flange on pipe shall be performed

by pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C115. Assembly of flange on pipe

outside of manufacturer's shop is unacceptable.

3. Flange material for flanged pipe shall be ductile iron. Flanged pipe with gray iron

flanges is not acceptable.

4. Gasket material shall be suitable for service and maximum operating temperature of piping system. Torque requirement of gaskets shall be less than torque rating of

flange, bolt, and nuts.

5. Gaskets shall be ring or full face, 1/8 inch thick, and shall conform to dimensions

shown in Appendices to AWWA C110 and AWWA C115.

6. Bolts



a. Size, length and quantity: AWWA C110 and AWWA C115 b. Material: ASTM F593 Stainless Steel, Type 316

c. Dimensions: ANSI B18.2.1, heavy hex.

7. Nuts

a. Size, length and quantity: AWWA C110 and AWWA C115 b. Material: ASTM F593 Stainless Steel, Type 316

c. Dimensions: ANSI B18.2.2, heavy hex.

2.3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Flanged Joint Fittings:

1. Ductile Iron

2. AWWA C110

3. Flange dimensions in accordance with AWWA C115

B. Special fittings for liquid service, not included in AWWA standards, shall be

manufacturer's standard, based on AWWA design principles, and in compliance with

applicable requirements of AWWA standards. Special fittings shall have the same thickness class and lining as the piping system in which they are installed.

C. Miscellaneous Fittings:

1. Provide miscellaneous fittings, such as cutting in sleeves, tapping sleeves, caps, plugs, and other fittings, as required for complete system.

2. Manufacturer of miscellaneous fittings shall be same manufacturer as pipe.

3. Miscellaneous fittings shall be suitable for service indicated.

2.4 COPPER PIPE

A. Copper pipe shall be as specified in Section 15140.

EXECUTION


A. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe and convenient handling of pipe and

specials shall be used. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for defects before

installation and pipe and fittings that are defective shall not be installed.

B. During construction, the Contractor shall keep all ends of pipes, including those

extending above roofs, and all drains and fixtures, closed with caps, plugs or wooden



flange covers, so as to prevent dirt, building material or other foreign matter from getting into piping.

C. All hangers, supports, and guides shall be of types as approved by the Engineer, arranged

to maintain the required grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and sagging,

to provide for expansion and contraction, and to provide for complete support of the pipes and fittings. See Section 15060 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical for additional

requirements.

3.2 JOINT ASSEMBLY

A. Assemble flanged ductile iron joints in accordance with flanged pipe manufacturer's

written instructions, and gasket manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Assemble solvent cemented joints for PVC pipe in accordance with ASTM D2855.

C. Assemble threaded joints using Teflon tape.

3.3 TAPPING

A. Taps for cement-lined pipe shall be in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide service saddles for tap sizes greater than 1 inch, and where otherwise indicated.

3.4 DRAINS AND VENTS

A. All piping systems which do not include other convenient means of draining shall include

3/4 inch hose valves at each low point to facilitate draining of the system. All piping systems, which do not include by nature of the systems a means of venting the air (for

example, faucets at sinks are a means of venting), shall be provided with either a 1/2-inch

manual gate valve or an automatic air vent valve, as directed by the Engineer, and located at each high point.


A. All piping systems furnished under this Section shall be tested as specified below. The

Engineer shall be notified at least 3 days in advance of all tests, and all tests shall be conducted to his entire satisfaction. All tests shall be made prior to insulating piping as

applicable.

B. Repairs to the various systems shall be made with new materials. No caulking of threaded joints, cracks or holes will be acceptable. Where it becomes necessary to replace pieces

of pipe, the replacement shall be the same material and thickness as the defective piece.

Tests shall be repeated after defects disclosed thereby have been made good or the work

replaced.

C. All piping shall be adequately braced and supported during the tests so that no movement,

displacement or damage shall result from the application of the test pressure. Relief



devices in the various systems shall be capped or plugged during the tests.

D. All equipment used in testing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and shall

be such as to properly develop, maintain and measure test procedures. Test pressure shall

be developed and maintained by means of a hydraulic force pump.

E. Prepare ductile iron piping for testing according to ASME B31.3 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Isolate equipment. Do not subject equipment to test pressure.

3. Install relief valve set at pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure.

4. Fill system with potable water.

5. Use vents installed at high points to release trapped air while filling system. Use

drip legs installed at low points, or other method approved by the Engineer, for complete removal of liquid.

F. Test interior liquid piping as follows:

1. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure as listed in the piping schedule.

2. Apply hydrostatic test pressure for a minimum of 60 minutes after pressure stabilizes. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for 60 minutes, examine

joints for leakage. Remake leaking joints and repair defective installation using

new materials and repeat hydrostatic test until no leaks exist, and test pressure is held for a minimum of 60 minutes.

3.6 PIPE AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE

A. Pipe and fittings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as listed in the following schedule, which schedule is intended to serve as a general guide and is not

necessarily a complete listing of every piping system. Systems which may not be listed

shall be comprised of the same kind of pipe and fittings as in similar systems which are

listed, or as directed by the Engineer.



System

ID System/Service

Pipe Fittings Group Notes

Material Spec. Ref. Material Spec. Ref.

ST Pressurized

Stormwater Piping,

8” and larger

Ductile

Iron

AWWA

C115,

AWWA

C151

Ductile

Iron

AWWA

C110

Flanged. 1. Special Class 53.

2. Lining: AWWA

C104 Double

cement lined with a bituminous seal

coating.

3. Exterior Coating: Factory prime

painted for field

finish painting.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.


1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with

80 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects" for potable

domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:






2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and

joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting

the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be

joined.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze

castings.

a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and

bolts and nuts.

2.4 VALVES

A. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."



3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.

D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground

copper tubing.

E. Domestic Water Piping inside the Building: Use the following piping materials for each size

range:

F. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered

joints.

2. NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered

joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-

iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures

that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,

and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Common Work

Results for Mechanical."

B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make

installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "

Common Work Results for Mechanical."



D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section " Common

Work Results for Mechanical."

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-

alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.



D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and

connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must

be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.



3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation.

4. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

5. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,

extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,

if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the

building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.

1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-

resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield,

stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

B. Hub and Spigot Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74, extra heavy



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used

in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

hubless-coupling joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hub and spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Common Work

Results for Mechanical."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15

Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical."

D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make

installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Common


E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back-to-back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.



H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.

J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Common


B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-

alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install

the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.


a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.



D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum

rods.



E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:




4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction.



1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160 - 1

SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes storm-drainage piping inside the building and to locations indicated.


1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for storm drainage piping system specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following

minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-

sewer" for plastic sewer piping.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

2.2 PVC PIPING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid wall drain, waste, and vent. Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent

patterns.

B. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as

required for application.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 2 to NPS 8: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping

installation.

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm

sewers.

C. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep

bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard

increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage

piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

D. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. In accordance with plumbing code.

E. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.



F. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping joint

construction.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.


a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers, plastic

coated.



D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum

rods. Maximum spans below were taken from MSS SP-58 for water service and from model

plumbing codes. Most restrictive piping and spacing dimensions are shown.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3: 84 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

2. NPS 4: 84 inches with 5/8-inch rod

3. NPS 6 to NPS 8: 96 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close

openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-

foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,

water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris


C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



FUEL TANKS, PIPING, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES 15190-1

SECTION 15190 - FUEL TANKS, PIPING, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes diesel fuel system components as follows:

1. Pipes and Fittings

2. Tank Accessories

3. Diesel Fuel Above Ground Storage Tanks

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Maximum Operating Pressure Ratings as follows:

1. Diesel fuel supply piping – 10 psig

2. All diesel fuel vent piping – 25 psig

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall meet the requirements of Section 01330.

B. Product Data:

1. Piping specialties. Include items such as swivel pipe adaptors, fill caps adaptor,

drop tubes, tank vents, tank bottom protectors, etc.

2. Valves: Include pressure rating and capacity of selected model where applicable.

3. Each type and size of fuel storage tank. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Pipe, tube and fittings

5. Above ground storage tank accessories

6. Above ground storage tank piping specialties



7. Liquid Level Gauge System for ASTs

8. Leak Detection System for ASTs

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranties: See Section 1.7 below for warranty requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the EPA and of the State of Maryland and local

authorities having jurisdiction in addition to the following codes and standards:

1. 40 CFR, Part 280 and all referenced standards therein.

2. COMAR, Title 26 and all referenced standards therein.

3. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

4. NFPA 30A, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages

5. UL-142, aboveground storage tanks for flammable and combustible liquids.

6. UL-2085, two-hour furnace fire test and two hour simulated pool fire test for

insulated and protected tanks.

7. UL-2085 and UFC Test Standard (Article 79 or Appendix #A-11-F-1), for both

Vehicle Impact Protection and Projectile Resistance.

8. UL-2085, Protected aboveground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids.

9. Fuel oil valves comply with UL 842.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Lift and support fuel-oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as

shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.

B. Deliver pipes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,

and moisture.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to and run concurrent with the

warranties specified here. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product

warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.



1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer

to Owner.

2. All warranties shall state the intended coverage including replacement of

equipment and the cost of labor to effect this replacement.

3. The protected and insulated AST shall have a warranty of 30 years for systems.

B. Installation: Contractor shall warrant all work done during installation against improper

installation for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. The

Contractor shall, at his expense, repair or replace any components or equipment that has

malfunctioned or has become defective as a result of improper installation. The

Contractor’s corrective actions shall ensure continuance of the manufacturer’s warranty

to include recertifying to the manufacturer’s requirements.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. The installation Contractor shall have the following qualifications for the installation of

ASTs and associated piping. The Contractor shall provide evidence of these

qualifications with their quotation submission for all items listed below:

1. A minimum of five (5) years of experience in the installation of double wall

ASTs in the size specified.

2. The Contractor shall be certified by the tank manufacturer for the installation of

the Double Wall ASTs they are installing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FERROUS PIPE AND FITTINGS:

A. Aboveground diesel fuel oil piping to utilize ferrous materials only.

B. Ferrous Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Forged Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, 3000 lb standard pattern.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat,

ground joint, and threaded ends.



4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end

connections, and facings:

a. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

b. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or

ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with petroleum products.

c. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.

2.3 ISOLATION VALVES

A. Isolation valves shall be ball type and shall be forged brass body with quarter turn handle.

Ball shall be hard chrome plated brass. Seats, thrust bearing and stem packing shall be

PTFE. Stem shall be blow-out proof. Valves shall be OPW Model 21BV, Morrison Bros.

Figure 691 or equal.

2.4 SOLENOID VALVES



1. Morrison Bros. Model 710

2. Or equal.

B. Features

1. Hung piston design

2. Zero pressure differential operation

3. Cast bronze body with integral thermal relief

4. Full port orifice for ¾” and 1” sizes. Min 80% port for 1.5” size.

5. Viton seals.

6. Two way, normally closed

7. 12 or 24 volt DC operation to suit associated generator

8. Class H coil

9. Explosion proof, watertight rated enclosure meeting NEMA 4X, 7 and 9; groups C and

D.

10. Valves shall be equipped with Manual Override Feature

2.5 OVERFILL PROTECTION VALVES

A. Bulk storage tank shall be supplied with an overfill protection valve (OPV). The valve shall be

float actuated and shall be set for level as shown on Contract Drawings. The valve shall provide

gradual flow shutoff and shall provide positive shutoff design. The valve shall be OPW Model

61f-Stop, similar of Preferred Manufacturing, Core Solutions, or equal.



2.6 FOOT VALVES



1. EBW Model 50-201

2. Morrison Bros. Figure 335A

3. Franklin Fueling

4. Or equal.

B. Features

1. Type: Double Poppet

2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Fuel Hoses:

1. Construction: Nitrile synthetic rubber RMA Class A

2. Reinforcement: Spiral plied synthetic fabric

3. Working Pressure: 150 psig

4. End Connections: Flanged or threaded to match piping and equipment connections.

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:



the following:

a. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Model 125

b. Morrison Bros. Figure 286

c. Or equal.

2. Body: ASTM A126, Class B cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

3. End Connections: Threaded ends.

4. Strainer Screen: 60 mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless steel basket with 50

percent free area.

5. CWP Rating: 125 psig

2.8 CONCRETE-VAULTED, STEEL, FUEL-OIL AST:

A. Manufacturers: ConVault tank by Core Engineered Solutions, or equal.

B. Description: UL 142 and UL 2085; thermally insulated, fire-resistant and protected, double-

wall, horizontal, steel tank; with primary- and secondary-containment walls and insulation and

with interstitial space.

C. Construction: Fabricated with welded, carbon steel and insulation and encased in 6 inches of

concrete that will protect from bullets; suitable for operation at atmospheric pressure and for

storing fuel oil with specific gravity up to 1.1 and with test temperature according to




UL 2085.The secondary containment shall consist of a 30 Mil thick (0.76 mm) High-Density

Polyethylene membrane enclosing the steel tank and insulation material.

D. The fuel oil tank shall be provided with a UL listed minimum of 7-gallon spill/overfill container

surrounding the fill pipe. The spill/overfill container shall be manufactured as an integral part

of the primary tank and protected by a two hour fire rating of the fuel oil tank. The container

shall include a normally closed valve to release spilled fuel into the primary tank. The fill pipe

shall be recessed into the container making it the lowest opening on the tank.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 3,000 gal.

2. Fuel-Oil Grade Number: Grade No. 2 Diesel.

2.9 FUEL-OIL AST ACCESSORIES

A. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top of tank, for fill, supply, return, vent, sounding, and

gaging. Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.

B. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation.

C. Fuel tank stairs: Tank manufacturer shall provide steps, guardrail, and platform package as

shown on Contract Drawings. Package components shall be galvanized steel. Manufacturer

shall be responsible for the design of stair package.

2.10 FUEL OIL MONITORING SYSTEM



1. Pneumercator (Models listed below correspond to this manufacturer)

2. Simplx

3. Or equal.

B. General: Fuel oil monitoring system shall consist of electronic monitor controller unit and tank

transmitter assemblies for fuel oil level and leak detection. System configuration shall be as

shown on the Drawings.

C. Monitor Unit.

1. Model TMS2000, or equal.

2. The controller shall be microprocessor-based and shall be designed and constructed with

modular architecture easily permitting either factory or field upgrades and servicing.

3. Configuration and set-up data shall be maintained in non-volatile memory having

minimum fifty (50) year data retention without requiring power of any kind. Replacement

or substitution of any controller plug-in card shall not require system re-configuration.



Real-Time clock and non-critical log data, such as inventory, delivery, alarm, theft, error,

and leak reports shall be maintained in battery backed non-volatile memory with a

minimum data retention of from (5)-(10) years in the event of a power outage. System

shall include digital display for viewing tank information and LED indicators for the

alarm conditions.

4. System shall have the capability to continuously monitor up to two (2) dual-float

magnetostrictive in-tank level probes and up to eight (8) secondary containment leak or

point-level sensors. Leak and point-level sensor inputs shall support a means to detect

sensor open-circuit and short-circuit wiring faults as a standard feature when used in

conjunction with fault-reporting sensors.

5. The console shall be housed in a lockable wall mounted enclosure as shown on the

drawings. The console shall include microprocessor board, probe/sensor card, power

supply, control I/O and communications interfaces. Front panel display shall include

audible and visual alarms, and membrane pushbutton controls. The display shall be nine-

digit, seven segment, quasi-alphanumeric, sunlight readable, LED type, with LED alarm

annunciators for five (5) alarm conditions per tank:

a. Leak

b. High Level

c. Two (2) level setpoints

d. Low Level

6. LED alarm lights shall be visible from at least 60 feet and the seven-segment display data

shall be readable from no less than 20 feet. Displays shall include product gross or net,

percent of capacity, product level, product temperature, and product type. As a standard,

two (2) programmable relay outputs and two (2) contact closure inputs shall be provided.

Additional signals shall be provided as necessary to suit controls shown on

Instrumentation Drawings.

D. Level Sensor:

1. Model MP 450 S, or equal.

2. Technology: Magnetostrictive

3. Accuracy: 0.0005 inches

4. Shaft: 316 S.S.

5. Floats: Buna Nitrile

6. Location Approval: UL Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D

E. Leak Detection Probe:

1. Model LS600-LDBN or equal.

2. Technology: float with magnetic hermetically sealed reed switch

3. Alarm Set Point: 1/2 inch from base

4. Housing: 304 S.S.

5. Float Stem: Brass

6. Floats: Buna Nitrile

7. Location Approval: UL Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D



2.11 FUEL

A. Diesel Fuel Oil: ASTM D 975, Grade No. 2-D, general purpose.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Pressure test and inspect oil storage tank, after fabrication and before shipment, according

to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine roughing-in for fuel piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING INSTALLATION:

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Install all above grade piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs

are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials.

F. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

G. Comply with requirements for equipment specifications in Division 15 Sections for

roughing-in requirements.

H. Prohibited Locations:

1. Do not install oil piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash

chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), or ventilating ducts.

2. Do not install fuel-oil piping in solid walls or partitions.

I. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level

side down.



J. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

K. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller at final connection to each piece of equipment

and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

L. Do not use fuel-oil piping as grounding electrode.

3.4 CONNECTIONS:

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.

C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and

equipment.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION:

A. Install valves in accessible locations.

B. Protect valves from physical damage.

C. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating diesel piping systems.

D. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION:

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate Teflon tape or thread compound to external pipe threads

unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.

Install gasket concentrically positioned.



3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION:

A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements

are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. Follow MSS SP-58.

3.8 TANK INSTALLATION

A. The fuel storage tank and accessories shall be installed in the location indicated on

the Contract Drawings. The fuel storage tank shall be installed according to applicable

codes and the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide initial fill of fuel oil for testing. After testing is complete, provide supplemental

filling so that tank is at full capacity.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Fuel supplied by Contractor shall be sampled and tested prior to final acceptance. Fuel shall be

No. 2 diesel fuel conforming to requirements specified in ASTM D975. Testing shall use

Velcon VFT-0100 Water and Visual Clarity Test kit, or equal. Fuels found to contain excess

water or debris shall be rejected and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.


A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a Manufacturer’s Certificate, in

accordance with Division 1, certifying that the equipment is installed in a complete and

satisfactory manner ready for operation.

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING:

A. Materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and

Supports."

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform

operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,

and warn of hazards and improper operations.



OVERHEAD CRANE SYSTEM 15200 - 1

SECTION 15200 - OVERHEAD CRANE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: This section provides specifications for bridge cranes including monorail

hoists, trolleys, and associated drive units and controls.

B. The manufacturer shall review the mechanical and structural layout drawings for the equipment

specified and shall verify that the equipment specified is coordinated with the contract

drawings. The manufacturer shall also review the relevant electrical plan and one-line diagram

drawings to coordinate with the equipment specified.

C. Provide all coordination, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and incidental

to, the complete and satisfactory installation of the equipment as shown or specified and in

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 REFERENCES

Reference Title

ASTM A492 Stainless Steel Wire Rope

ASTM A555 General Requirement for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods

ASTM A580 Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM A1023 Stranded Carbon Steel Wire Ropes for General Purposes

RR-W-410E Federal Specification, Wire Rope and Strand

WRTP Wire Rope Technical Board

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

CMAA Crane Manufacturer’s Association of America

HMI Hoist Manufacturer’s Institute

AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 14th Edition

IBC 2018 International Building Code, locally amended



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1.

B. Shop drawings showing clearance dimensions and details of construction, including general

arrangement, bridge crane, monorail hoist and trolley reach, runway, crane rail and its

attachments, complete bridge crane, cable lifting devices and associated hardware, and all

product data for installation of the hoists. Drawings shall indicate the trolley’s reach and access

dimensions from the walls.

C. Structural design calculations for monorail track and support system and calculations of

deflection and loads on building steel stamped by a registered professional engineer.

D. Detail Shop Drawings of monorail track, brackets, hangers, and their attachments to building

structural steel.

E. Electrical information including detailed controls layout and wiring diagrams, including motor

nameplate.

F. Detailed wheel loadings on the runway system including number and spacing of wheels,

number of end trucks or drive units, and end truck spacing.

G. Material specifications and mill certificates for bridge components.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Complete with manufacturer’s instructions for equipment

installation, equipment function, start-up procedures, operation, preventative maintenance,

servicing and troubleshooting.

I. Manufacturer’s warranty.

J. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. All bridge crane components and appurtenances furnished for this contract shall be designed,

coordinated, and supplied by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for

ensuring the proper components are incorporated in the package and that the requirements of

other specification sections referenced are satisfied.

B. The equipment manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in manufacturing

equipment similar, equal or larger size, to that specified.

C. Equipment specified under this section shall conform to applicable standards of the Monorail

Manufacturers Association (MMA) and the Crane Manufacturer’s Association of America

(CMAA).




A. Factory tests in accordance with HMI and CMAA standards shall be performed by the

manufacturer prior to delivery in order to verify accuracy and performance of the systems as

specified. The manufacturer shall certify and provide copies of the tests and warranty the

equipment’s performance specified in this section.

B. Units shall be packaged in reinforced containers so as to prevent rust or damage during delivery.

All connections shall be capped for shipping and while in storage. Each system and all

components and mounting hardware shall be delivered at the same time.

C. The Contractor shall inspect the equipment when it is delivered to ensure that it is not damaged.

Store the equipment in a dry location and maintain the equipment per Manufacturer’s

recommendations.

D. Dispose of packing materials in accordance with state and federal regulations.

E. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Division 1.

1.7 MANUFACTURER’S INSPECTION AND START-UP

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer’s qualified field

representative to inspect the equipment after installation, provide start-up services, supervise all

initial start-up operations, as required to determine satisfactory operation of all the equipment

provided. Services shall be provided for a minimum of two (2) eight (8)-hour days as specified

under Division 1.

B. In the event that the equipment does not perform as specified, the Contractor, at no additional

expense to the Contract, Owner or Owner’s representative, shall make provisions for the field

representative to stay on site until all problems are resolved to the Owner’s satisfaction.


A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a Manufacturer’s Certificate, in accordance with

Division 1, certifying that the equipment is installed in a complete and satisfactory manner

ready for operation.

1.9 TRAINING

A. Provide the service of a qualified manufacturer’s representative to thoroughly train Owner’s

personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment installed. Training shall be in

accordance with Division 1.

1.10 WARRANTEE AND GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall provide warrants and guarantees to the Owner that all work will be in

accordance with the Contract Documents and that the equipment, material, workmanship,

performance and installation will not be defective. Contractor shall make the necessary repairs



and replacements any defective equipment at the convenience of the Owner for a period of one

(1) year after the completion of the Contract. Warrants and guarantees shall be in accordance

with the provisions in Division 0 and 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Bridge Crane

1. Manufacturers:

a. DESHAZO

b. ACCO/WRIGHT

c. Or approved equal.

2. Design Criteria:

CMAA Class C

Capacity, US tons 7.5

Span, feet See Drawings

Lift required, feet See Drawings

Runway length, feet See Drawings

Bridge motor horsepower (Qty. 2), max 1

Bridge speed 100 fpm, VFD

Maximum runway crane rail size 40# ASCE

Operator Type 8 Button Festoon Pendant

Control Station

NEMA Rating 12

B. Monorail Hoist and Trolley:

1. The trolley, hoist and all appurtenances shall be provided as a complete unit by the hoist

manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers:

a. WRIGHT

b. Or approved equal.



3. Design Criteria:

General NEMA Rating 12

Trolley Trolley Speed 50/15 fpm, VFD

Motor HP, max 2

Motor Speed 1800 rpm

Hoist Type Motorized Wire Rope

Reeving Double

Capacity 7.5 ton

Lift, feet 2 speed, 15/5 fpm

Lift Speed 1 speed (15 fpm)

Motor HP, max 7.5

Motor Speed 1800 rpm

Power 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hz

4. Accessories:

a. Pendant pushbutton controller: controlled by crane pendant controller.

2.2 MATERIALS

Component Material

Crane Rail ASCE size noted above, by manufacturer

Bridge beams and trolley Steel, ASTM A36, ASTM A572 Gr50, ASTM A992, or

equivalent grades in plate materials.

Hoist gearing, trolley wheels, end

truck wheels, hook, wire rope

Steel

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Runway Beams: Runway beams and connections to supports shall be as shown on the

Drawings.

B. Crane Rail: Crane rail, including stops and attachment to runway beams, shall be designed by

the crane manufacturer. Rail shall be standard ASCE shape.

1. Permanent stops shall be provided to prevent bridge truck over-run and shall be located to

prevent damage to structure, equipment, piping or ductwork. Stops shall be capable of

withstanding the impact of the loaded carrier at normal speed.

C. Bridges: Each bridge shall consist of a main girder which shall support the trolley, hoist, and

associated mechanisms. The bridge beam shall be rigidly attached to the end trucks and shall be

braced and welded to maintain squareness with the trucks.



1. Permanent trolley stops shall be provided to prevent trolley over-run and shall be located

to prevent damage to structure, equipment, piping or ductwork. Stops shall be capable of

withstanding the impact of the loaded carrier at normal speed.

D. End Trucks:

1. The bridge crane end trucks shall carry the rated load between the end truck wheels while

the rated load is lifted at one end of the crane bridge. End trucks shall have steel wheels

hardened to 300 to 350 Brinell mounted on lifetime lubricated antifriction bearings fitted

with seals to exclude dust and moisture. Wheelbases shall be 1/8 of the span or greater.

Axles and wheels shall be removable without disturbing other truck elements.

2. An energy absorbing rubber bumper shall be mounted on each end of each end truck.

Bumper shall limit longitudinal runway stopping forces to not exceed AISC longitudinal

tractive force. Safety lugs shall be provided to limit drop of the end truck to 1 inch or

less in the event of wheel or axle failure.

E. Bridge Drive:

1. Bridge drive shall be dual motor type.

2. Motors shall be reversible and shall be designed for crane service. If a dual motor system

is used, then the operation of the end trucks shall be synchronized to assure even bridge

travel without binding, jerking, or excessive vibration. Each gear-motor assembly shall

be provided with a mechanical brake rated at 100 percent of full load motor torque.

F. Trolley with Main Winch: Trolley wheels shall be hardened steel mounted on permanently

lubricated antifriction bearings. The trolley shall be motorized and shall be designed for under-

hung lug mounted hoist application, with an AC disc type trolley brake.

G. Hoist:

1. General: Provide geared upper and lower limit switches, plugging upper limit switches,

and mechanical load brakes to assure safe operation and positive stopping under all

conditions. The geared limit switch shall automatically stop the motor and engage the

hoist brake when the hook reaches either its upper or lower limit of travel. Provide an

overload cutoff device.

2. Main Hoist:

a. Main hoist lug mounted from trolley.

b. Drum shall have reeving specified in criteria above.

H. Electrification and Controls:

1. The crane shall be provided with a control panel mounted on the bridge. The control

panel shall contain the motor controllers and a main breaker. The main breaker shall be

provided with a lockable disconnect switch.

2. Runway electrification shall be provided by bridge crane manufacturer as indicated.

Conductors shall be of ample size and material for the service required and the systems

shall include all necessary current collectors, supports, clamps, insulators, expansion

joints and other appurtenances. The conductors shall be of the bar type. The use of

runway rails as one of the conductors will not be permitted. The conductors shall be of

copper and be of the safety enclosed type and each conductor shall be complete with a



rigid insulator sheath. The collectors shall be spring loaded shoe or wheel type capable of

maintaining good contact at all times. Contact pressure shall not be dependent upon

gravity. The contactors shall be designed to permit normal contact pressure without

causing undue mechanical strain. Connections to the conductor systems shall be specified

and provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL.

3. Cross-bridge electrification shall be flat cable festooned type supported in a rigid

enclosed stainless steel track system.

4. Controllers:

a. Each bridge crane and hoist system shall be provided with a pendant-type operator.

b. Pendant shall be independently traveling on a rigid stainless steel festoon track

system.

5. All controls shall be clearly marked with etched or engraved nameplates.

2.4 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates shall be provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified

equipment name or abbreviation and equipment number. Equipment nameplates shall be

engraved or stamped stainless steel and fastened to the equipment in an accessible and visible

location with stainless steel screws or drive pins.

2.5 PAINTING

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory finishes. Touch-up paint and instructions shall be provided

by the manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the complete systems in the general arrangement and where shown on the Drawings and

as specified. Install and test each complete system and each system component in conformance

with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Installation shall be performed by

mechanics skilled in work of this kind. The equipment shall be checked, aligned, and approved

for start-up by the manufacturer’s factory trained representatives. Each system component shall

be reviewed and approved by the applicable manufacturer prior to start-up of the complete

system. The manufacturer having unit responsibility shall arrange and coordinate such reviews

between component manufacturers and the Contractor.

B. Manufacturer shall provide templates, certified drawings showing all anchors bolt locations and

sizes as required for proper embedding in the concrete equipment support structure. The

contractor shall provide all anchor bolts in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel.



C. Installation of the equipment shall not be attempted until the equipment manufacturer has

provided detailed installation manuals to the Contractor and the Contractor and manufacturer

have instructed key field personnel in detail regarding installation of the equipment.

3.2 LUBRICATION

A. Lubricate the equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation prior to startup

and refill as necessary until the operation of the equipment is turned over to the Owner.

3.3 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. After completion of installation, the bridge crane, trolley, and hoist shall be tested to ensure

compliance with the performance requirements as specified. As a minimum, testing shall be by

operating the equipment through two complete lift and lowering cycles and through five

complete traverses of the bridge and five traverses of the runway beams to determine that the

equipment performs smoothly and safely without failure. Such tests shall be carried out with

the hoisting equipment loaded at 125 percent of specified capacity. After load testing, the

overload limit switch is to be reset at the rated load.

B. Include in the bid all costs associated with providing the services of the manufacturer’s field

representative for checking, aligning, testing, placing in operation, and training.

C. With the full load of the units, hoists shall be run through all sections of the railing at least three

times. The hoists shall be raised and lowered the full length of their travel at any point along the

rails that the Engineer requests.

D. Weights to perform the above tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Furnish qualified personnel to balance and adjust equipment to minimize reactionary forces,

excess noise and vibration that are outside the limits of the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Provide corrective measures as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner’s representative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean the equipment and work area from all construction debris. The equipment provided shall

be free from debris prior to placing into service.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide the services of a factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to provide a minimum of

4 hours of training for Owner’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the

equipment. Particular training attention shall be focused on attaching the main winch cable to

the drum and commencing lift and shall not constitute testing specified elsewhere.



3.7 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. After installation and accepted testing by the Engineer, apply touch-up paint to all scratched,

abraded and damaged shop painted surfaces in accordance with Division 9. Coating type and

color shall match shop painting.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 1

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.


1. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains."

2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty

fixtures not in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with

disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in

this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains

and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where

indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,

equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details,

and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category

through one source from a single manufacturer.



1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that

category.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities" Maryland State handicapped Code about plumbing fixtures for people

with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-

187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy

Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are

compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing

fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction.

3. ASME A112.19.7M.

4. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.

5. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.

6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory

and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.

3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.

4. NSF Materials: NSF 61.

5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

6. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

7. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.

3. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.



J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.

2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.

3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.

7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations and verify that fixtures can be

installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish 2 rebuild kits to for each type of faucet in the project. Match products installed and that

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Available

Products,” “Products," "Available Manufacturers," and "Manufacturers" introduce a list of

manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only, the following requirements apply for

product selection:



the manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.


a. Kohler; Sculpted Insight, K-13461.

2. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

3. Body Material: Cast brass underbody with brass cover plate.

4. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

5. Type: IR actuated.



6. Mounting: Deck, exposed.

7. Spout: Rigid.

8. Spout Outlet: Aerator, 0.5 gpm .

9. Operation: IR Self-closing.

10. Drain: Grid.

11. Mixing Device: Mechanical.

2.3 SERVICE SINK FAUCETS

A. Service Sink Faucets:


a. Kohler Co., Model K-8905

b. American Standard Companies, Inc.

c. Or equal.

2. Description: Two-handle mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;

coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and

fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

b. Finish: Rough plate.

c. Centers: 8 inches.

d. Mounting: Back/wall, exposed.

e. Valves: brass

f. Handles: blade

g. Accessories: vacuum breaker; pail hook; hose threaded spout

2.4 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Flushometer: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, control stop with

check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on

exposed parts.

1. Manufacturers:

a. For Urinal: Kohler WAVE K-10675-SV or equal.

b. For Water Closet: Kohler WAVE K-10675-SV or equal.

2. Internal Design: Piston operation.

3. Style: Concealed.

4. Trip Mechanism: DC sensor actuator.

5. Consumption: 0.5 gal./flush for urinal, 1.6 gal./flush for water closet.



2.5 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seat: Solid plastic.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bemis or equal.

2. Configuration Open front without cover.

3. Size: Elongated.

4. Class: Heavy-duty commercial.

5. Hinge Type: CK, check.

6. Color: White.

2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Water-Closet Support: Water-closet combination carrier designed for accessible and standard

mounting height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless

waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and

fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate,

and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Kohler

b. Watts, or equal.

B. Urinal Support: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and

fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Kohler

b. Watts, or equal.

C. Lavatory Support: Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts

and hardware matching fixture.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Kohler

b. Watts, or equal.

D. Service Sink Support: Trap supported.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Supplied by manufacturer.



2.7 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Accessible, wall-hanging, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for

flushometer valve operation.


2. Products:

a. Kohler Co.; Kinston, K-4325

b. American Standard, Inc

c. Or equal.

3. Style: One piece.

a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.

b. Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush

c. Spud: Top

d. Color: White.

2.8 URINALS

A. Urinals: Accessible, wall-hanging, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer

valve operation.


2. Products:

a. Kohler Co.; Bardon, K-4991-ET

b. American Standard, Inc.

c. Or equal

3. Type: Washout with extended shields.

4. Design Consumption: 0.5 gal./flush.

5. Color: White.

6. Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4.

7. Outlet Size: NPS 2.

2.9 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories: Accessible wall-mounting fixture.

1. Products:

a. Kohler Co.; Kingston K-2007

b. American Standard, Inc.

c. Or equal.

2. Rectangular Lavatory Size: 21 by 18 inches.

3. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole.

4. Faucet Hole Location: Top.

5. Color: White.

6. Drain: Grid.



7. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 chrome-plated cast-brass trap; NPS 1-1/4 .045-inch-thick

tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon.

2.10 SERVICE SINKS

A. Service Sinks:


a. Kohler Co., K-6714 Bannon

b. American Standard Companies, Inc.

c. Eljer.

d. Or equal.

2. Description: Trap-mounting, enameled, cast-iron fixture with roll-rim with two faucet

holes in back and rim guard on front and sides.

a. Size: 22 by 18 inches.

b. Color: White.

c. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.

d. Trap Standard: NPS 3 enameled, cast iron with cleanout and floor flange.

e. Centers: 8 inches

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual

locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those

indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if

roughing-in data are not indicated.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.



D. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

E. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall

bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in

drawings.

G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture.

H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to

sanitary drainage system.

I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage

system.

J. Install toilet seats on water closets.

K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are

not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

L. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop

valves.

M. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if

faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within

cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,

stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to

plumbing piping.



E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:

Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping

specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing

piping.


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate

properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,

and controls.

B. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



DRINKING FOUNTAINS 15426 - 1

SECTION 15426 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Drinking fountains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Drinking Fountain: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with

disabilities.

B. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.

C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

D. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished

specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

C. Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities" Maryland State Handicapped Code about fixtures for people with

disabilities.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS),

1985-494-187" about fixtures for people with disabilities.



C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that fixtures can be installed to

comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Manufacturers"

introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only, the following


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains: Accessible, wall-hanging fixture made of stainless steel.

1. Products:

a. Metal Drinking Fountains:

1) Halsey Taylor Contour Model HRF-EBP

2) Elkay Manufacturing Co.

3) Or equal.

2. Receptor Shape: Rounded front.

3. Back Panel: Stainless-steel wall plate behind drinking fountain.

4. Bubblers: Located on deck.

5. Control: Push button.

6. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.

7. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with

ASME A112.18.1M.

8. Support: Manufacturer’s mounting hardware.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of

supports match those indicated.



B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain

copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unless


B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be

easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern

escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section

"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.

3.4 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.


A. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements

are made.

B. Report test results in writing.



3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,

and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Water mixing valves.

3. Trap seal primer valves.

4. Hose bibbs.

5. Hose and appurtenances.

6. Wall hydrants

7. Miscellaneous piping specialties.

8. Flashing materials.

9. Cleanouts.

10. Floor drains.

11. Roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following

minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate

materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;

and piping and wiring connections.



B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing

specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product

Requirements."

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping

materials and installation.

D. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water

piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1

through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the


2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Apoll/Conbraco Industries, Inc.

2. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers




a. Apollo/Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Watts Series LF 909

c. Or Equal.



2. Standard: ASSE 1013.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Size: As shown on Drawings.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and

manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to

rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

2.3 WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Precision Plumbing Products.

2. Watts Industries, Inc., Model USG-B

3. Zurn Model ZQ1070XL

4. Or equal.

B. General: ASSE 1070

2.4 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following

characteristics:


2. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

3. 125-psig minimum working pressure.

4. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.



2.5 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:




a. Wilkins (Zurn) Model 195XL

b. Watts

c. Woodford

d. Or Equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1

3. Compliance: NSF 61

4. Body Material: Low Lead Bronze.

5. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

6. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

7. Outlet Connection: 3/4 NPHS

8. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

9. Vacuum Breaker: hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.

10. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze.

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle.

2.6 HOSE AND APPURTENANCES

A. Hose, of the size, type and length specified herein, shall be furnished for use at the various hose

bibb, hose valve, and wall hydrant locations shown. Hose shall be furnished in ¾", 1” and 1 ½”

diameter. The hose shall be multi ply synthetic cord reinforced type with rubber tube and cover,

and shall be Goodyear Sureline series, or equal. The hose shall be furnished in twenty-five (25)

foot lengths at EACH location shown on the drawings.

B. Couplings shall be furnished for each hose. They shall be of cast brass and shall have American

Standard thread for hose diameters specified above.

C. One hose nozzle shall be furnished for each (50) foot length of hose. The nozzles shall be of

cast brass with adjustable spray pattern.

D. Hose racks shall be wall-mounted type, designed to hold a minimum of 50 feet of hose and shall

be installed where indicated on the Contract Drawings. The rack shall be made of polished

stainless-steel rod as manufactured by Strahman Valves, Inc., Model HR-100 or HR-100L, or

equal.



2.7 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants




a. Josam Series 71350

b. Zurn

c. Or Equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 1.

7. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

8. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

9. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized

metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A

through F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co.

b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

c. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

e. Watts Industries, Inc.

f. Zurn Industries, Inc.

B. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

C. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented

hood and set screws to secure to vent pipe.

D. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly

constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch (25-mm)

enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with

counterflashing.



2.9 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-

inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip

galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

B. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)

minimum thickness.

C. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

D. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.10 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts,

1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co

b. LSP Products Group

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co

d. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div

2. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.

3. Clamping Device: Not required.

4. Outlet Connection: Inside caulk.

5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

2.11 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:




a. Josam Series 30000

b. Zurn

c. Or Equal.



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Bronze.

5. Seepage Flange: Not required.

6. Anchor Flange: Required.

7. Clamping Device: Not required.

8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Backwater Valve: Not required.

10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.

11. Sediment Bucket: Not required.

12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

13. Top Shape: Round.

14. Funnel: Not required.

15. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

16. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.

2.12 ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast Iron Roof Drains, RD:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co. Model 21500

b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

c. Zurn Industries, Inc.

2. Body Material: Cast iron.

3. Dome: Cast Iron

4. Flashing Flange/Clamp: Required

5. Deck Clamp: Required.

6. Outlet: Bottom.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for piping joining

materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with


1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with airgap

fitting, fixed airgap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe



diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for

this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.

D. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of

1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller

and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

F. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm)

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


I. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's

written installation instructions.

1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

K. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.



L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.

M. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or

globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

N. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet

O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding

pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.

D. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.



G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


A. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris


B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems.



MODIFICATION OF VERTICAL PROPELLER PUMPS 15441 - 1

SECTION 15441 – MODIFICATION OF VERTICAL PROPELLER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes removal, disassembly, inspection, modification, reinstallation and testing

of the two propeller pumps and motors as shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor

shall bear all the costs involved therein including rental of equipment required for removal and

reinstallation. During this operation, from the beginning of the removal to the completion of the

testing, the Contractor shall be responsible for the pumps and motors. Any damage incurred

because of this operation shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Operational Plan: The Contractor shall submit for approval an Operational Plan for the removal

modification and reinstallation of the pumps. This plan shall include methods to be used for

removal reinstallation and testing of pumps. The plan shall include type and size of hoisting

equipment, type and size of transportation vehicle and how these items will access the site. The

plan shall also provide a schedule for entire operations with dates for milestones for the

completion of this portion of the work.

B. After inspection of the pumps, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a report documenting

any irregularities, indications of excessive wear and conditions which affect the efficient

operation of the pump. This report shall also include the cost to the Owner for correcting the

above noted items. The Owner will review this information and within 14 days direct the

Contractor to submit a change order for cost of those items the Owner determines are required.

C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a Manufacturer’s Certificate, in accordance with




A. All modifications to pumps shall be made with the same materials used in the initial

manufacture of the pump. The new work shall meet or exceed the standards and quality of

work in the original construction of the pumps. All work shall comply with standards set forth

by the Hydraulic Institute. All replacement components shall be supplied by the original

equipment manufacturer (OEM).



B. The rehabilitation of pumps shall be performed by the original pump manufacturer, or

authorized rehabilitation center of the original pump manufacturer. The rehabilitation facilities

shall have completed rebuild and performance testing capabilities and be regularly engaged in

rebuild work of similar types and sizes of pump for at least ten year prior to bid opening.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

D. Pumps shall not be stored on site. The pumps must be placed on the transport vehicle when

removed from their present location and removed from the site. When returned to the site the

pumps must be immediately installed in the station.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty to the Owner that all work will be in accordance with

the Contract Documents and that the equipment, material, workmanship, performance and

installation will not be defective. Contractor shall make the necessary repairs and replacements

any defective equipment at the convenience of the Owner for a period of one (1) year after the

completion of the Contract.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of soleplates and concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and

formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. Metal requirements are specified in

Division 5.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFICATIONS TO VERTICAL PROPELLER PUMPS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Fairbanks-Morse.

B. Description: The work includes the following items:

1. Removal of the two existing pumps and motors.

2. Shipping the pumps and motors to the shop facility.

3. Disassembly and inspection of the pumps. Each component to be measured and

compared to the original engineering drawing and tolerances. From these findings,

provide a report to the Engineer and City detailing each part with the recommendation for

replacement, repair, or rework.



4. Replace the following components:

a. Suction Bell Bearing

b. Bowl Bearings

c. Sand Collar

d. Enclosing Tubes

e. Connector Bearings

f. Line Shaft Couplings

g. Tension Nut

h. Propeller Hardware

i. Miscellaneous Gaskets, O-Rings, and Hardware

5. Dynamically balance propeller to ANSI S2.19 Grade 2.5 (Two Plane).

6. Extend column and shaft length per Contract Drawings, straighten shaft as necessary.

7. Reassemble complete pump components at lengths acceptable for re-installation by the

Contractor under supervision of the manufacturer’s representative.

8. Motors shall be, cleaned, including stator and rotor, bearings replaced, dipped and baked

reassembled and tested.

9. Coat the pump per the original order.

10. Performance test the bowl assembly to insure mechanical function and hydraulic

performance.

11. Return of the pumps and motors to the site.

12. Assembly and installation of the pumps and motors with Fairbanks representative

supervision.

13. Onsite testing of the pumps and motors for proper mechanical and hydraulic operation.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Pump controls shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings and provided under other sections of

this specification.

2.3 PAINTING

A. Manufacturer shall repair and recoat the pumping units including motor. Provide epoxy

coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing installation to determine the methods of removing and reinstalling the pumps.

B. Determine size of all new components.

3.2 PUMP REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. The Contractor shall supply all equipment and manpower required to disconnect the pump from

all services, remove them from their mountings and secure them to vehicles for transportation.



B. The pumps may be removed in sections as large as is practical. Disassembly shall be at

manufactured joints and connections. No cutting of pump shall be allowed.

C. All transportation permits and fees shall be paid by the Contractor.

D. The pumps and motors shall be returned in sections suitable to be installed in the new facility

using the available equipment.

E. The pump and motor reassembly shall be performed by the Contractor on site under the

supervision of the manufacturer’s representative and they shall perform quality control checks

during reassembly.

3.3 FACTORY CERTIFIED TEST

A. Certified factory test shall be conducted on the pumping units at the manufacturer’s facility with

witness by the City. Test shall be certified and submitted to the Engineer for final approval of

the unit before shipping and installation. The tests are to verify repaired performance.

B. Certified pump test shall demonstrate performance of the pump at the specified speeds. Test

shall include flow characteristics, horsepower requirements, and efficiency over the capacity

range from shut-off to the design points and at the various speeds shown. Pumping units shall

be tested with motor to be furnished in the field. The manufacturer’s standard test driver shall

not be used. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include, tabulated data and

results plotted as head vs. capacity, pump efficiency vs. capacity, and brake horsepower vs.

capacity. Brake horsepower shall be non-overloading for rated motor horsepower. All test

results shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer. Approval of results shall

be precedent to shipment of pump.

3.4 FACTORY WITNESSED TESTING

A. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the City and/or their representative at the place of

manufacture with travel costs included. All pumps shall be tested at the same time to permit the

Owner and/or their representative to make only one trip to witness the tests. The Engineer and

City shall be notified of scheduled pump tests not less than 60 days in advance. Cost for the

witness testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor shall coordinate with the pump

manufacturer and submit a startup / demonstration plan and checklist 30 days prior to witness

testing for City and Engineers review and approval.

B. If factory witness test fails, Contractor shall bear all costs for retesting plus travel expenses for

witnesses.

3.5 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps.

1. Install dowel rods and/or anchor bolts as shown on the structural drawing.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.



1. Provide size and shape of concrete pad as shown of the contract drawings.

3.6 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 14.3 and 14.4.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install pumps as shown on the Contract Drawings.

D. Install vertical pumps on sole plates mounted to concrete bases. Install pumps with motor and

pump shafts vertical.

3.7 CONNECTIONS



B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."

D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.8 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set controls for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not

operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.9 FIELD VIBRATION TESTING

A. Perform a vibration analysis on all pumps and motors with an independent third-party testing

agency after they are installed and ready to run. All final vibration readings used for acceptance



will be taken with the machinery under normal full load operating conditions. Tests shall

comply Hydraulics Institute Standard 9.6.4. Submit results for review by Engineer.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Operate the pumps in the presence of the Owner’s representative to demonstrate quiet vibration

free operation.

B. Vibration in excess of Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.6.4, will be cause for the City to reject the

modifications to the pumps.

C. Rejection of the pump modification shall require the Contractor to make any and all changes to

the pump to eliminate the excess vibration.

D. When the pump, motor, and electrical controls and all related piping have been installed, the

Contractor shall conduct a field test of the pumping units in the presence of the Engineer and

Owner. Field tests of head vs. capacity shall be made. All field testing need not repeat factory

performance tests previously completed but shall be sufficiently complete to demonstrate that

the pumping units are operating in a satisfactory manner, in accordance with the requirements

of these specifications and in such a manner to make possible the issuance of the

“Manufacturer’s Certificate”.



ELECTRIC, INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS 15485 - 1

SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

1. Tankless, electric water heaters. 2. Accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:



1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.

2. ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for

household water heaters.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace

components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Heating Elements: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Point-of-Use, Tankless, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters:

a. Eemax, Inc.

b. Keltech, Inc. c. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.

d. Or equal.

2.2 POINT-OF-USE, TANKLESS, INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 499. Size as scheduled on Drawings.

B. Construction: Without hot-water storage.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

2. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. 3. Interior Finish: Materials complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings.

4. Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic.

C. Heating System: Electric-resistance type. Ni-chrome construction. 1. Replaceable cartridge type.



D. IWH-1

1. Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm at 41oF temperature rise.

2. Power Demand: 3.0 kW.

3. Electrical: 208 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.

4. Full Load Amperes: 15 5. Temperature Control: Flow control fitting.

6. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

7. Replaceable inlet filter inside inlet connector

E. IWH-2

1. Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm at 45oF temperature rise.

2. Power Demand: 16.0 kW. 3. Electrical: 208 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.

4. Full Load Amperes: 80 (2X40)

5. Temperature Control: Flow switch adjustable thermostatic control

6. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. 7. Replaceable inlet filter inside inlet connector

2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and

referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so

controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Include shutoff valve in each water heater inlet and outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-

circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.



E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.

F. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.



B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:


equipment. 2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.

3. Check for piping connection leaks.

4. Test operation of safety controls and devices.

5. Energize electric circuits. 6. Adjust operating controls.

7. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 110 deg F (60 deg C).

3.4 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.



UNIT HEATERS 15762 - 1

SECTION 15762 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.

2. Wall unit heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories for each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Location and size of each field connection.

3. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

4. Location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

5. Location and arrangement of integral controls.

6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale,

on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from

installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which unit heaters will be attached.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Access panels.

D. Field quality-control test reports.



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For unit heaters to include in operation and maintenance

manual.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS



1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

2. Chromalox, Inc. Model CCH

3. Indeeco.

4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.

5. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

6. Or equal.

B. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.

1. Comply with UL 2021.

C. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's custom paint, in color selected by

Architect.

1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick, galvanized sheet

steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam

fasteners.

D. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise

and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box

for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate

elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.



E. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.

Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel

fan scrolls.

2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply

with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

4. Control voltage transformer.

5. Power disconnect switch.

6. Built-in thermostat.

F. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on the Drawings.

2.2 CORROSION RESISTANT ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS



1. Chromalox, Inc. Model HD3D

2. Ruffneck.

3. Indeeco.

4. Qmark

5. Or equal.

B. Corrosion resistant unit heaters shall be of the capacity and service ratings described and

scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

C. Unit heater shall be U.L. listed and meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and

shall have capacities as shown on the drawings. Cabinets shall be 20-gauge type 304 stainless

steel with adjustable discharge louvers. Unit heaters shall be provided with brackets suitable for

wall or ceiling mounting.

D. The heating elements shall consist of stainless-steel sheath fin tube. Operating elements shall

have automatic reset thermal overheat protection wired for instantaneous pilot operation of

built-in control contactor holding coil.

E. Control enclosure shall be NEMA 4X. All hardware shall be stainless steel, and element

terminals shall be protected from moisture by heat shrink tubing.

F. The motors shall be U.L. listed, epoxy painted and totally enclosed with permanently lubricated

ball bearings for long life. Thermal overload protection shall be built-in.

G. Fans shall be spark resistant and epoxy coated aluminum, directly connected to the fan motor.

Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall include a delay relay to cool the

heating elements after they have been de-energized.



H. Unit heaters shall be suitable for electrical service scheduled on the Contract Drawings. Heaters

shall have integral, heavy duty magnetic contactors and disconnect switches.

I. Unit thermostats shall be provided by heater manufacturer. Thermostats shall be as indicated on

the equipment schedules and shall be either integral to the unit or remote wall mounted. Remote

units shall be wired per manufacturer’s instructions. Thermostat shall have same NEMA rated

enclosure as the unit heater.

2.3 GENERAL SERVICE ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS



1. Chromalox, Inc. Model LUH

2. Ruffneck.

3. Indeeco.

4. Qmark

5. Or equal.

B. General Service electric unit heaters shall be of the capacity and service ratings described and

scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

C. Unit heaters shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and

shall have capacities as shown on the Contract Drawings. Cabinets shall be of 18-gauge steel

with adjustable louvers. All metal surfaces shall be factory finished to prevent corrosion. Unit

heaters shall be provided with brackets suitable for wall or ceiling mounting.

D. The heating elements shall consist of metal sheath fin tube. Operating elements shall have

automatic reset thermal overheat protection wired for instantaneous pilot operation of built-in

control contactor holding coil.

E. The motors shall be totally enclosed, continuous fan-duty sleeve bearing type equipped with

built-in thermal overload protection. Each unit shall be equipped with a combination fan

guard/motor support resiliently mounted.

F. Fans shall be aluminum, directly connected to the fan motor. Fans shall be statically and

dynamically balanced.

G. Heaters shall have integral, heavy duty magnetic contactors and disconnect switches.

H. Unit thermostats shall be provided by heater manufacturer. Thermostats shall be as indicated on

the equipment schedules and shall be either integral to the unit or remote wall mounted. Remote

units shall be wired per manufacturer’s instructions. Thermostat shall have same NEMA rated

enclosure as the unit heater.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Mount unit heaters with manufacturer’s hardware and brackets.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and

to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.







3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration

and Testing."



METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution

systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -

distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of

duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for

layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original

design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.

3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.

4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

5. Fittings.

6. Reinforcement and spacing.

7. Seam and joint construction.

8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.

11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration

isolation, and seismic restraints.

B. Field quality-control test reports.




A. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA Retain paragraph below if range hood exhaust ducts are in Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:






2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts

and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or

mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,

airtight seal.



D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when

cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

C. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods

with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

D. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction

according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and

complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod

applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

2. Supply Ducts (Positive Pressure): 2-inch wg.

3. Generator exhaust plenum (Positive Pressure): 4-inch wg.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure

couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a

minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions

unless specifically indicated.

I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,

and similar finished work.

J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward

to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.



3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch

intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of

failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section

"Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct

Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round

and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than

and equal to 2-inch wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage

Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2500 Pa).

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum

allowable.



3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning and perform

cleaning before air balancing.

B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.

2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.



DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers.

2. Motorized control dampers.

3. Duct-mounting access doors.

4. Flexible connectors.

5. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Backdraft dampers.

2. Motorized control dampers.

3. Duct-mounting access doors.

4. Flexible connectors.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

1. Special fittings.

2. Motorized-control damper installations.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:



2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish

for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900

mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Ruskin Model BD2/A1

2. American Warming and Ventilating

3. Nailor Industries

4. Or equal.

B. Construction

1. Description: Gravity balanced

2. Damper Position: Vertical

3. Air Flow: horizontal.

4. Frame: 0.09” aluminum 6063T5.

5. Blades: 0.025” aluminum 6063T5.

6. Blade Action: Parallel

7. Blade Seal: vinyl edge seals

C. All blades shall be linked together to enable uniform movement with all linkage concealed in

the jambs.



2.4 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS


1. Ruskin Model CD50

2. American Warming and Ventilating

3. Nailor Industries

4. Or equal.

B. Dampers shall meet the following criteria:

1. Frame: 0.125” 6063T5 extruded aluminum

2. Blades: 0.07” 6063T5 extruded aluminum

3. Blade Operation: Parallel

4. Blade Type: Airfoil

5. Blade Spacing: 6”

6. Blade Seals: neoprene or TPE

7. Jamb Seals: flexible metal

8. Bearings: molded synthetic

9. Axles: 1/2’ plated steel hex

C. Provide electric motor operators for all dampers. Electric motor operated dampers, including

linkage, motors, interconnection wiring, and all accessories shall be provided.

1. General HVAC motor operators:

a. Manufacturer: Honeywell Series MS4120F, or equal

b. Unpowered Position: closed with spring return

c. Power: 120-volt 1 phase, 60 Hertz

d. Accessories: auxiliary switches, mounting bracket, linkages.

e. Max Closing Time: 15 secs

2. Generator Service motor operators:

a. Manufacturer: Honeywell Series MS4120F, or equal

b. Unpowered Position: open with spring return

c. Power: 120-volt 1 phase, 60 Hertz

d. Accessories: auxiliary switches, mounting bracket, linkages

e. Max Closing Time: 15 secs

f. Spares: four (4) generator damper actuators.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. American Warming and Ventilating.

2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

3. Greenheck.

4. Nailor Industries Inc.

5. Ventfabrics, Inc.

6. Ward Industries, Inc.



B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Aluminm sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Corp.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick

aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

4. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch (50 N/mm) in the warp and 185 lbf/inch (32 N/mm) in the

filling.

5. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C).

6. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 28 to plus 99 deg C).

7. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).

8. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).



2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories

in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories

in aluminum ducts.

C. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section " Identification for Mechanical."

E. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

generator, fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

F. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.



HVAC FANS 15830 - 1

SECTION 15830 - HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: For each product.

1. Wall Mounted Propeller Exhaust Fans

2. Centrifugal Curb Mounted Roof Exhaust Fans

3. Axial Curb Mounted Roof Supply Fans

4. Centrifugal Ceiling Exhaust Fans

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan.

2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

3. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Show fan layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and

mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fans to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


HVAC FANS 15830 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal.

2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. All fans shall be of the capacity and drive type described and scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

D. Field install and label fans as shown in the Contract Drawings.

2.2 WALL MOUNTED PROPELLER EXHAUST FANS


1. Greenheck SE1

2. PennBarry

3. Loren Cook

4. Or equal.

B. Description:

1. Sizing: As scheduled on Drawings.

2. Fan Panels: Galvanized Steel

3. Propeller: Aluminum blades riveted to steel hub

4. Balance: Statically and dynamically per AMCA 204

5. Bearings: Permanently lubricated, sleeve type

6. Motor: ODP

7. Accessories: As scheduled on Drawings.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL CURB MOUNTED ROOF EXHAUST FANS


1. Greenheck GB

2. PennBarry

3. Loren Cook

4. Or equal.

B. Description:


2. Housing: Aluminum.

3. Drive Frame: Heavy gauge steel mounted on vibration isolators.

4. Shaft: Ground and polished steel with anti-corrosion coating.


HVAC FANS 15830 - 3

5. Wheel: Aluminum, backward inclined. Non-overloading.

6. Balance: Statically and dynamically per AMCA 204.

7. Fan Bearings: Permanently Sealed Bearings.

8. Fan Bearing Life: L10 of 100,000 hours.

9. Motor: ODP.

10. Motor Housing: Cooling air inlet/breathing tube.

11. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball type.

12. Belt Drive: Oversized for 150% of driven HP.

13. Belts: Static free and oil resistant.

14. Pulleys: adjustable, cast type. Keyed to shafts.


2.4 AXIAL CURB MOUNTED ROOF SUPPLY FANS


1. Greenheck RBS

2. PennBarry

3. Loren Cook

4. Or equal.

B. Description:


2. Housing: Aluminum.

3. Drive Frame: Heavy gauge steel mounted on vibration isolators.

4. Shaft: Ground and polished steel with anti-corrosion coating.

5. Propeller: Aluminum.

6. Balance: Statically and dynamically per AMCA 204.

7. Fan Bearings: Permanently Sealed Bearings.

8. Fan Bearing Life: L10 of 100,000 hours.

9. Motor: ODP.

10. Motor Housing: Cooling air inlet/breathing tube.

11. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball type.

12. Belt Drive: Oversized for 150% of driven HP.

13. Belts: Static free and oil resistant.

14. Pulleys: adjustable, cast type. Keyed to shafts.


2.5 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING EXHAUST FANS


1. Greenheck SP-A

2. PennBarry

3. Loren Cook

4. Or equal.


HVAC FANS 15830 - 4

B. Description:


2. Wheel Type: forward curved

3. Wheel Material: galvanized steel

4. Balancing: AMCA 204-05

5. Motors: ODP

6. Bearings: permanently lubricated sleeve type

7. Housing: galvanized steel

8. Insulation: 0.5 inches, acoustical

9. Accessories:

a. Spring loaded aluminum backdraft damper

b. Decorative grille

c. External electrical access

d. Mounting brackets

e. Brick Vent, Greenheck model BE or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans level and plumb.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to


C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 "Duct

Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and



HVAC FANS 15830 - 5

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. For belt-driven fans, adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing procedures.

9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



Division 1, certifying that the equipment is installed in a complete and satisfactory manner ready

for operation.



HVAC FANS 15830 - 6



TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15900 - 1

SECTION 15900 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and

incidental to the complete and satisfactory testing, adjusting and balancing of the HVAC

equipment and ductwork as specified herein.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

F. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certified TAB reports. Provide certified test reports, signed by the test and balance supervisor

who performed the work. In addition, have the reports certified by a Professional Engineer who

is familiar with testing and balancing and the project, and is registered in the jurisdiction where

testing is being conducted. The final reports shall include identification and types of

instruments used, and their most recent calibration date.

B. Maintenance Data: Include, in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports and

identification of instruments.

C. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit the certified individual qualifications of all persons

responsible for supervising and performing the actual work, the name of the certifying engineer,

and the qualifications of the independent Registered Professional Engineer certifying the report.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC or NEBB with min three years of

experience in TAB for similar projects.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."



C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air

Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the following:

1. S1.1: Specification for Sound Level Meters

2. S1.11: Specification for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and Digital

Filters.

F. NEBB or AABC: Comply with NEBB'S "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting,

Balancing of Environmental Systems" or comply with AABC MN-1 "National Standards," as

applicable to mechanical air distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Material: Seal, patch and repair ductwork, piping and equipment drilled or cut for testing

purposes.

1. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.

2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS

A. Standards: Utilize instruments and equipment of type, precision, and capacity as recommended

in the following standards:

1. NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems."

2. AABC Manual MN-1.

3. Test Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and

calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test

instrument shall be calibrated by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. The

Owner or Engineer has the right to request instrument recalibration, or the use of other

instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is questionable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.



B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

J. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness

for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

b. Volume and control dampers are open and functional.

c. Clean filters are installed.

d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

e. Ceilings are installed.

f. Windows and doors are installed.

g. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.



3.3 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL.

A. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as required by

Drawings and Specifications.

B. Cut insulation and ducts for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB

procedures. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and

thickness as used to construct ducts. Install and join new insulation that matches removed

materials.

C. Test Duration: Operating tests of Heating and Cooling Terminal Units, fans, and other

equipment shall be of not less than two hours duration after stabilized operating conditions have

been established. Capacities shall be based on temperatures and air and water quantities

measured during such tests.

3.4 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES

A. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide approximate design air quantity to or

through each component, and to maintain stable and comfortable interior temperatures, free of

drafts or stagnant conditions. Adjusting and balancing of all systems shall be conducted with all

other ancillary systems in simultaneous operation.

B. Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities (i.e.,

proportion flow between various terminals comprising system) to the extent that their

adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound (i.e., in excess of specified limits).

1. Balancing between runs (submains, branch mains, and branches) generally shall be

accomplished by flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided-flow fitting.

2. Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be minimal. Final

measurements of air quantity shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to

provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion.

C. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan

speeds in accordance with air system data.

3.5 CERTIFIED REPORTS

A. Submittals: Reports described herein, covering air system performance, air motion (fpm) shall

be submitted prior to final inspection.

B. Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments shall be

included.

C. Reports: Reports shall conspicuously identify items not conforming to contract requirements,

or obvious mal-operation and design deficiencies.

D. Certification: The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer

who is versed in the field of air balancing and who is not affiliated with any firm involved in the



design or construction phases of the project. Certification shall include checking of adherence

to agenda, of calculations, of procedures, and evaluation of final summaries.

E. Report: The certified report shall include, for each air handling system, the data listed below.

1. Equipment:

a. Installation data

1) Manufacturer and model.

2) Size.

3) Arrangement, discharge and class.

4) Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps.

5) Location and local identification data.

b. Design data

1) Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.

c. Fan recorded (test) data

1) CFM.

2) Static pressure.

3) RPM.

4) Motor operating amps, motor operating bhp.

2. Duct Systems:

a. Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum) - main, submains, branches, outdoor

(outside) air, total air, and exhaust.

1) Duct size(s)

2) Number of Pitot tube (pressure measurements)

3) Sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements)

4) Average velocity

5) Recorded (test) cfm vs. design cfm


STORMWATER PUMPING STATION #3

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 1

SECTION 16051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

2. Sleeve seals.

3. Grout.

4. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.


following.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or

comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

4. Pressure Plates: Plastic Include two for each sealing element.



5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom

consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor

or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.



G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow

for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.




Intentionally Blank.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16060 - 1

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions and “Division 01 – General Requirements”

form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as

if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.



16060 - 2

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Provide grounding electrode system in accordance with NEC Article 250. All available

grounding electrodes present shall be bonded together to form the grounding electrode system.

Provide supplemental grounding rods and grounding electrode conductors as noted on drawings.

B. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.



16060 - 3

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

3. Flexible raceway runs.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches below final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.



16060 - 4


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test

wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Professional promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16073 - 1

SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the

applied force.


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.



16073 - 2

1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.



16073 - 3

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in

diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding

specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than

4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 .

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.



16073 - 4

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075-1

SECTION 16075 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Warning labels and signs.

2. Instruction signs.

3. Equipment identification labels.

4. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting

provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's



wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,

standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES

(915 MM)."

2.2 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.



C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation

and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-

inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that

extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend

"DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black

letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished

surfaces:

1. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.

2. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits More Than 30A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl labels at 30-

foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and

pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend

and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Power.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.



c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where

splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent

possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive-film-type labels.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs

with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is

provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high

letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use

labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of

the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive,

engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.



b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.



ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

16076 - 1

SECTION 16076 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment and systems used to monitor consumption:

1. Power Monitor (PM).



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for power monitoring and control.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection.

a. Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as motor-

control centers) that describe the following:

1) Location of the meters and gateways, and routing of the connecting wiring.

2) Details of power monitoring and control features to illustrate coordination

among related equipment and power monitoring and control.

3. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and

devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data

communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators,

and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data

communication lines.

4. Network naming and numbering scheme.

5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and

presentation with a block diagram.



16076 - 2


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Design Data:

1. Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record

options and setup decisions.

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided

in electronic PDF format on compact disk or portable storage device with a USB

interface.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of

reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.

d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer

and service representatives for the system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging

on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding

computer control, and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of

statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and

modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time

between tasks; and task descriptions.

h. Owner training materials.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring to include in operation and


B. Operational Documentation:

1. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, and design

guides.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to

form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.



16076 - 3

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that

are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Where shown on the drawings, Power Monitor (PM) shall be integrally mounted in MCC

section, 3-phase microprocessor based monitoring device that provides complete electrical

metering, displaying and remote monitoring of electrical parameters as listed herein and as

shown on the Drawings.

B. The PM shall be UL listed. The PM shall support 3 and 4 wire Wye, 3 wire Delta and

single-phase systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The PM shall

accept input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers.

C. Voltage monitoring range shall be up to 300 VAC phase-to-phase for 120/208-volt system

or 300-volt phase-to-neutral and 60-volt phase-to-phase for 277/480-volt system.

D. PM shall measure True RMS voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, current per phase

and neutral, real power, reactive power, and power factor. PM shall monitor total accumu-

lated energy, total accumulated reactive energy and total apparent energy.

E. PM shall calculate average, max/min demand values for all readings. A time/date stamp

must be recorded when a max or min is detected.

F. The accuracy shall be a minimum ±0.2% of full scale for current and voltage readings and

±0.4% for power, energy and ±1.0% for power factor readings. Accuracy shall be main-

tained from 10 to 115% of nominal for voltage, 3 to 140% of nominal for current and

from –0.50 to 1.00 to +0.50 power factor. The resolution for current, voltage and

power parameters shall be 0.1% and for power factor 1.0%.

G. The PM display shall have a standard switchboard instrument size footprint with mounting

per ANSI C39.1. The PM shall have high intensity LEDs or LCD of at least 5/16-

inch height letters. Displayed power measurements shall include Volts, Amps, Watts,

VARs, KWH and Power Factor. The totalized power readings shall be displayed in five-

digit resolution minimum. Provide a listing of the register locations in the PM where the

collected data is accessible, via the communication port.



16076 - 4

a. The power monitor shall have the following characteristics:

Current Input Range (for each channel): 5A at full scale

Overload withstand: surge 10X for 3 seconds

Surge withstanding: Per IEEE C37.90.1

Frequency Range: 0-75Hz, 60Hz - Nominal

Temperature: -4degrees F to 150 degrees F

b. Fused potential transformers shall be incorporated into the Monitoring system. Provide cur-

rent transformers, fuses, potential taps and accessories with ratios suitable for service

voltage and current rating of motor control center. Current transformers shall be capable

of carrying full load continuous primary current without damage to transformer insulation.

Voltage and current transducers shall be self-powered, solid state device, AC input, DC

output insensitive to load variations from 0 up to 19,000 ohm; with multi-turn adjustable po-

tentiometer accessible through a siding access port providing a 0-1 mA DC output. Trans-

ducers shall be Scientific Columbus Model VT110A2 (voltage) and CT510A2 (current), or

equal.

c. Power monitoring unit shall communicate through Open Bus communications system.

Provide all required equipment, connectors, converters, and power supplies.

d. Power monitoring unit shall be provided by Schneider Electric PM8000 series.



LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-

THWN-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.







16120 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground: Type THHN-2-

THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.



16120 - 3

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Firestopping

Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




16120 - 4



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16130 - 1

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Surface raceways.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for

intended use.




16130 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for GRC:

a. Type: Compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

F. Joint Compound for PVC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

B. RNC: Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



16130 - 3

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed

cover.

D. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.



16130 - 4

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC".

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: PVC coated steel.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: PVC coated steel.

3. Underground Conduit: PVC coated steel; schedule 40 PVC concrete encased where

noted.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: As noted on drawings.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: PVC coated steel.

2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: PVC coated steel.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: PVC coated steel.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: PVC coated steel.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: As noted on drawings.

6. Final connection to vibrating equipment: seal tight conduit

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of

raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.



16130 - 5

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Professional

for each specific location.

5. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, GRC or IMC before rising above floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound


J. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

M. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.



16130 - 6

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature

change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

O. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured

to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

Q. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

R. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

S. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

T. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill.



16130 - 7

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating




16130 - 8



WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 1

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

3. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.

4. Occupancy sensors.

5. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking

wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


C. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

D. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.

2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.

3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.

B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only

when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.


3. Standards: Comply with UL 498.

4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet

Locations" Article.

2.3

A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two

pole, three wire, and self-grounding.


3. Type: Feed through.

4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.


WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 3

B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A

A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology:

1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional

switch lighting-control unit using dual (ultrasonic and passive infrared) technology.

2. Standards: Comply with UL 20.

3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for

fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac.

4. Adjustable time delay of 15 minutes.

5. Able to be locked to Automatic-On mode.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux).

7. 180 degree PIR auto-on wall box sensor

8. Manufacturer: Leviton IPS05-1LZ or equal.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.

B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.


WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against

outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.


WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 5

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral

blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not

required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers

or tags inside outlet boxes.

C. Essential Electrical System: Mark receptacles supplied from the essential electrical system to

allow easy identification using a self-adhesive label.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated

digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or

illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.


WIRING DEVICES

16140 - 6

D. Tests for Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

E. Test straight-blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99.

Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).

F. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-Fusible switches.

2. Molded-case circuit breakers.

3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.



5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.


1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,




E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not

exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Facility Manager no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of

electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Facility Manager's written

permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.



2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are

specified.

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with

interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for

circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. See electrical drawing documents for specific information on NEMA ratings.

EXECUTION

2.4 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


2.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless




B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.



c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

2.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as




ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 1

SECTION 16414 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following

features:

1. Diesel engine.

2. Unit-mounted cooling system.

3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring.

4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads.

5. Fuel system.


1. Section 16415 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to

initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the

range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

B. EPS: Emergency power supply.

C. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.




specialties and accessories.

2. Include thermal damage curve for generator.

3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times

generator capacity.

5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times generator capacity.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 2

6. Include air flow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cfm at 0.8 power factor, with

air supply temperature of 95, 80, 70, and 50 deg F. Provide drawings showing requirements

and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts.

7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to kw rating, efficiency,

reactances, and short-circuit current capability.

B. Shop Drawings:

The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete shop drawing package illustrating

compliance with the specifications contained herein representing the Emergency Stand-By Power

System. The power system shall not be fabricated until the shop drawing package is approved

by the City.

1. Include plans and elevations for engine-generator set and other components specified.

Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to

structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and

interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for EPS equipment and functional

relationship between all electrical components.

6. Engine generator system plan, elevation and dimensional drawings clearly indicating aspects

of the system including points for each of the interconnections required, the space required

for maintenance and overhaul, and any interfacing requirements.

7. Engine generator/exciter control cubicle layout and component descriptions.

8. Fuel consumption rate curve at various loads, ventilation and combustion CFM

requirements.

9. Exhaust muffler and dimensions, vibration isolator descriptions, exhaust pipe layouts and

dimensions.

10. Schematic ladder and wiring diagrams for the generator system. Printed literature and

brochures describing the system including all sizing requirements and components specified

11. Battery, FRP/HDPE battery boxes, and battery charger literature and description.

12. Layout of the main fuel oil tank, float mechanism, piping schematic, and fuel connection

information for the engine.

13. The specified stand-by KW of the generator shall be for continuous electrical service

during interruption of the normal utility power source, and this shall be certified to this

effect by the manufacturer for the actual unit supplied.

14. Factory prototype test results performed on a unit of this size and type.

15. Procedure for lubricating oil sampling and recommended frequency.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Source quality-control reports, including, but not limited to the following:


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 3

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical,

to those tested on prototype unit.

3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to

meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.

4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements.

5. Report of sound generation.

6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.

7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.


D. Warranty: The complete generator set, controls, accessories, and assembly shall be warranted as a

whole by the manufacturer for five (5) years from conditional acceptance for parts and labor.

Satisfactory warranty documents naming City of Frederick, Maryland as the recipient of the

warranty and setting forth the period of the warranty shall be provided before acceptance. The

warranty shall identify the supplier as a manufacturer's representative capable of resolving

warranty claims. However, the manufacturer shall remain responsible on its warranty. Further,

individual warranties of the component parts will not be considered as satisfactory warranty

documents.

E. Warranty data shall reflect repair or replacement of components of packaged engine generators and

associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

F. Manufacturer’s Certificate


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be furnished before the system is accepted.

This manual shall include start up, shut down, and emergency operating instructions; repair,

troubleshooting and preventative maintenance procedures; a complete parts manual;

dimensional drawings, separate unit wiring diagrams and schematics, and interconnecting

wiring requirements; special requirements for operation of the diesel generator between 35

and 100 percent of rating. The O&M manual shall include manuals for each component of

the system, including identification of the individual parts used in the system. A copy of the

approved shop drawing reflecting any past-approved changes shall also be included. The

O&M Manual shall include the master shop technical service manuals, overhaul system

manual literature kit and parts manuals for the generator and engine. The final O & M

Manual shall be submitted and approved prior to conditional acceptance.

2. In addition to items specified above the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include the

following:

a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready

access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 4

b. Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location.

c. Training plan.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering

for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating but no fewer than one of each.

2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.

3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

4. Tools: Each tool listed by part number in operations and maintenance manual.


A. The generator set system shall be assembled, tested, and shipped by one supplier so there is one

source of supply and responsibility. The Generator system shall include the Generator and ATS

equipment. The basis of design foot-print and performance is Kohler. Contractor shall be

responsible for coordinating generator system equipment selection, foot print, and performance

within the spaces allotted and with the design intent shown on the Drawings.

B. The supplier shall be a factory trained and certified manufacturer's representative and shall

maintain a complete service facility. The service facility shall be capable of making delivery to

the generator set site all generator set parts within 48 hours of placing the order. The supplier

shall employ a manufacturer trained and certified technician on a full time basis at the service

facility capable of making repairs and responding to service calls within 24 hours of notice.

Certified proof of this requirement shall be available from the supplier at the time of submission

of a quote.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation of the Generator Equipment in

accordance with NEC Clearances described and shown within the Contract Documents.

D. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

2. The engine generator set system, including all accessories described herein, shall meet all

standards established by:

a. Underwriters Laboratories.

b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

c. National Electrical Code.

d. National Fire Protection Association Pamphlets 30, 31, 37, 76A and 110.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 5

e. MIL-STD-705B.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine

generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Kohler, MTU Onsite Energy, or approved equal.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source

from a single manufacturer.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B15.1.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. Comply with NFPA 37.



4. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 6

D. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA Tier 3 requirements and applicable state and local

government requirements.

E. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum

noise level at adjacent property boundaries locations due to sound emitted by generator set

including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of

installation.

F. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C.

2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 415 feet.

G. Engine

1. The engine shall be diesel fueled, 4-cycle, liquid-cooled with mounted radiator, blower fan, and

coolant pump. Full pressure - lubrication shall be supplied by a positive- displacement lube oil

pump. The engine shall be equipped with replaceable water/fuel separator, and lube and fuel

filters (spin on type if available). The engine speed shall be controlled by an asynchronous

governor to maintain generator frequency through the range from full to no load at 1800 RPM,

60HZ. The engine shall be remote starting with a two-wire, solenoid shift, electric starter. Install at

least one foot of flexible fuel line between the engine and fuel oil tank.

2. Engine protection devices provided shall include shut down for overcrank, overspeed, high coolant

temperature, and low oil pressure.

3. A radiator with blower type fan shall be sized to maintain safe operation between 120-1250F

ambient temperature. Total airflow restriction from the radiator shall not exceed 0.5" water at

both inlet and outlet. The cooling system shall be pre-treated by the engine supplier for inhibition of

internal corrosion. The radiator shall be equipped with core guard and fan guard. Cooling system

shall be protected against freezing to -34°F, with a 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze solution. The

antifreeze shall meet GM 1825 specifications. Provide long life TEXACO engine coolant, or equal.

Provide spin on coolant filter system where available.

4. Engine shall be provided with alternator that provides the highest starting KVA per the specified

kW size.

H. Silencers:

1. A critical type exhaust silencer having an attenuation factor of 25-32 decibels with inlet and outlet

connections as shown on the Drawings shall be provided for the engine generator set. Silencer

shall be as manufactured by Silex, Maxim, or equal, with companion flange connections at inlet

and outlet, and taps for drainage. A suitable length of flexible high temperature stainless steel

exhaust pipe with flanges welded to both ends shall be furnished for mounting between the engine

and silencer. The exhaust system shall be wrapped with a non-asbestos preformed insulation

material to reduce heat radiation, and covered with a metal retainer to hold the material in place

and provide additional protection.

2. Silencer shall be mounted above the engine generator set so that its' weight is not supported


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 7

by the engine. The exhaust pipe shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the measured, exhaust

back- pressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer.

Exhaust piping shall be extended through the building or enclosure wall as indicated with all

necessary weatherproof accessories.

I. Jacket Water Heater: Provide unit mounted thermal circulation type water heater incorporating separate

thermostatic switch at 100°F. The heater shall be a minimum of 3 watts per cubic inch engine

displacement. Heaters less than 2000 watts shall be 120-volts. Units 2000 watts and larger shall be

line voltage rated and powered through a contactor with 277-volt control. Provide an exterior tank

type heater, Kim-Start, or equal.

J. All engine drains, including oil and coolant drains, shall be piped and valved. Coolant drain piping

shall be Schedule 40 (minimum) brass. All drain valves shall be bronze or brass ball valves. Valve

trim materials shall be compatible with coolant.

K. The engine shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate with the name of the engine

manufacturer, engine model number, serial number and other pertinent engine data in accessible

locations where they can be read.

L. Generator

1. The generator shall be synchronous type built to NEMA standards, rated for continuous

stand-by at ratings indicated on the drawings, 60 HZ, 0.8 PF, 1800 RPM. Class H

insulation shall be used on the stator and rotor, and no materials which will support fungus

growth shall be used. The generator shall have a resettable protector for exciter/regulator

protection against extended low power factor loads. The generator shall be capable of accepting

full nameplate load in one step. The generator shall be rated for operating non-linear VFD

loads or full voltage starters as required for this application. The generator shall meet the

following criteria:

a. Voltage dip limit shall not exceed 20%

b. Single step Frequency dip shall not exceed 10%

c. All generators shall have a Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) end.

d. All other generator design criteria as indicated on electrical drawings

2. An exciter/regulator shall be provided to match the characteristics of the generator and

engine. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1% from no load to full rated load.

Voltage level adjustment shall be minimum of plus or minus 5%. The solid-state regulator

module shall be shock mounted and epoxy encapsulated for protection against vibration and

atmospheric deterioration. Voltage dip due to motor starting current shall not exceed 10% for

any step loading, which includes one sewage pump motor.

3. Main Line Circuit Breaker

a. A generator mounted main line molded case circuit breaker shall be provided as a load

circuit interrupting protection device. It shall operate both manually for normal

switching functions and automatically during overload and short circuit conditions. The

breaker trip rating shall not exceed 100% of the generator rating or the automatic transfer

switch rating.

b. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time-delay during overload


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 8

conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit. The circuit breaker shall

meet standards established by Underwriters Laboratories, National Electric Manufacturers

Association, and the National Electrical Code.

c. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical standards and are

unacceptable for line protection.

d. All generator breakers shall be furnished with local lockout/tagout hardware

4. The generator shall have minimum size as indicated on the drawings. The capacity of the

generator shall be rated for two booster pumps and the remaining connected loads. The

generator shall be designed to operate full voltage starters or non-linear loads, such as variable

frequency drives as shown on the drawings.

5. Automatic Starting System

a. Starting Motor: A DC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be

furnished. The motor voltage shall be 24VDC or 12VDC as recommended by the

manufacturer.

b. Provide automatic engine starting controls within the generator panel to start the engine

automatically from a contact in the transfer switch.

c. When the engine starts, the starting control shall automatically disconnect the cranking

controls. The cranking disconnect means shall be electrically self-regulating to prevent

recranking for a definite time after source voltage has reduced to a low value. If the

engine fails to start, or any safety device operates while the engine is running, the engine

shall be stopped immediately and the starting control locked out, requiring manual resetting.

d. Controls shall provide shutdown for low oil pressure, high water temperature,

overspeed, and overcrank. Controls shall include a 10 second cranking cycle limited to

3-5 attempts before lockout.

e. The automatic engine starting control shall incorporate industrial control type elements

throughout, which must operate at 80% battery voltage. Relays shall be equipped with

silver-gold contacts of the wiping type and shall have adequate pressure to insure reliable

performance at battery voltage.

f. Provide a lighted factory built, wired, and tested generator set mounted control panel,

NEMA 12 type, vibration isolated, dead front, 14 gauge steel panel with hinged front

opening doors for providing required access to all components. Provide removable top and

side panels for providing required access to cable entry and terminations. Provide the basic

model controller where available. The control panel shall be furnished with the following

fused AC and DC controls:

g. DC engine controls including the following: Run-stop-remote switch, remote-start-stop

terminals, oil pressure gauge, charge rate ammeter, and water temperature gauge.

h. Control cabinet front mounted status lamps shall indicate: Low engine temperature, high

coolant temperature, low oil pressure, overcrank, and overspeed. Manual reset capability


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 9

shall be provided.

i. AC output control to include: AC volt meter 3-1/2" diameter, meter switch phase

selector with off position, a voltage rheostat, a frequency meter 3-1/2" diameter, and hour

meter, and a 3-1/2" diameter AC ammeter with phase selector switch.

j. Dry contacts for remote alarms wired to terminal strips.

k. Automatic starting controls.

l. Panel illumination lights and switch.

m. Generator "Running" and “Fail”, double-throw, Form C relay contacts with normally

closed contacts for connection to SCADA System.

6. Battery Charger/Batteries:

a. Provide a current limiting, 10-ampere battery charger to automatically recharge batteries. The

DC voltage shall have an adjustable "float" setting under load from 2.15-2.35 volts per cell

and an adjustable "equalize" setting under load from 2.30-2.40 volt per cell. It shall include

overload protection, silicone diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressors, DC ammeter

and voltmeter, AC overcurrent protection, and 0-24 hour equalize timer. The battery charger

shall be suitable for 120-volt AC input. The battery charger shall be LaMarche Model A-46,

or equal.

b. Provide a set of rack mounted 12-volt (less than 400KW) or 24-volt (400KW and greater)

lead calcium storage battery(s) of the heavy-duty diesel starting type for the engine generator

set. The battery set shall be of sufficient capacity to provide for one and on half minutes of

total cranking time without recharging and be sized for the cold cranking amps as

recommended by the engine manufacturer. The battery(s) shall be rated no less than 172

ampere-hours. Provide all necessary cables and clamps.

c. Batteries shall be mounted in fiberglass (FRP) or HFPE, marine type battery boxes. Batteries

shall be located adjacent to base frame on the floor, so that batteries are readily accessible for

service and/or removal.

7. Engine Generator Set Base Construction:

a. The engine and generator shall be mounted in perfect alignment on an all welded

preformed structural steel I-beam or C channel skid type sub-base which shall provide for

attachment of all specified engine and generator accessories. Anchorage shall be accordance

with generator manufacturer’s requirements.

8. Fuel System

a. The engine generator set shall be supplied with transfer and ejector fuel pumps. Diesel fuel

supplied from an above grade fuel storage tank with solenoid valves, supply and return piping,

and all necessary accessories. All work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of

NFPA 30, 31, and 110; Code of Maryland 08.05.04; and all local regulations.

b. Refer to Division 15 specifications for diesel fuel grade and above grade fuel tank system.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 10

10. Painting

The complete generator set shall be painted with the manufacturer's standard prime and finish

paint system. Observed nicks, damage, rust, etc. to the paint system of the installed generator set

shall be prepared, primed and finish coated in the field prior to conditional acceptance.

11. All fasteners, bolts and nuts shall be type-316 stainless steel.

12. The contractor shall coordinate installation of Battery charger and fuel-oil monitor (FOM) system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator

performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of

connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install packaged engine generator on cast-in-place concrete equipment base. Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for packaged engine generators. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified

with concrete.

C. Install packaged engine-generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories,

for periodic maintenance.

D. Install packaged engine-generator on concrete base. Secure enclosure to anchor bolts installed in

concrete bases. Concrete base construction shall be in accordance with structural documents.

E. Install exhaust piping by welding and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping

shall be same diameter as muffler outlet.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 11

1. Install flexible connectors and piping materials according to requirements in Section 232400

“Internal Combustion Engine Piping.”

2. Insulate muffler/silencer and exhaust system components according to division 15

specifications"

3. Install isolating thimbles where exhaust piping penetrates combustible surfaces with a

minimum of 9 inches (225 mm) clearance from combustibles.

F. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection as shown on

Contract Drawings.

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified

to be factory mounted.

H. Secure generator to concrete pad with type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts as recommended by the

manufacturer.

I. Connect power and control conductors to generator as shown on the drawings and identified herein.

J. Install fuel tank, all associated fuel system devices, piping and electrical, in accordance with

these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Testing

1. Prototype tests performed on a generator set of the same size and type, required by these

specifications, shall be submitted and approved with the shop drawings, required above. The

test procedures and results shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. The tests shall

be performed in accordance with NFPA 110 and document the following:

a. Maximum power level.

b. Maximum motor capacity.

c. Voltage dip.

d. Fuel consumption.

e. Engine generator-cooling airflow.

f. Governor response time.

g. Alternator temperature rise per NEMA MG1-22.40.

h. Harmonic analysis and voltage wave form deviation per MIL-STD-705 B, Method 601.4.

g. Three (3)-phase short circuit test for mechanical and electrical strength.

2. Factory testing of the generator set to be supplied shall be conducted in accordance with

procedures certified by an independent testing laboratory and approved by the City responsible for

the operation of the specific installation. The manufacturer shall successfully load bank test the

generator set to be supplied, for items defined above, for a duration of 8 hours and submit the test


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 12

results for approval before shipping the generator set to the job site.

C. Field Testing and Start-up

1. Acceptance Testing: Acceptance testing of the installed generator set shall be conducted by factory

trained representative of the diesel generator manufacture. An authorized representative of City of

Frederick will witness the acceptance tests.

2. Prior to scheduling the acceptance testing, the following documentation shall be submitted and

approved as indicated:

a. Final O & M manuals shall be submitted,

b. Testing procedure shall be reviewed and approved by the City.

c. Manufacturer’s Installation Certificate

d. Certification of torsional vibration compatibility in accordance with 2013 NPFA 5.6.10.2, or

latest revision.

e. Letter of compliance from energy converter supplier in accordance with 2013 NPFA 5.6.10.5,

or latest revision.

3. Test Procedure: The test procedure followed will be approved by the City and will include data

taken during the prototype testing, as a minimum, and as in accordance with Section 16010.

a. The test procedure shall be submitted to and approved by the City before the equipment is

tested. Submitted procedure shall document detailed procedure and timeframe allowed for City review, so there are no delays in the project due to City review of the testing procedures.

b. The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, materials, fuel, etc. needed to demonstrate

the set is in compliance with the specification. Any deficiencies brought to the attention of the Contractor shall be corrected and, if warranted or requested by the City, the test shall be repeated.

4. Shutdown Demonstration: Prior to Acceptance Test, verify all automatic shutdown interlocks

provided by the generator controller are functional. The minimum are considered to be low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, over-speed, and voltage output, and any other protective features recommended by the manufacturer.

5. Alarm Demonstration: Prior to Acceptance Test, verify “Run” and “Generator Failure” SCADA

alarms. 6. On-site Installation Acceptance Test: Perform the on-site installation acceptance test in accordance

with 2013 NFPA 110 Section 7.13.4.1, or latest revision. Collect and record all data required for test documentation.

7. Field Load Test: Perform a minimum two-hour test with the field load from the water treatment

plant. Check power connections for overheating. Record transfer and cool down timing when returning to normal power.

8. Load Bank Test: Following a minimum five (5) minute cooling period, perform a 2-hour, full load test in accordance with 2013 NFPA 110.7.13.4.3, or latest revision.

a. Load tests shall use dry-type load banks specifically utilized for this purpose. Salt water brine tank load banks are not acceptable for this purpose, and shall not be utilized for load testing.

b. The load bank will be capable of definite and precise incremental loading and shall not be

dependent on the generator control instrumentation to read voltage and amperage of each phase. The test instrumentation will serve as a check of the generator set meters.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 13

9. Interface Demonstration: Demonstrate that the generator engine control microprocessor diagnostic interface will communication with a laptop computer utilizing the diagnostic software provided as part of this contract.

10. Noise Control Testing: Perform a sound measurement test in the field at the property line located closest to the generator while running at full load. Test shall be witnessed and approved by a City Representative. Testing may be done concurrent with the load bank testing.

11. Transfer Switch Operation and Alarms: Confirm during testing with a simulated power failure that

the transfer switch and related alarming function as required. Record delay time.

12. Fuel: The Contractor shall fill the tank with new No. 2 winter mix fuel oil and replace any fuel

used in testing.

a. Fuel and Oil Testing: Fuel and Oil supplied by Contractor shall be sampled and tested by a third party prior to final acceptance. Fuel shall be No. 2 diesel fuel conforming to requirements specified in ASTM D975. Testing shall be use Velcon VFT-0100 Water and Visual Clarity Test kit, or Equal.

b. Fuels found to contain excess water or debris shall be rejected and replaced at the expense of

the Contractor. Testing shall be repeated to demonstrate that oil and fuel are contaminant free.

13. Documentation: The following documentation shall be submitted within one (1) week of the field testing, where applicable:

a. All testing documentation from on-site testing b. b. Manufacturer’s certification of a rated load test at rated power factor with the ambient

temperature, altitude, and fuel grade recorded. Provide in accordance with 2013 NFPA 7.13.4.6 or latest revision.

14. Properly prepare and touch-up all painted surfaces which have been nicked, scratched, chipped, or

corroded during construction including piping, generator enclosure (if provided), and frame.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine-generator to allow service

and maintenance.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Connect fuel piping to engines as shown on Contract Drawings.

1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are

specified in division 15 specifications.

E. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

F. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Provide a minimum of one 90 degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the generator set

from a stationary element.


ENGINE GENERATORS

16414 - 14

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include

quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include

routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for

proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation

of original equipment.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.



TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 1

SECTION 16415 -TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes automatic and non-automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including

the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Engine Generators: 16414

2. Motor Control Centers: 16443


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum

clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material

lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. Operation and Maintenance Data shall include the following:


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 2

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and

emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of

notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s services at the jobsite for the minimum man-days listed below, travel

time excluded:

1. One-man day to check the installation, supervise start-up, and supervise testing and

adjustments of the transfer switches.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Transfer switch enclosure shall be rated NEMA 12 for interior locations, or as shown on the

drawings. Transfer switch shall have number of poles, amperage, and voltage ratings as shown

on the drawings. Withstand current rating shall not be less than 50,000 ampere rms symmetrical.


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 3

B. Switch shall be listed per UL 1008 as a recognized component for emergency systems and rated

for all classes of loads. Transfer switch shall be capable of switching non- linear loads, such as

VFD’s, as required for this application.

C. Transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held in each direction by a single

operating mechanism momentarily energized from the source to which the load shall be transferred.

Accomplish mechanical locking in each direction without the aid of latching solenoids, toggle

mechanisms, or gear arrangements. Total operating transfer time shall not exceed one-sixth of a

second.

D. Operation shall be inherently double throw where normal and emergency contacts operate

simultaneously with no momentary delay in a mid-position. An overload or short circuit shall

not cause the switch to go to a neutral position. Electrical spacings must not be less than those

listed in Table 15.1 of UL 1008. Do not use main contact structures not originally manufactured

for transfer switch service (molded case circuit breakers or contactors). Inspection and

replacement of all contacts (stationary and arcing) shall be possible from the front of the switch

without any disassembly of operating linkages or power conductors. Provide a handle to permit

no-load manual operation.

E. Transfer switches shall be 3 poles with solid neutral connection.

F. Accessories shall include:

a. Solid-state sensing and control logic panel. Include the following operational

characteristics:

1. Adjustable (.5 to 6.0 seconds) time delay on engine starting to override momentary

dips in normal source, set at 1 second.

2. Full phase voltage relay supervision of the normal source with at least one close

differential relay to detect “brownout” condition, set at 70% dropout and 90% pickup.

3. Voltage/frequency lockout relay to prevent premature transfer, set at 90% voltage and

90% frequency.

4. Engine starting control contacts (one normally open and one normally closed).

5. Adjustable (2 to 25 minutes) time delay on retransfer to normal, set at 20 minutes.

6. Unloaded running time delay for generator cool down (adjustable .1 to 10 minutes), set at

5 minutes.

7. Transfer to emergency time delay (adjustable 1 to 300 seconds), set at 1 second.

8. Provide a system test switch (momentary type) on the front of the enclosure.

9. Provide a manual pushbutton to bypass the time delay on retransfer.

10. Provide pilot lights to indicate source to which the load is connected.

11. Provide pilot light to indicate presence of normal power source.

G. An in-phase monitor shall control transfer/retransfer operation between live sources when the

sources are approaching and are sufficiently close to a zero-phase angle difference so as to avoid

excessive motor inrush currents. The monitor shall cause in- phase transfer/retransfer to take


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 4

place over engine/generator frequency ranges of 58 - 62 Hz with a utility source of 60 Hz.

Normal transfer/retransfer operation shall automatically occur, without the use of manual

overrides, in the event of a complete failure of the load-carrying source.

H. Transfer switch shall include four pilot contacts (10 amperes at 480-volt a-c) that open three

seconds (nominal) prior to transfer and re-close three seconds (nominal) after transfer. These

contacts will de-energize motor loads during the transfer time of the switch.

I. Provide a programmable weekly engine exercise set for Wednesday at 9:00A.

J. Provide dry contacts for remote monitoring of signals for ATS as shown on drawings. Provide

interface between generator and ATS as required for interface of monitoring signals to the SCADA

system.

K. Manufacturers: the automatic transfer switch shall be by ASCO (3000 series) but shall be provided

by generator manufacturer to ensure coordination and single point responsibility.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting of Switches:

1. Install automatic transfer switch in motor control center compartment.

2. Connect RTU monitoring conductors from new automatic transfer switch to the Pump

Control Panel for monitoring switch positions. Provide dry contact closures for primary

source active and secondary source active positions.

3. Provide and install phase monitors, as specified in Section 17000 “Instrumentation”, for

monitoring power.

B. Identify components according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator

sets, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by

manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate

required wiring.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 16130 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 5

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

F. Route and brace conductors according to manufacturer's written instructions and Section 16073

"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Do not obscure manufacturer's markings and

labels.

G. Final connections to equipment shall be made with liquidtight, flexible metallic conduit no more

than 18 inches (457 mm) in length.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


C. Preliminary Inspection/Test

1. Field test and calibrate timing and monitoring logic. All adjustments shall be within 5% of

the previously specified set points.

2. Field test and calibrate the in-phase monitor.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. After installing equipment, test for compliance with requirements according to NETA ATS.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances.

d. Verify that the unit is clean.

e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and

sliding surfaces.

f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible.

g. Verify tightness of all control connections.

h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following

methods, or both:

1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 6

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data.

i. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources.

j. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters.

k. Inspect control power transformers.

1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of

connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.

2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match

Drawings.

3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts, grounding

contacts, and interlocks.

3. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.

b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare measured values with manufacturer's

acceptable values.

c. Verify settings and operation of control devices.

d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers.

e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation.

f. Perform automatic transfer tests.

g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:

1) Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays.

2) Engine start sequence.

3) Time delay on transfer.

4) Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays.

5) Automatic transfer operation.

6) Interlocks and limit switch function.

7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration.

8) Engine cool-down and shutdown feature.

4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and

procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum

resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features.

5. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer switches stated in

NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each

switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and

retransfer from emergency source with normal source available.


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 7

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.

e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other

poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time

delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down

and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power

delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

7. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

8. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each

tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

9. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

11. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and

connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and

that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action

taken, and observations after remedial action.

3. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch

11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment.

B. Training shall include testing ground-fault protective devices and instructions to determine when

the ground-fault system shall be retested. Include instructions on where ground-fault sensors are

located and how to avoid negating the ground-fault protection scheme during testing and circuit

modifications.


TRANSFER SWITCHES

16415 - 8

C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



PANELBOARDS

16442 - 1

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes appliance branch-circuit panelboards.



B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.


PANELBOARDS

16442 - 2

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit: BAB or QBH series

2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc: BL or BQD series

3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric: QOB series

4. Or equal as approved by the Professional

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to

meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:


PANELBOARDS

16442 - 3

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to

NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

E. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space

designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor

space or below slab not on grade.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs.

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Using Agency's final

room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create

directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification.

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a

nameplate complying with requirements for identification.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:


PANELBOARDS

16442 - 4

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.



MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

16443 - 1

SECTION 16443 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less, with combination

controllers and having the following factory-installed components:

1. Circuit Breakers

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCC: Motor-control center.

C. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

D. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. PID: Control action; proportional plus integral plus derivative.

G. PT: Potential transformer

H. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.




and profiles, and finishes for MCCs.


specialties and accessories for each cell of the MCC.

B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In

addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and



16443 - 2

sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including

required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the

following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Factory-installed devices.

c. Enclosure types and details.

d. Nameplate legends.

e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure

and each unit.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller

and feeder device, and installed devices.

g. Specified optional features and accessories.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for

each installed controller.

3. Nameplate legends.

4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities.

5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit.


A. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845.

B. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required

working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are

prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent

structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on

each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for MCCs, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

F. Product Certificates: For each MCC.

G. Source quality-control reports.



16443 - 3

H. Warranty Period.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

2. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements

specified in UL 845, include field modifications incorporated during construction by

manufacturer, Contractor, or both.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

and marked for intended use.

D. UL Compliance: MCCs shall comply with UL 845 and shall be listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency.


A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery

paths.

B. Handle MCCs according to the following:

1. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control

Centers."

2. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts."

C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing

and flammable materials from inside MCC.



16443 - 4

1.9 WARRANTY


replace MCC AND SPD that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Square D Model 6 Intelligent MCC; a brand of Schneider Electric


A. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate and label MCCs to comply with NEMA ICS 18.

B. Ambient Environment Ratings:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and not exceeding

104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a

24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and

not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C)

3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC

includes solid-state devices.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by



A. Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any

parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified[ and the system will be fully

operational after the seismic event]."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

3. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

4. Component Response Modification Factor: 6.0.

B. Capacities and Characteristics:



16443 - 5

1. MCC Enclosure and Assembly:

a. Nominal System Voltage: 277/480-V ac.

b. Service Equipment Rated: Yes.

c. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Integrated Short-Circuit Rating for MCC:

a. Combination series rated; 42 kA.

b. Fully rated; 42 kA.

3. Integrated Short-Circuit Rating for Each Unit:

a. Combination series rated; 42 kA.

b. Fully rated; 42 kA.

4. Wiring Class: A.

5. Bus:

a. Horizontal Bus: 42 kA.

b. Neutral Bus: 150 percent.

6. Main Disconnect Device:

a. Main Disconnect: MCCB, UL 489, three pole, Manually operated, electrically

tripped.

2.4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 12

unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

2.5 ASSEMBLY

A. Structure:

1. Comply with UL requirements for service entrance equipment.

2. Units up to and including Size 3 shall have drawout mountings with connectors that

automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into

their normal, energized positions.

3. Units in Type B and Type C MCCs shall have pull-apart terminal strips for external

control connections.

4. Pull Boxes:

a. Include provisions for ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same

limits as the MCC.

b. Set the box back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism.

c. Covers: Removable covers forming top, front, and sides.



16443 - 6

d. Insulated bottom of fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

MCC.

e. Cable Supports: Arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables,

including supports for future cables.

f. When equipped with barriers, supply with access to check bus bolt tightness.

B. Compartments: Modular; individual [lift-off ]doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive

screw fasteners.

1. Interlock compartment door to require that the disconnecting means is "off" before door

can be opened or closed, except by operating a concealed release device.

2. Compartment construction shall allow for removal of units without opening adjacent

doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in

MCC.

3. The same-size compartments shall be interchangeable to allow rearrangement of units,

such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or

welding.

C. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Included and aligned with the structure of the

MCC.

D. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening

adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in

MCC; same-size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units,

such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or

welding.

E. Wiring Spaces:

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment;

supports to hold wiring in place.

2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring

between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.

F. Provisions for Future:

1. Compartments marked "future" shall be bused, wired and equipped with guide rails or

equivalent, and ready for insertion of drawout units.

2. Compartments marked "spare" shall include provisions for connection to the vertical bus.

G. Integrated Short-Circuit Rating:

1. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated]; 42 kA.

2. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 42

kA.

H. Bus:



16443 - 7

1. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of

MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extension from both ends.

2. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height

of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.

3. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum

conductivity or silver-plated alloy, with compression connectors for outgoing conductors.

4. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure

connector for ground conductors, minimum size 1/4-by-2 inches (6 by 50 mm). Equip

with compression connectors for outgoing conductors.

5. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus,

arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.

6. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus

bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Insulation temperature rating shall not

be less than 105 deg C.

2.6 MAIN DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE(S)

A. MCCB (to 2500 A): Fixed mounted, manually operated air-circuit breaker. Comply with

UL 489.

1. MCCB shall have quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is

mechanically trip-free, its position shall be shown by the position of the handle, and

manual push-to-trip push button.

2. Solid-state monitoring and tripping system to show system status monitoring, adjustable

time-current protection, and shunt trip.

a. Interchangeable current sensors and timing circuits for adjustable time-current

protection settings and status signals.

b. Trip-setting dials or interchangeable plugs to establish the continuous trip of the

circuit breaker. Plugs shall not be interchangeable between frames, and the breaker

may not be closed without the plug. With neutral ground-fault sensor.

c. Time-current adjustments to achieve protective-device coordination as follows:

1) Adjustable long-time delay.

2) Adjustable short-time setting and delay to shape the time-current curve.

3) Adjustable instantaneous setting.

4) Individually adjustable ground-fault setting and time delay.

d. Built-in connector to test the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground-fault

functions of the breaker. Provide one test set for testing the installed circuit

breakers 225-A frame and higher.

e. Built-in digital ammeter display, showing load current and tripping cause.

3.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-

wire systems and with the following features:

1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated

to 600 V.



16443 - 8

3. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum

accuracy tolerances:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

d. Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent.

e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent.

f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.

g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

5 to 60 minutes.

j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument

compartment door.

C. MCC Testing: Test and inspect MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18.

D. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. NEMA Industrial Control and Systems Standards: Comply with parts of NEMA ICS 2.3 for

installation and startup of MCCs.

B. Floor Mounting: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal-thickness concrete base. Comply

with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete

base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.



16443 - 9

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for

identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components.

2. Install required warning signs.

3. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate.

4. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

5. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring

identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions

with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs.

1.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes

for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative].

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.




16443 - 10

E. Tests and Inspections:



2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

4. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed

controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable

scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Submit

calibration record for device.

5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

6. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during

construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

F. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to NETA Acceptance Testing

Specification and manufacturer's written instructions.



LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 16461 - 1

SECTION 16461 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to

1500 kVA.




and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment.



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For transformers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.







B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



C. Source quality-control reports.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.



A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control

of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as

verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper.



F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin

encapsulated.

G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints

that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are

easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound utilizing

a vacuum pressure impregnation process to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

3. Finish Color: Gray.

D. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation

system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

E. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system

with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

F. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561

requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by

designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion

corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

3. Unit shall meet requirements of NEMA TP 1 when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with

a K-factor equal to one.

G. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.

H. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor rated transformers.

I. Wall Brackets: Wall brackets fabricated from design drawings signed and sealed by a licensed

structural engineer.



2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in

Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap

connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.

4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.

5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage

connections.

6. Applied and induced tensile tests.

7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.

8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.

b. Low-voltage to ground.

c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at

location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers

for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated from design

drawings signed and sealed by a licensed structural engineer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual

transformer provided.

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.

Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor

floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions applicable to

Project, and requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce

noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate

sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.


and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.



C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.




D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS

for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test

parameters.

E. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of

transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at

11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning

observations after remedial action.

G. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than

nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap

settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus

or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



CONTACTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT 16484 - 1

SECTION 16484 – CONTACTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Manual starters

B. Magnetic starters

C. Reduced voltage starters

D. Combination magnetic starters

E. Magnetic contactors

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16051 – Common Work Results for Electrical

B. Section 16060 – Ground and Bonding for Electrical Systems

C. Section 16073 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

D. Section 16075 – Identification for Electrical Systems

E. Section 16120 – Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

F. Section 16443 – Motor Control Centers

G. Section 17010 – Control System Integrator

1.3 REFERENCES

A. UL or other third party Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listing is required

for all factory-fabricated assemblies. Individual component listing is also required.

B. Size equipment per NEMA and UL standards to match motor or equipment controlled.

C. The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated

herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references

thereto. The issue in effect at time of construction shall be applicable. In text, such

specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only.

1. National Electric Code (NEC)

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - UL-508

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)



a. NEMA-1C-1

b. NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

5. J.I.C. Standards for Industrial Control

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 16051

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all starters and contactors. The submittal shall contain all

the information needed to prove conformance with these specifications.

C. Submit elementary and block diagrams for systems of relays and/or contactors.

D. Samples shall be submitted as may be requested by the Engineer.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years of experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other third party

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) acceptable to the Authority Having

Jurisdiction (AHJ) as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Manufacturers

1. Schneider Electric (Square D)

B. All equipment furnished shall be of one approved manufacturer where possible. Motor starters

for installation in motor control centers shall be manufactured by the MCC manufacturer.



C. For control panels with motors less than 1/2 HP, starters may be IEC rated motor protective

switches. All other starters shall be NEMA rated starters.

D. Construction

1. Parts easily removable when subject to wear, arcing damage, or electrical failure.

2. Enclosures - Cold rolled, formed seam-welded steel or cast aluminum with suitable

legend plates and NEMA enclosures.

3. Auxiliary Contacts - Rated as required by interlocking and/or automatic control systems

as indicated in these Specifications and/or on the Contract Drawings. Minimum 2 NO and

2 NC auxiliary contacts required.

2.2 MANUAL STARTERS

A. General

1. Contact Mechanism - Quick make, quick break toggle action.

2. Contactors - Silver alloy.

3. Enclosures - Adequately sized to contain the starter and all accessories and/or

modification. NEMA classification to meet requirements of drawings.

4. Overload Protection - Thermal overloads in each phase leg or one for each motor

winding. Use Type A for fractional horsepower and Type B for integral horsepower

applications.

B. Fractional HP Type

1. Two-pole (unless shown or specified otherwise).

2. Toggle operated (unless shown or specified otherwise).

3. Full voltage.

4. Shall be non-reversing, reversing or two-speed as shown or specified.

5. Type A thermal overload device for each phase or motor winding.

6. Lock-off provisions and neon pilot light(s).

7. Selector switch as required, labeled for function performed.

C. Integral HP Type

1. Two- or three-pole polyphaser as indicated.

2. Full voltage.

3. Shall be non-reversing, reversing or two-speed as shown or specified.

4. Type B thermal overload device for each phase.

5. Pushbutton operated with handle guard and lock-off.

6. Neon pilot light(s).

7. Auxiliary contacts as required.

8. Low voltage protection to trip unit on power outage when shown or specified.

D. Manufacturers

1. Square D



2.3 MAGNETIC STARTERS

A. General

1. Size per NEMA and UL standard to match motor controlled. Exceptions: NEMA Size 1

minimum (except NEMA Size 0 may be used for ventilation equipment 2 HP and less

and in a separate H&V control panel) or as shown otherwise.

2. Starter coil voltage shall be 120 VAC unless noted otherwise.

3. Provide auxiliary contacts as required.

4. Provide with melting allow thermal overloads for 1-phase HP motors.

5. For all 3-phase, non-reversing motors, 1 HP and larger, powered from Motor Control

Centers, provide Solid State Overload Relay (SSOL) for motor monitoring, control, and

protection. Provide accessories as shown or as required. Unit shall be configured for

Ethernet Modbus TCP protocol communications with the plant SCADA system without

the use of external gateways or additional software drivers. Unit shall be Schneider

Electric TeSys T, Model LTM-R or equal. Also provide a human machine interface

(Schneider Electric LTM CU or equal) cable connected. Unit to be mounted thru the

door.

2.4 REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTERS

A. Reduced Voltage Soft Starters

1. Microcomputer based solid state for use with three phase induction motors.

2. Amply sized for the connected motor horsepower at the full rated motor voltage.

3. Ethernet Communications - Starter shall be capable of communicating with and being

controlled by a PLC via Ethernet Modbus TCP communications. All starter parameters

shall be accessible and adjustable via Ethernet. Ethernet communications to the PLC shall

be direct without the use of external gateways or additional software drivers. Coordinate

communication requirements with PLC to be supplied under Section 17000,

Instrumentation.

4. Included in the motor control center lineups as shown and scheduled and include all of

the required modifications as listed herein and as shown on the Drawings.

5. Features

a. Adjustable motor starting current limitations from 150 percent to 425 percent of

motor full load current.

b. Linear voltage ramp up during acceleration adjustable from 3 to 30 seconds and

decreasing motor voltage linearly from 50 percent to 0 percent adjustable from 3 to

30 seconds for a soft stop.

c. Solid state overload relay.

d. SCR firing sequence and phase angle controls.

e. Logic voltage and starting condition controls.

f. Voltage monitor controls to monitor phase unbalance, phase reversal and

underload for protection of the starter.

g. Rack mounted all features plug-in modules, each with applicable LED diagnostic

indicating lights.

h. Shorted SCR Switch - Which on a short will open the unit circuit breaker via shunt

trip feature.



i. Bypass Contactor (BC) – Which shall bypass the SSRV once the motor is up to

speed.

j. Isolation Contactor - A second contactor on the line side of the motor contactor,

isolation contactor open when starter power is interrupted.

k. Programmable automatic restart upon the return of power following a power

outage or flicker.

l. Automatic restart after fault, minimum three attempts and shutdown with manual

reset.

6. Contacts for remote alarm/indications as shown on the Drawings and for a common fault

of any shutdowns of starter.

7. Spare parts.

8. Provide two spare flush mounted keypads with interconnection cables.

9. Unit shall be Altistart as manufactured by Schneider Electric or equal.

2.5 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS

A. General

1. Power and lighting contactors of the voltage, current rating, and number of poles as

indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. Continuously rated for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistive and motor

loads.

3. Totally enclosed, double break, silver-cadmium-oxide power type.

4. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable.

5. Auxiliary contacts and control circuit fusing as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

6. Industrial duty rated for 600-volt operation.

B. Electrically-Held Contactor Coils - continuously rated and encapsulated.

C. Mechanically-Held Contactors - Coil-clearing contacts supplied so that the contactor coil shall

be energized only during the instance of operation. Both the latching and unlatching coils shall

be encapsulated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install according to the requirements of the National Electric Code and as shown or noted on the

Contact Documents.

B. Mount all contactors in an enclosure as individual units or in a control panel as part of a control

system.

C. Provide nameplates and tagging in accordance with Section 16075.



3.2 INDIVIDUAL RELAY OR CONTACTOR ENCLOSURES

A. Wall mount unless noted or shown otherwise.

B. Mounting Height - Approximately 60 inches to enclosure top from finished floor.

C. NEMA enclosure for area of mounting

3.3 ENCLOSED STARTER MOUNTING

A. Methods and Material - Per Section 16073 and manufacturer’s requirements.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.


and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.






LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

16511 - 1

SECTION 16511 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:

1. Surface mount, linear.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.

5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



16511 - 2

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining

luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation

and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.



16511 - 3


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels

where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles

when lamps are in place.

2.2 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR

A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 277 V ac.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch (3.175-mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Housings:

1. Painted finish.

2. With integral mounting provisions.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are

designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch (3.175-mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.



16511 - 4

E. Standards:

1. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Steel:

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A 568/A 568M for sheet steel.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade.

D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M.

E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209.

2.4 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining

components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. Use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently

complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting.



16511 - 5

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning.

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.




16511 - 6



LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

16521 - 1

SECTION 16521 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp

technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products.



16521 - 2

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining

luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

5. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture indicated with factory-applied

finish.

D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For luminaire supports.

1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports and seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Luminaires.

2. Structural members to which luminaires will be attached.

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.







D. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire.

2. Photoelectric relay.

E. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer.



16521 - 3

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and photoelectric relays to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products and complying with applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

prior to shipping.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with

luminaire installation.

B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by engineer prior to the start of luminaire

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.



16521 - 4

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

E. CRI of minimum 80. CCT rating as indicated on drawing documents.

F. Internal driver.

G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 277 V ac.

H. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

J. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

2.2 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

2.3 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Area and Site:

a. As noted on drawing documents.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.



16521 - 5

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum or Epoxy-coated steel material. Form

and support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in

use.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be

located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal

viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support

materials.

C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and

designating finishes.



16521 - 6

D. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual

for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating

finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish

surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated

steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of

primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the owner, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install

new lamps.



B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application

and approved by manufacturer.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.



16521 - 7

E. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls. Attached to a minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm)

backing plate attached to wall structural members.

G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

Install luminaires at height indicated on Drawings.

I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 16120 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring

connections and wiring methods.

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:



2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards.



16521 - 8



D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.



INSTRUMENTATION 17000 - 1

SECTION 17000 - INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section includes the general work description and requirements for instrumentation provided by this contract.

1.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. It is a requirement of this specification that all Division 17 specifications be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the entire system performance and compatibility of this section, as well as all other Division 17 specifications.

1.3. RELATED SECTIONS

The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:

A. Division 1

B. All Division 17 specifications.

1.4. REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.

B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.

C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. NFPA 79 – NEC (Labeling).

F. ISA - Standards 5.1 and 5.4.

G. IEC 1131-3 – Programming Standards.

1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. All Division 17 specifications shall be submitted in one shop drawing. Requirements of individual specification sections shall be contained within a single section in the shop drawing submittal. Indicate individual specification sections with a protruding tab. Submit material in the format and order as described in paragraph 1.05.B.3.

B. Shop Drawing Submittal Format



1. Shop drawings shall be in a rigid three-ring binder. If necessary, provide multiple binders.

2. Provide title page on the front and sides of the binder. Title page shall include job name, KCI job number, Contractor(s) job number(s), date, “Division 17 Shop Drawing”, Contractor and supplier(s) names, addresses, contact persons, and contact numbers.

3. Contents shall be organized accordingly.

a. Table of Contents – List of each section. Provide protruding tabs labeled with the pertinent heading for each section listed in the Table of Contents.

b. For each Division 17 specification section, provide the following within the respective sections:

1) Table of Conformance.

2) Training itinerary.

3) Bill of Materials (BOM) for installed equipment, BOM for spare parts, and BOM for extra materials. Each BOM shall be grouped and identified separately.

4) Equipment information satisfying specifications. Provide protruding tabs for each piece of equipment. Label each tab with the equipment manufacturer.

c. AutoCAD Drawings – Include title block, border, page numbers, and supplier job number. CD containing all Division 17 AutoCAD 2013, or higher, *.dwg files. Sheet/drawing titles shall utilize three lines in the title block and are subject to approval, and instructed change, by the Engineer.

4. AutoCAD drawings shall be 11-inch by 17-inch.

C. Shop Drawing Submittal Contents - The following requirements pertain to all of Division 17 specifications and are intended to complement the requirements of Section 01640, Equipment - General. Refer to individual Division 17 specifications for further requirements.

1. Training Itinerary – Detailed itinerary for the training to be provided in Microsoft Word 2013 table format. Itemize the day of training (“Day 1,” “Day 2,” or “Hour 1,” “Hour 2,” etc.) and the lessons to be taught during that period. Further discuss the equipment to be used during training and the proposed location of training for that day. Account for all days of specified training. Provide one training itinerary sheet for each training period. At the top of each sheet provide a header description of the training session and duration of training to be provided.



2. Detailed Bill of Materials in Microsoft Word 2013 table format, or Excel 2013, identifying component name, manufacturer, model number, and quantity supplied. Typical Bills of Materials are not acceptable.

3. Descriptive lists of spare parts and extra materials provided in the same tabular format as the Bill of Materials. Lists shall be exclusive to the spare parts and extra materials requested by the specification section, hence separate from the Bill of Materials for installed equipment. Lists shall be intuitive and specifically created for this project.

4. For individual equipment, submit information satisfying every item discussed in Part II of that specification section. Additionally, submit on all supporting accessories including, but not limited to, terminal blocks, surge and lightning suppression, UPSs, fuses, and cabling.

5. AutoCAD 2016 or Higher Drawings - Provide loop and block diagrams. Symbols used and nomenclature shall be in accordance to ISA Standard 5.4. Diagrams shall be specific to the equipment submitted with the options and features specified or otherwise provided. The inclusion of options not specified or provided is unacceptable. Terminal points depicted shall be the terminal points provided with identical terminal point designations as the supplied equipment. Illustrate all available terminals that are not utilized.

6. Proposed nameplate wording. Scaled illustrations for each nameplate provided.

7. Manufacturer’s literature and Web site printouts are independent of the above requests for information and, hence do not satisfy the above shop drawing requirements. All catalog cuts, Web site printouts, manufacturer’s specifications, and drawings shall be clearly marked to allow identification of the specific products used. Cross-out all options and functions not supplied with the equipment.

8. Electrical power requirements, connection requirements, interconnecting cabling, and environmental limitations/restrictions.

9. Dimensions and weights of the equipment with the specified options.

1.6. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. The following requirements pertain to all of Division 17 specifications and are intended to complement the requirements of Section 01640, Equipment – General, as well as individual Division 17 specifications.

B. Submit under provisions of Division 1.

C. Provide complete sets of hard-covered three-ring bound loose leaf Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. In addition to “As-Built” system drawings, the manuals shall include internal wiring diagrams and operating and maintenance literature for all components provided under Division 17. Binders shall not be larger than 3-inch.



D. Contractor shall create the following documents specifically for this project and submit in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1. Operation Description - In Microsoft Word 2013 discuss the operational procedure of the equipment as supplied per the specification section. Examples of operational procedures may include “normal operation” and “automated operation”. Automated operation may be broken down for some equipment/systems to include “flow paced control”, “analyzer based control”, “storage tank level based control”, “timed control”, “tank level control”, etc. For systems that are supplied, identify where flows are coming from, pumped to, valves that may operate, and adjoining systems.

2. Troubleshooting – In Microsoft Word 2013 table format utilize columns entitled “Problem”, “Possible Causes”, and “Corrective Action”. Under the “Problem” column, identify possible errors that may occur with the equipment including, but not limited to, alarm LEDs, panel alarm lights, digital display error messages, and all other visually or audibly operational problems. Under the “Possible Causes” column, identify the manufacturer suggested causes that may be the root of each “Problem”. Under the “Corrective Action” column, provide direction to verify and rectify/repair the “Problem”. Problems, possible causes, and corrective actions shall be in complete sentences and shall not reference manufacturer literature for their diagnosis or corrective action.

3. Preventative Maintenance – Provide “Daily”, “Weekly”, “Monthly”, and “Annually” headers in a Microsoft Word 2013 bulleted, or numbered, format. Under each header indicate visual inspections, procedural inspections, calibration routines, and all other

E. Submitted literature shall be in sufficient detail to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, programming and configuration, adjustment, calibration, testing, and maintenance of each component and/or instrument. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.

F. In a separate binder, include the configuration settings for each instrument provided in Division 17. Provide a Table of Contents with protruding tabs for each instrument. Label each protruding tab with the equipment name and equipment designation. Indicate the value of all configuration parameters and setpoints, including those that are not utilized in the equipment’s field configuration.

G. Contractor shall review all submitted literature and cross out all options, functions, warranties, etc. not part of the supplied equipment.

H. All information contained within the hard copy of the O&M manual shall also be submitted in electronic form on CD. Including, but not limited to, manufacturer information, drawings, and letters.

1.7. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The following requirements pertain to all of Division 17 specifications and are intended to



complement the requirements of Division 1, as well as individual Division 17 specifications.

B. Submit under provisions of Division 1.

C. Record actual locations of controller cabinets and input and output devices connected to system. Include interconnection wiring and cabling information, and terminal block layouts in controller cabinets.

1.8. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Divisions 1, 16, and 17.

B. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.

C. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.

1.9. COORDINATION

A. Refer to Contract Drawings for designations and verify with Owner.

B. Coordinate demonstration to Owner with the Contractor and the Owner.

1.10. TRAINING

A. Contractor shall video-record all training sessions. Provide a video recording of each training session on a single DVD. Provide two duplicate DVDs for each training session and distribute one copy to the Owner and one to the Engineer. Provide computer-generated adhesive labels on each DVD. Label each DVD with the training session description, date training occurred, attendees, trainer, contact information, the equipment covered during the training session, and the project title.

B. Engineer will review their copy for video quality including, but not limited to, picture quality, use of camera angles, and sound recording quality. Video must be clearly audible. If the Engineer deems the video or audio quality as poor, the Contractor shall conduct the training session again (with original attendees present) and re-record the session at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Provide a DVD case to hold all training DVD’s provided for Division 17 specifications.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. ACCESSORIES

A. Nameplates

1. Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for each instrument in Division 17.

2. Nameplates shall have 5/16-inch high capital, white letters on black background machine engraved. Hang nameplates from process-mounted instruments via metallic chains. Nameplates shall be hung within 12 inches of the equipment.

3. Final wording on nameplate shall be submitted during the shop drawing phase and approved by the Engineer.

4. Nameplates shall be uniformly mounted and of identical form-factor for all equipment that nameplates are provided. Once a nameplate format has been selected, the format shall be utilized for all equipment throughout, thereby excluding providing original equipment manufacturer (OEM) nameplates.

5. Where wire labeling is not conducive to nameplate tagging as specified above, such as in MCC compartments or inside the programmable logic controller (PLC) enclosure, provide wire labeling on provide wire labeling on a machine-printed polyolefin, wire marker sleeves, and utilize black text on a white background. Each label shall be a single shrink wrap sleeve. Printing that is capable of being rubbed off the wire label is not acceptable. All conductors, including spares, shall be labeled. Contractor shall have a portable label maker, in the field, at all times.

6. Text on nameplates shall be as follows.

a. First Line – Equipment name. Equipment name shall as listed on the Contract Drawings.

b. Second Line – Equipment designation. Designation shall be in accordance with ISA Standards 5.1 and 5.4 as shown on the Contract Drawings.

c. Third Line – Wiring destination. Indicate the destination of the wiring (i.e. PLC-1, PLC-2, MCC-1, etc.).

B. Lightning and Surge Protection (TVSS)

1. Provide lightning and surge protection on the power supply of each instrument provided under Division 17.

2. Provide lightning and surge protection on all analog input and output signal circuits that pass out of doors or are terminated to metallic piping that passes out of doors.

3. TVSS devices mounted on the analog output signal wiring of field-mounted



transmitters shall be conduit-mounted utilizing a common chamber, three element, gas tube and clamp incoming transients to a level acceptable to the transmitter it is protecting. Manufacturer shall be Joslyn, Model 1669-01, or equal.

4. TVSS devices protecting analog circuits entering the PLC enclosure shall be din-rail mounted with removable terminal blocks on each side of the device with no interruption of the incoming signal by unplugging the TVSS device. Device shall possess the capability of discharging 1000 Amps evaluated on an 8x20-microsecond waveform. Device shall have an LED to indicate the unit is functioning properly. TVSS device shall be manufactured by M-System Co, Model MDP-24-1, or equal.

C. Wiring/Conduit/Mounting

1. The Contractor shall provide all power wiring and conduit to each instrument specified in Division 17.

2. The Contractor shall provide all signal wiring and conduit from the PLC to new and existing equipment as specified and shown within Contract Documents.

3. The Contractor shall provide all other wiring integral to supplied equipment to achieve the specified system performance as discussed individual Division 17 sections.

4. The Contractor shall mount all equipment specified in Division 17 in locations discussed/shown in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. All mounted equipment shall have sufficient clearance from other provided or existing obstructions (including walls, pipes, conduit, or other instruments) to facilitate removal, adjustment, inspection, and calibration of the installed device. Any device that is mounted without sufficient clearance to perform these functions with standard, manufacturer recommended tools shall be removed and remounted at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Rotate equipment heads as directed by the Engineer in the punch list for final completion.


STORMWATER PUMPING STATION #3 JUNE 2006

CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATOR 17010 - 1

SECTION 17010 - CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section specifies the requirements of the Control Systems Integrator (CSI). The Contractor is required to subcontract a CSI with qualifications and a scope of work as specified herein.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK

A. The CSI shall provide testing and startup services to assist the Contractor with commissioning of the process control system and related instrumentation.

B. PLC and supervisory programming.

C. Termination and labeling of conductors as specified herein

D. Division 17 - Complete responsibility for the provision of all Division 17 requirements, including equipment and services, as specified in the respective specification.

E. Modify other control panels, termination and marshaling panels, customized instrumentation mounting brackets, outdoor instrumentation housing enclosures.

F. Provide manufacturer’s configuration and startup services for digital power monitors and related components.

G. Existing Conditions - Modify existing control circuits and control panels as required by the Contract Documents.

H. Supply quantities of CSI field technician personnel as specified herein for the duration necessary for system installation, startup and commissioning of the new systems and upgrades of existing systems.

I. Provide manufacturer’s services for installation, configuration and testing of equipment where specified. Manufacturer’s representatives who are not under direct employment of the equipment manufacturer are permitted only where specified in the Contract Documents.

J. Take ownership of all equipment being furnished through the CSI. Coordinate efforts associated with manufacturer’s technicians and representatives for services required during installation, configuration, calibration, startup and troubleshooting of equipment. Coordination shall occur in a timely fashion as to not delay the project schedule.

K. Fabrication, configuration, testing, startup and implementation of the Process Control System (PCS), control panels, instrumentation and electrical equipment as specified herein and required to construct a highly available, efficient, reliable, and operable system.

L. Conduct and coordinate CSI coordination meetings and attend progress meetings as specified herein.



1.3. CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The CSI shall be regularly engaged in the business of instrumentation and controls and shall be responsible for the supply, coordination, and installation of the equipment as specified herein.

B. The CSI shall demonstrate the requisite resources of in-house staff, facilities and finances to complete the project in the schedule specified. These resources shall include personnel who are direct payroll employees of the CSI to engineer, design, implement, fabricate, stage, and test the entire integrated hardware and software system at the CSI’s facilities. In-house personnel shall include all disciplines associated with system manufacture, fabrication, and integration to include but not be limited to engineering, drafting, analog and digital control systems and wiring design, construction, wiring, labeling, software configuration, test/demonstration programming, project management, quality control, field engineering and training.

C. The CSI shall assign a specific person to be the CSI Project Manager for this project. The Project Manager shall be a direct employee of the CSI, shall be assigned to this specific project, and shall be skilled and experienced in project management of the type of work described herein. The Project Manager shall be assigned for the period of the Contract. Should it become necessary to replace the CSI project manager, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the credentials of the person assigned as a replacement.

D. The CSI shall maintain a UL 508 listed fabrication shop located at the CSI facility for the assembly of the various control panels, cabinets, consoles, instrument racks, enclosures, and wiring required for this project. This shop shall be available for inspection by the Engineer to observe quality control and workmanship. The CSI facilities shall include hardware and software owned by the CSI for development and support of any system software, testing, and demonstration equipment to be utilized on the project.

E. System integration shall be completed by Micro-Tech Designs, Hampton, MD 410-239-2885 (Sole Source).

1.4. DEFINITIONS

A. Process Control System (PCS) – Network of one or more PLCs, PLC OITs, and/or computers. Synonymous with SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) system.

B. Contract Documents – Comprised of both the Contract Drawings and Contract Specifications.

C. Fieldbus Networks – Reference to a family of industrial network protocols. Fieldbus networks may include Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus, Profinet, Ethernet IP, Modbus TCP, Modbus Serial, Modbus 485, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, and others.

D. Resident Project Representative (RPR) – Onsite team that enforces the Contract Documents and witnesses most demonstrations. May, or may not, be the design Engineer.

E. Contractor – Where used herein, refers to the Prime, or General, Contractor. The contractor to which this CSI is subcontracted.



1.5. CSI COORDINATION AND MEETING REQUIREMENTS

A. The CSI shall collaborate with the Contractor in scheduling of all work.

B. Schedule testing and demonstrations in writing with the Engineer and Owner at least two weeks in advance of the proposed date(s).

C. The CSI shall perform the detailed integration and coordination of the control systems and instrumentation equipment furnished in accordance with this specification. Work shall be performed by the CSI’s own staff and related equipment manufacturer’s engineers where applicable, including submittal drawings, operations and maintenance manuals, record drawings, equipment testing, operational demonstrations, and other applicable documentation.

D. Coordination with Process Mechanical Equipment Manufacturers

1. Coordinate with process mechanical equipment manufacturer’s in order to obtain control system requirements and special control components. The CSI shall review and coordinate with the equipment manufacturer’s submittals.

2. The Engineer and RPR are not required to supply information to the CSI that is available from within this project’s contract, including supplier information, when the CSI is capable of obtaining such information directly.

E. The CSI shall take detailed meeting minutes (i.e., record of meeting discussions) for all meetings attended by the CSI. Meeting minutes shall:

1. Identify all topics of discussion and all pertinent details of each topic.

2. Identify the party that is speaking for each topic and each statement that is recorded.

3. Categorize statements as ideas or agreed-upon actions.

4. Record meeting date(s) and time(s), as well as attendees of the meeting.

F. Required Meetings

1. Initial Coordination Meeting

a. Schedule, coordinate, and host an initial coordination meeting with the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer to review the scope and schedule of the project. The meeting shall be attended by the CSI project manager and all other parties that are involved in the integration of the control system. CSI shall come equipped with the approved Detailed Work Plan.

b. The Initial Coordination shall have a pre-submittal review conference. The Pre- submittal review conference shall be held for one, two-hour day and shall be conducted within 45 working days of Contract award. The Contractor shall take minutes of the pre-submittal conference. The pre-submittal review conference shall feature:

i. A list of equipment and materials required for the control system and the



manufacturer’s name and model number for each proposed item.

ii. A list of proposed outages. Outages may include:

1) Power system outages associated with cut-over of equipment.

2) Process equipment outages associated with the change-out of existing field instruments.

3) Control System outages because of changes to PLC architecture or PLC communications architecture.

4) Control System outages because of changes to soft-ware deployment and/or cut-over from existing PLC software to new PLC software.

iii. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Document along with a brief explanation of each item. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the Engineer.

iv. The work plan shall include:

1) Dates for all submittals, design fabrication and programming.

2) Dates for factory acceptance tests.

3) Dates for deliveries.

4) Dates for field testing.

5) Dates for outages and cutovers anticipated for the project.

6) Dates for training.

v. An overview of the proposed training plan. The Owner’s staff and Engineer shall review and may request changes. Changes to the proposed training shall be resolved in the pre-submittal conference. The overview shall include the following for all training:

1) Course title and objectives.

2) Any needed pre-requisite training and experience by the attendee.

3) A topical outline.

4) Course duration.

5) Course format- lecture, laboratory, or hands-on discussion.

c. Develop the meeting agenda and distribute to the attendees a minimum of three days prior to the meeting for review. Update agenda with reviewer’s comments and come prepared to address attendee’s questions. Provide copies of all handouts for all attendees.



2. CSI Progress Meetings

a. Schedule, coordinate, and host CSI-specific progress meetings during the course of the project to coordinate integration requirements with the equipment manufacturers and Contractors. The CSI shall hold a minimum of 2 progress meetings at the project site. The progress meetings shall be held at an agreeable time for the Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. Additional meetings shall take place as required to coordinate the Work.

b. Develop the meeting agenda and distribute to the attendees a minimum of three days prior to the meeting for review. Update agenda with reviewer’s comments and come prepared to address attendee’s questions. Provide copies of all handouts for all attendees.

3. Equipment Modifications Field Meetings - Schedule, coordinate, and host onsite meetings with the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer as required to overview modifications to existing equipment and systems. The meeting shall be attended by the CSI project manager, and all other parties that are involved in the integration of the control system.

4. PLC and Supervisory Program Standards Coordination Workshop – Schedule, coordinate and host onsite meeting with the Owner and Engineer, prior to the beginning of the programming phase, to develop and maintain the programming standards. During this meeting, the Owner will provide the CSI with standard procedures and some, but not all, required Dynamic Function Blocks to be used in the programming of the PLCs. The meeting shall be held at an agreeable time for the Owner and Engineer and shall be coordinated a minimum of two weeks in advance of the proposed date.

5. PLC Programming Review Workshops

a. Schedule, coordinate, and host on-site meetings with the Owner and Engineer at 15 percent and prior to startup to review progress, approach and address any questions or comments that the Owner and Engineer may have with regards to PLC programming.

i. Develop the meeting agenda and distribute to the attendees a minimum of three days prior to the meeting for review. Update the agenda with reviewer’s comments and come prepared to address attendee’s comments and detailed questions. Distribute copies of all handouts for all attendees. In addition to the agenda, develop and distribute a PLC Memory Map that is inclusive of all specified I/O.

ii. The following tasks shall be completed prior to the 15 percent meeting:

1) All I/O is addressed.

2) All racks and modules within the racks are configured.

3) Process logic for the unit is composed.



b. Prior to startup, the CSI shall host a minimum of one meeting to demonstrate process and alarm logic to the Owner and Engineer, utilizing a projection screen and projector. The CSI shall have as many meetings as necessary to demonstrate the PLC program in its entirety, these meetings may not occur on consecutive days. The CSI shall have multiple participants in these meetings that shall be capable of responding to detailed questions in regards to common mode failure scenario’s (including loss of power, loss of communication and loss of signal), process control logic and alarm logic.

6. Supervisory Programming Review Workshops

a. Schedule, coordinate, and host on-site meetings with the Owner and Engineer at 15 percent and prior to startup to review progress, approach and address any questions or comments that the Owner and Engineer may have with regards to OIT, trending, security and alarming.

i. Develop the meeting agenda and distribute to the attendees a minimum of three days prior to the meeting for review. Update agenda with reviewer’s comments and come prepared to address attendee’s questions. Provide copies of all handouts for all attendees.

ii. The following tasks shall be completed prior to the 15 percent meeting:

1) OIT screen templates are created.

2) All template objects believed to be required for the entire project are created and imported.

b. Prior to startup, the CSI shall host a minimum of one meeting to demonstrate the OIT system. The demonstration shall include navigation of the application, navigation of the OIT screens, process control and alarming.

1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. References - Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been specified in the Contract Documents:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

2. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

3. ASTM - The American Society for Testing Materials

4. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association

5. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

6. ISA - Instrument Society of America

7. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

8. NEC - National Electrical Code



B. Quality Control

1. All components shall be new and of the most current and proven design. All components shall be approved for the intended application and shall be installed and wired in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

2. All new electrical equipment and control panels, and their components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled as a completed assembly.

1.7. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the individual Division 17 specification requirements.

B. Submittals shall include the following:

1. CSI Qualifications Package – Submittals sent to the Engineer from the CSI before the qualifications package is approved will be returned Not Reviewed.

2. Detailed Work Plan – Submit within 90 days of the Notice to Proceed. Submittals sent to the Engineer from the CSI before the detailed work plan is approved will be returned Not Reviewed. In scheduling review time for the work plan, allocate time for three resubmittals before approval.

3. Shop Drawings, Operations & Maintenance, and Project Record Documents – In scheduling review time for individual shop drawings, allocate time for a minimum of two resubmittals.

4. Equipment Inventory, Calibration, and Validation Workbook

5. Factory acceptance test plan, schedule, and forms.

6. Field Testing, Demonstration, Validation – Shall be approved by the Engineer before any field tests are performed.

7. Training syllabus.

1.8. CSI QUALIFICATIONS PACKAGE

A. The CSI shall submit the specified technical qualifications within 30 days of the Contractor’s Notice of Award.

B. Submit a CSI qualifications package for the proposed CSI for this project (even when sole sourced). The qualifications package shall include the following information which shall be organized and formatted as follows:

1. Company Background - Provide a brief company overview detailing CSI’s experience, capabilities, and available resources. Description of available resources shall include labor categories, staffing, equipment owned by the CSI and pertinent to this project, divulge all associations with manufacturers pertinent to this project, testing equipment owned by the CSI and pertinent to this project, and training staff and aids.



2. Experience in Water and Wastewater Applications - Provide a list of recent (last five years from the bid opening date of this Contract) projects involving similar treatment facilities that the CSI has successfully completed. Each project shall be provided with the date of completion.

3. Project Plan - Provide a brief project task list detailing the personnel to be utilized for engineering and design, fabrication, installation, startup, demonstration, and training for this project. Include resumes for all personnel which will be performing services for this project. Provide name and resume for the proposed project manager for this project. Identify role(s) of each submitted individual.

a. Provide resumes for all key staff, including field technicians who are assigned to perform installation, testing and demonstration services. All resumes shall be approved by the Engineer. Ensure that the resumes do not include senior personnel who will not have technical responsibilities associated with the project. The project organization shall include:

i. Project Managers

ii. Project Engineers

iii. Software Engineers

iv. Programmers

v. Communications Engineer (radio)

vi. Designers

vii. Start-up and commissioning team members

4. Technical Support Plan

a. Identify the location of the technical support facility that is nearest to the Owner’s project site.

b. Identify the number of staff members with the qualifications (System Platform) that are available and where these staff members are located in relation to the project job site.

c. Identify how many business days it will take for a qualified representative of the entity that is familiar with the specificity of the system to arrive at the Owner’s facility after notification of a system hardware problem that could not be corrected by plant staff.

5. Current backlog - Identify the quantity of projects by other entities that are currently being worked on. Provide the following information for each project:

a. Size of each in dollars

b. Quantity of PLCs/RTUs



c. Communications medium

d. Percentage complete

e. Estimated shipping date

6. Quality Assurance Plan - Provide a brief summary of the CSI’s in-place quality assurance plans for performing work from engineering through startup and training.

7. Facilities and Equipment - Provide a detailed list of office and fabrication space, location where fabrication of panels will take place, and available meeting facilities. List numbers and types of Computer Aided Drafting software and workstations that are available for this project.

8. Training - Provide an overview of training programs and capabilities to be used for this project for both onsite training and offsite training.

9. Reference Letters - Provide a minimum of five reference letters summarizing the CSI’s performance on similar projects. Reference letters shall be from Contractors or Owners that have had contractual relationships with the CSI on similar projects.

1.9. DETAILED WORK PLAN

A. Submit an overall work plan that details tasks to be performed on this project in sufficient detail to demonstrate a complete understanding of the CSI’s scope of work, interdependency of tasks and milestones, sequence of construction, and realistic duration of tasks.

B. Contents shall address and include:

1. Schedule - Electronically generated schedule that identifies all tasks required of the CSI, including individual entries for overall project milestones, each shop drawing, submittal dates for each submittal required above, specified meetings, fabrication periods for individual PLCs, testing periods for individual PLCs, programming services for individual PLCs, installation and network testing of networks, modifications to existing components and systems, installation acceptance, final acceptance, and training periods for equipment. Refer to Section 01640, Equipment – General, and individual Division 17 sections for required installation acceptance, final acceptance, and training days required.

2. Communications Plan – Provide an organizational chart for the CSI, including email, office phone, office fax, and mobile phone numbers for all project participants. Submit a communications plan that allows communication directly between the Engineer and one contact within the CSI’s organization. Include written authorization from the CSI’s prime contractor that also establishes the terms of Engineer-to-CSI correspondence.

3. Risks – Identify any risks to delivering the scope of work on time and on budget. Identify any long lead time equipment items. Present recommended solutions to mitigate identified risks.

4. Outages – Provide a detailed plan that identifies all outages that will be required during construction to complete the project. The plan shall identify the following:



a. Sequence of outages

b. Equipment, PLC, or system that will be affected by each outage

c. Duration of each outage

d. Proposed date(s) for each outage

e. List of specific tasks to be completed during the outage

f. Means by which equipment can be controlled if a PLC is removed

g. If the outage requires a process shutdown

5. CSI initial coordination meeting agenda.

6. CSI progress meeting agenda template.

1.10. SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE, AND RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Equipment shall only be ordered after shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Equipment procured without Engineer approval may need to be uninstalled, returned, exchanged, and/or replaced at the Contractor’s cost. Equipment ordered that does not address all the Engineer’s shop drawing comments are subject to complete replacement, rather than refurbishment or modification, if modification of the supplied unit impacts aesthetics, intended functionality, schedule, or cost at the Engineer and Owner’s option.

2. If deviations to the Contract Documents are proposed, the CSI shall submit a detailed description and explanation for each proposed deviation to the Contract Documents.

3. Provide “value added integration” services to identify and highlight equipment alternatives which may benefit the project with explanations for proposed alternatives (i.e., updated model or part numbers, better performance for the given application, etc.).

B. Shop drawing, operations and maintenance, and project record document requirements of Section 17000, Instrumentation, are intended to complement submittal requirements of individual specification sections. Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation, for additional requirements and format in preparing individual section submittals.

C. Record Drawings

1. Submit complete and accurate record drawings reflecting all changes and modifications made during installation and testing of the equipment and systems.

2. Record drawings shall be submitted on reproducible paper, with the required number of sets of prints. Prints and reproducible paper shall be full sized. Once the record drawings are reviewed by the Engineer, the CSI shall incorporate the Engineer’s comments, submit required number of sets, and shall submit two copies of the electronic files for each record drawing shall be submitted on compact disks. Files



shall be formatted in AutoCAD (.dwg) format. A list of drawing files with corresponding drawing titles shall be provided with the disks. Record Drawings shall be provided after conditional acceptance of the facility is approved and shall include all field changes and design modifications made during construction.

1.11. EQUIPMENT INVENTORY, CONFIGURATION, AND VALIDATION WORKBOOK GENERAL

A. CSI shall populate and maintain an Equipment Inventory, Calibration, and Validation Workbook. This is a single workbook with multiple worksheets. An electronic copy of this Microsoft Excel 2013 workbook is available from the Engineer to the successful bidder.

B. Update the entire workbook biweekly and remit updated copies electronically to the Engineer upon request, which may be as frequent as weekly.

C. Testing and validation results shall be updated electronically in the field using the CSI’s laptop computer.

D. Entries on the sample sheet are for illustrative purposes only and do not indicate approved configurations or acceptable equipment.

E. Workbook Contents

1. Instrumentation Calibration Worksheet – Contains calibration and configuration information, including, but not limited to, the equipment designation, equipment description, instrument details, analog output configuration, failsafe configuration, relay output configuration, and technician details. Columns include: Equipment Designation, Equipment Description, Technology, Instrument Details (Manufacturer, Model Line, and Model Number), Analog Output Characteristics, Process Value At Minimum Span, Process Value At Maximum Span, Units Of Measure, Failsafe Mode (Hold Last Good Value, Drive Signal Above 20 mA, Drive Signal Below 4 mA, Failsafe Not Available), Relay Outputs (Purpose and Function), Technician Who Performed Work (Company and Name). The Contractor shall include a (5) point calibration check (0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% of spanned value). Fieldbus Network Configuration Worksheet – Worksheet identifies key configuration information for all networked devices. Columns include: Equipment Designation, Equipment Description, Equipment Type, Instrument Details (Manufacturer, Model Line, and Model Number), Communication (Protocol; Network Address, ID, or Node; Parameters), Failsafe Mode (Hold Last Good Value, Run or Open, Stop or Close, Other), Technician Who Performed Work (Company and Name).

2. Testing & Validation Worksheet – One worksheet per PLC. Utilizes as-bid PLC I/O list in conjunction with additional 40 columns that correlate to the requirements ofthree phases of I/O testing by the CSI: Factory Acceptance Testing, Intermediate Point-to-Point Testing, and Final Point-to-Point Testing. A testing work sheet shall include:

a. Name of the signal to be tested



b. PLC where the signal resides (cabinet, rack, slot and point number)

c. PLC tag name

d. Alarm assertion states (high, high-high low, low-low)

e. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with each alarm assertion state

f. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of communications

g. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of PLC processor

h. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of field device

i. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of PLC i/o card

j. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of power (ac or dc)

k. A confirmation that items are to be visible on OIT and change state

l. A confirmation that items are to be visible on trending (where applicable)

1.12. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) SCHEDULE, PLANS AND FORMS

A. The CSI shall obtain electronic copies of the Equipment Inventory, Configuration, and Validation Workbook from the Engineer and modify electronically to customize testing templates for this project.

B. Submit a testing schedule for FAT of panels and associated PLC equipment test programs. The schedule shall list the location of panel fabrication, the location that the test will be conducted at, and the date the test will be conducted. Schedule shall be submitted a minimum of four weeks prior to conducting actual testing. Where revisions to the dates contained in the schedule become necessary, the CSI shall submit revised dates a minimum of seven calendar days prior to conducting actual tests in order to allow the Owner time to plan for witnessing the test. All factory acceptance tests shall be subject to observation by the Owner or designated representative. Shop testing shall be as specified herein.

C. The CSI shall submit a FAT plan for each control panel indicating all tests and demonstrations to be performed. FAT plans shall include line items for verifying all components and wiring in the control panel are appropriately functional, inclusive of all control, instrumentation, network and power devices, cabling and wiring. Devices requiring interaction with field devices may be marked as “field test” and shall be tested during Point- to-Point testing witnessed by the Engineer.

D. A FAT report shall be submitted for each panel furnished by the CSI. Test report shall include date and time of test, personnel conducting test, personnel witnessing test, name of panel and fabricator, location of test, test equipment utilized, and a detailed description of the actual tests performed. Reports shall include a list of items that failed the testing, what caused the failure and what remedy is to be done. CSI shall also note any additional conditions of the shop test that may be agreed to prior to or during the shop test of any given control panel.



E. All shop testing involving networks shall utilize network addresses provided by the Engineer. Network addresses may be supplied by the Engineer two weeks prior to scheduled testing.

F. The CSI shall develop and provide test programs to the Contractor for submittal to the Engineer for the PLC as required to demonstrate functionality of the system hardware components and communications through the system networks. Network communications to be demonstrated include:

1. The CSI shall configure, startup, and commission all network managed switches, , network gateways, and other nodes on the PCS network.

G. If the functional testing conducted at the Factory does not meet the previously agreed-to requirements, the Contractor shall absorb all costs for materials, labor and schedule delays required to conduct a re-test of the components or software.

1.13. FIELD TESTING, DEMONSTRATION, AND VALIDATION

A. The CSI shall submit a testing and demonstration plan for the equipment and instrumentation that is furnished and/or modified by the CSI. The plan shall consist of two main components:(1) testing; and (2) demonstration. Both testing and demonstration shall include individual field devices, individual pieces of equipment, and systems.

B. Testing and demonstration of the components, equipment and systems shall include details of staff to be used, testing equipment to be used, listing of equipment and systems to be tested, and a detailed description for testing. Testing shall include final testing of calibrated ranges and actuation settings of instrumentation and field devices, testing of panel mounted controls and control stations, and testing of interlocks, status indication and alarms between panels and systems.

C. The demonstration plan shall be similar to the testing plan in that the same tests shall be performed by the CSI as were performed during testing, for the purposes of demonstrating the operation of the individual pieces of equipment, instrumentation and systems. It shall also serve the purposes of completing a final checkout of the systems. For the purposes of preparing the plan, the CSI shall assume that a minimum of four persons employed by the Owner will be witnessing the tests. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of seven calendar days prior to performing demonstration of operation of the equipment and systems.

D. Requirements for testing and demonstration of operation of equipment described herein shall incorporate the requirements for testing and demonstration as specified in the individual Division 17 specification sections.

E. Plan shall include CSI’s participation in the unit process and plant-wide testing described in Section 01660, Testing and Startup.

1.14. TRAINING SYLLABUS

A. The CSI shall submit a training syllabus for training the Owner’s personnel in the use, function and operation of the panels and control systems. Syllabus shall include equipment to be covered by the training, description of the training to be provided, training aids and materials to be provided, duration of each training evolution, and proposed schedule for



training. Training syllabus shall incorporate the training requirements outlined in the individual Division 17 specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

A. Furnish equipment, materials and appurtenances in accordance with the requirements of technical specifications listed in Divisions 16 and 17.

B. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers as required to obtain information, submittals, materials and equipment from manufacturers, and shall provide information, submittals, materials and equipment to equipment manufacturers as required to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Source Quality Control

1. The CSI shall conduct shop acceptance tests for control panels and systems prior to shipment. The FAT shall demonstrate that the equipment performs in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Each control panel furnished by the CSI shall be assembled and wired so that it functions as a complete system for the FAT. Inputs to the control panels from field instruments and devices may be simulated during the test. Control panels shall be fully assembled with all devices functional prior to Owner’s representative arriving for FAT. The Engineer reserves the right to postpone FAT if it is deemed that the control panels are not ready to be tested.

3. The FAT shall demonstrate the proper operation of the configuration and control logic of devices described or indicated on the Contract Drawings and specifications.

D. Incidental Discovery of Existing Issues

1. Upon incidental discovery of an existing issue, notify the Owner immediately in writing.

2. Existing issues may include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Code violations.

b. Defective equipment.

c. Compromised equipment.

d. Disabled interlocks.



3.2. FIELD TERMINATIONS AND LABELING

A. Terminations - CSI shall terminate signal wiring to instrumentation, equipment, and field-side of control panel termination strips provided by the CSI.

1. Electrical Contractor shall pull conductors and cables to termination points with sufficient excess cable to enable the CSI to label, organize, and terminate each conductor.

2. Terminations shall be limited to signal wiring, 24 VDC and 120 VAC power and control circuits, such as analog signals, discrete signals, fieldbus networks, and control logic, but shall not include three-phase power or power higher than 120 VAC. Scope of terminations include all equipment, excluding only equipment provided internal to an integrated system such as performance-based packaged systems specified in Division 11.

B. Wire Labeling - Provide labeling of individual conductors terminated by the CSI.

1. Labels shall utilize a common format, appearance, and be installed with consistent and repeatable workmanship.

2. Materials - Labels shall be comprised of a machine-printed polyolefin, wire marker sleeve, and utilize black text on a white background. Each label shall be a shrink wrap sleeve. Combining multiple labels to comprise a single wire label is not acceptable.

3. Method – Label conductors within 1 inch of each termination. Utilize the same, unique wire designation for the entire continuous segment of wire. All wire designations shall be a derivative of the equipment’s designation to which it is connected.

4. Timeliness - Wires must be labeled prior to termination and equipment may not be commissioned without permanent wire labels in-place. Wire labeling shall be a prerequisite of equipment startup.

5. CSI shall establish and coordinate wiring labeling requirements with the Owner. Once labeling materials and syntax/format are agreed upon with the Owner, CSI shall coordinate requirements with the Electrical Contractor to ensure the Electrical Contractor utilizes the same format.

C. Nameplates – Provide nameplates for all Division 16 and Division 17 equipment in accordance with nameplate requirements in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

3.3. POINT-TO-POINT FIELD TESTING

A. Definitions

1. Equipment to be Tested - May include a PLC enclosure, control panel, or other device that requires point-to-point testing. It is the assembled panel that requires testing.

2. PLC I/O Lists – Tables located at the end of Section 17100, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), that identify all the signals communicated to each plant PLC.



I/O list does not identify signals communicated to Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) PLCs that are typically specified in Division 11 specifications.

3. DMM – Digital Multi Meter. Device cable of sensing current in milliamp with a resolution of at least 0.01 mA; sensing continuity; sensing resistance with a resolution of 1 Ohm; and able to source 4 to 20 mA analog signals at a minimum of 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans.

4. Signal – Includes a PLC input and output, a hardwired circuit between two field- mounted devices or internal to a control panel, and a network signal like those available over Ethernet and fieldbus protocols.

B. Intermediate Point-To-Point Testing

1. Purpose

a. To identify wires terminated on incorrect terminals, loose wires, wires with insufficient exposed metal or too much exposed metal, improper wiring practices, interference or noise.

b. To prove polarity of analog signals are correct; 4-20 mA circuits are grounded on one end only; circuits are appropriately powered as 24 VDC loop powered, 24 VDC 3-wire, or 120 VAC powered.

c. To resolve all wiring and equipment issues to ensure that final point-to-point testing proceeds quickly and without interruption so as to conserve the time required by the party witnessing final point-to-point testing.

d. To assess percent complete on Contactor payment applications.

e. To assess readiness of the system for commissioning by the programmer.

2. Scope of Testing

a. All signals specified in the I/O lists.

b. All signals added during the shop drawing and/or construction phases.

c. All fieldbus and Ethernet networks.

3. Prerequisites to commencing intermediate point-to-point testing:

a. Equipment to be tested shall be installed in its final location.

b. Equipment to be tested shall be powered by its permanent and final source of power.

c. Field wiring shall be pulled from the field devices to the equipment to be tested and shall be encased in the appropriate conduits.



d. Field wiring shall be labeled in the field, as well as inside the equipment to be tested.

e. Field devices are installed, commissioned as specified, powered, and all terminations have been completed.

f. All pending field orders associated with the equipment and workmanship of the systems to be tested shall be resolved.

g. All checklists shall be prepopulated by the CSI and their completed form submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

4. Testing Documentation

a. The CSI shall populate the Testing & Validation worksheet of the EQ Inventory, Configuration, and Validation workbook with all signals to be tested.

b. Update the workbook to identify any testing methods that are not pertinent to the signal as N/A, as in Not Applicable.

c. Complete all testing of each signal and identify the person(s) performing the test.

5. Each signal shall be verified by the CSI to ensure that the interconnecting wiring is complete and correct, and connected to the proper terminals at the points of termination.

6. Removal of a wire from a termination point within a previously tested circuit nullifies any previous testing of the circuit and necessitates retesting of the circuit following the complete point-to-point testing requirements in its entirety.

7. Method of Testing – In general, each signal shall be tested

a. Discrete Inputs – Manipulate the field element to evoke the signal excitation (change of state) indicative of the wired signal. Signals may jumpered only where it is impossible to evoke signal excitation without damaging or disassembling the field device in a manner not approved by the device manufacturer. For example, equipment shall be started/stopped, floats shall be manipulated, hand switches shall be manipulated, alarm outputs shall be forced at the instrument using self-test features, actuators shall be controlled open and closed using control integral to the actuator, etc. Verify signal excitation in PLC program and on visually PLC discrete input module LEDs.

b. Discrete Outputs – Force an output from the PLC program and verify the field device responds as intended. Removal of wires anywhere in the circuit to insert a DMM to verify signal excitation is not an acceptable means of testing for any discrete output. For example, from the PLC program equipment shall be started/stopped, actuators shall be opened/closed, pilot lights shall be illuminated, etc.

c. Analog Inputs – For process instrumentation, such as levels, flow meters, pressure, and analytical instrumentation (chlorine residual, pH, etc.), remove one wire of the analog circuit at the field device and use a DMM to source the 0, 25,



50, 75, and 100 percent spans indicative of the connected field device. For valve actuators and VFDs, use controls integral to the field device to evoke the 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans for the device. In all cases where the process instrument affords such functionality, use the field device’s internal signal simulations to evoke the 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans. Verify signal values in the PLC program. Verify signals read positive process values,

i.e. verify polarity of signal wires are correct.

d. Analog Outputs – Force an analog output from the PLC program and verify the field device responds as intended. VFDs and chemical feed pumps shall run at the commanded speed, valve actuators and positioners shall modulate to the commanded position, etc. Test at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans.

e. Fieldbus Network – Configure all node addresses, field device settings, and fieldbus module settings as appropriate to achieve maximum bandwidth without communication errors. Configure the PLC program to communicate to all nodes and demonstrate monitoring and remote-manual control functionality. For process instrumentation and analytical instrumentation, such as gas detection networks, demonstrate monitoring and control of the signals listed on the I/O lists.

f. Ethernet Network – Configure all IP addresses and field device settings, including how the device responds to a loss of signal/communications/ network and loss of power. Configure the PLC program to communicate to all Ethernet devices and demonstrate monitoring and remote-manual control functionality.

8. Engineer does not need to witness intermediate point-to-point testing. Upon completion of test, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written certification that the test has been completed, and all I/O wiring has been verified as being correct. A copy of the completed checklist shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to scheduling final point-to-point testing.

9. Signals that do not function as specified shall be examined and corrected prior to completion of intermediate point-to-point testing.

10. Intermediate point-to-point testing shall not be considered complete until each signal has been successfully tested and items above are satisfied.

11. Schedule - Upon Engineer’s acceptance that the intermediate point-to-point testing has been completed as specified, the CSI shall coordinate with the Owner and Engineer to schedule the Final Point-To-Point Testing. Scheduling of the final point- to-point testing will not be approved prior to the Engineer’s acceptance that the Intermediate point-to-point testing has been completed as specified. Allocate a minimum of 14 calendar days between Engineer’s acceptance of the intermediate point-to-point testing documentation and the proposed start date of the final point-to- point testing period.

C. Final Point-To-Point Testing

1. Purpose

a. To verify all signals, instruments, and equipment are functional and



completely ready to be commissioned by the programmer.

b. It is expected there are no issues during this testing and that the final point-to- point testing proceeds quickly without interruption.

c. To assess percent complete on contactor payment applications.

d. To document when the testing was performed and by whom the testing was performed and witnessed.

e. Successful demonstration thereof shall be a prerequisite for substantial completion for any single system.

2. Scope of Testing

a. All signals specified in the I/O lists.

b. All signals added during the shop drawing and/or construction phases.

c. All fieldbus and Ethernet networks.

d. All signals tested during intermediate point-to-point testing

3. Prerequisites to Commencing Final Point-To-Point Testing

a. Intermediate point-to-point testing has been successfully complete, documented, and documentation reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

b. All checklists shall be prepopulated by the CSI and their completed form submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

c. Testing dates and planned sequence of testing has been submitted to Engineer for review, approval, and scheduling.

d. Appropriate equipment vendors, CSI staff, and operations staff are advised and properly coordinated to signals to be demonstrated.

4. Testing Documentation

a. The CSI shall populate the Testing & Validation worksheet of the EQ Inventory, Configuration, and Validation workbook with all signals to be tested.

b. Update the workbook to identify any testing methods that are not pertinent to the signal as N/A, as in Not Applicable.

c. Perform testing of each individual signal in the presence of an Engineer’s representative, unless the Engineer has waived all or a portion of this requirement in writing.

d. Complete all testing of each signal and identify the person(s) performing the test. Obtain the signature of the Engineer’s authorized witness for each signal tested.



5. CSI shall expend all necessary labor required to demonstrate all signals.

6. Removal of a wire from a termination point within a previously tested circuit nullifies any previous testing of the circuit and necessitates retesting of the circuit following the complete point-to-point testing requirements in its entirety.

7. Method of Testing – to be performed as required by the intermediate point-to-point method of testing.

8. Final point-to-point testing shall not be considered complete until each signal has been successfully tested and items above are satisfied.

3.4. PCS PLC TEST PROGRAMS

A. Develop and provide test programs for the PLCs, and network devices internal to the PLC enclosure, as required to demonstrate functionality of the system hardware components and communications through the system networks.

B. Test programs shall provide for the following tests:

1. Factory Acceptance Testing of PLC Cabinets

a. Demonstrate system-wide communications between PLCs, fiber optics, switches, and other network components.

b. Validate control panel wiring from each field wiring terminal block through the I/O modules and PLC.

c. Actuator Modbus Communication – Connect one actuator and demonstrate monitoring and control of actuator during FAT.

2. Field Testing of PCS

a. Demonstrate plant-wide communications between PLCs, fiber optic network, switches, and other network components extending between each PLC cabinets and component on the PCS network.

b. Validate field wiring to the PCS control panel from each field device (source) through the I/O modules, PLC, OIT. This shall be included for both the intermediate point-to-point wiring verification and final point-to-point wiring and transmission verification testing phases.

3.5. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installation

1. The CSI shall provide onsite supervision and advice to the installing contractor to insure the equipment is installed in accordance with the specifications and the manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Control Wiring - Contractor shall include time to install/replace/provide additional



control and interlock components and wiring for each starter/VFD assembly or control panel as directed by the Engineer in the field. Modifications shall be performed as required to provide electrical interlocks and interface wiring to obtain a complete and operating control system.

3. CSI shall have two field technicians made available during the testing of equipment to assist with performing wiring and control modifications as required to interface with other field mounted equipment and control panels as directed by the Engineer.

B. Inspections and Field Calibrations

1. Any and all testing equipment required for this project shall be owned by the CSI so as to be immediately available for this project.

2. The use of specific equipment manufacturer’s startup, calibration, and troubleshooting personnel to assist the CSI shall be provided.

3. Calibrate instrumentation and place each system into operation. The commissioning of each system shall include the overall calibration and tuning of all control loops and sequences to provide stable control of the process. The validity of all process inputs and outputs for each system shall be checked and corrected during the system commissioning. Final adjustment and calibration shall be performed for all equipment prior to initiation of final testing.

C. System Testing

1. Testing of each panel and/or system shall be scheduled, performed in an orderly sequence, and conducted in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Testing shall be conducted for each component and system in accordance with the CSI’s submitted plan that has been reviewed by the Engineer.

2. Testing shall include the operation of all hardware, software, process control logic and custom control features. (Testing of process control logic shall only be required for panels and components which have been configured and programmed by the CSI.)

3. Testing requirements described herein shall be performed as specified in Sections 01660, Testing and Startup; 17000, Instrumentation; and 17100, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).

4. The following field tests and demonstrations shall be performed for each of the panels:

a. Intermediate point-to-point wiring verification.

b. Final point-to-point wiring and transmission verification.

c. Network communications testing and verification.

d. Modbus and Ethernet network testing and verification.

e. Section 01660, Testing and Startup.



D. Field Testing Requirements

1. Demonstrate the control features of each panel and associated field mounted instrumentation and control equipment, to verify that each panel performs the required control functions and logic as shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified. Control features shall include relay energization, initiation of alarm conditions, resets, interlocks, set point activation, and other functions of the control panels.

2. Equipment shall be field demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Owner, and shall be conducted in accordance with the CSI’s testing and demonstration plan that has been reviewed by the Engineer. Field demonstrations shall be performed after successful installation, calibration and testing of each control panel.

3. The Contractor shall provide the necessary test equipment, process media, materials, supplies, and qualified test personnel to perform the field demonstrations as specified herein.

4. Field instrumentation control signals that are required to demonstrate the operation of associated control panels may be simulated upon approval of the Engineer.

5. In the event of failure of the field demonstration, the Contractor shall perform the necessary corrections and re-demonstrate, at his own cost and expense, the equipment as directed by the Engineer.

6. Demonstration requirements described herein shall be performed as specified in the Sections 01660, Testing and Startup; 17000, Instrumentation; and 17100, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).

E. Sequence of Testing and Demonstration - The CSI shall perform testing and demonstration in the following sequence:

1. Factory Acceptance Testing - Specified in Section 17100, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).

2. Instrumentation Calibration and Testing – Specified with the respective Division 17 section.

3. Instrumentation Demonstration - Specified with the respective Division 17 section.

4. Wireless I/O testing and verification.

5. Network Communications Testing and Verification.

6. Intermediate Point-to-Point I/O Wiring Verification.

7. Final Point-to-Point I/O Wiring and Transmission Verification – Section 01660, Testing and Startup.



F. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the field testing as scheduled required below.

G. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the testing and startup of the facility as scheduled below and as specified in Section 01660, Testing and Startup.

H. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the I/O testing as scheduled below.

I. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in startup and validation. This effort includes, but is not limited to, addressing how instrumentation was setup, terminations made, and identifying and investigating possible issues with wiring and equipment.

1. The CSI shall respond immediately upon notification of an urgent matter, which may result in destruction or damage of a building, piece of equipment, or property.

2. The CSI shall respond within 24 hours to all other matters.

3.6. CSI FIELD TECHNICIAN TABLE

Description Number of CSI Field Technicians Required

Factory acceptance testing 2Equipment installation 2Instrumentation calibration and testing 1Instrumentation demonstration 1Network communications testing and verification 2Intermediate point-to-point testing 2Final point-to-point testing 2Programming phase services 2



PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) 17100 - 1

SECTION 17100 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish and install new PLCs, complete with all necessary accessories and PLC programming software, wired to accommodate all inputs and outputs listed in the I/O list, ready to communicate via the specified medium(s), and ready to be programmed under Section 17101, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Programming. In short, this section includes:

1. New Programmable logic controllers (PLC) in new Motor Control Centers as specified herein. CSI to fabricate the PLC subpanel and to supply to the MCC fabricator.

2. PLC power equipment and accessories

3. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

4. Surge suppression

5. DC power supplies

6. PLC enclosures

7. PLC communication architecture

8. PLC I/O lists

B. Utilize this section in conjunction with the SCADA architecture shown on Drawing E008 of the Contract Drawings to furnish and install all necessary PLC control panels. PLC panels are shown on the electrical drawings.

1.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. It is a requirement of this specification that all Division 17 specifications be provided by a single Control Systems Integrator (CSI) as specified in Sections 17000, Instrumentation; 17010, Control Systems Integrator; and related Division 17 specifications. The CSI shall have total responsibility for the entire system performance and compatibility of this Section, as well as all other Division 17 Specifications

B. For ease of identification, symbols for the various components of the metering system to be furnished and installed are given in Table 17100-1.

TABLE 17100-1SCHEDULE OF PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

CONTROLLERS

PLC Nameplate DesignationNameplate Designation Location

Stormwater Pump Station 3 PLC PLC-SPS Stormwater Pump Station 3, Pump Room




The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:

A. Division 1

B. All Division 16 specifications.

C. All Division 17 specifications.

1.4. REFERENCES




D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. NFPA 79 - Labeling.

F. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA) - Standards 5.1 and 5.4.

G. Industry Electric Code (IEC) – Article 1131.3, Programming Standards.

H. Federal Communication Commission (FCC), Part 15.247.

I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 508.

1.5. DEFINITIONS

A. System Supplier – the party responsible for all of Division 17 specifications.

B. UPS – uninterruptible power supply.

C. OIT – Operator Interface Terminal. Device that consists of a touchscreen display for the purpose of extracting and input data to a controller.

D. FCC – Federal Communications Commission.

E. Yagi – An antenna used to communicate between one location and another location directly.

F. DI- Discrete Input

G. DO– Discrete Output

H. AI– Analog Input

I. AO- Analog Output



J. Transceiver – A radio transmitter and receiver in a single housing.

K. Spread Spectrum Radio – A radio that utilizes frequency hopping as a means for communicating with other spread spectrum radios. Due to the nature of frequency hopping, these radios are not subject to frequency licensing from the FCC. They are, however, subject to limitations of use and installation by the FCC.

1.6. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation. The following submittal material shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval prior to fabrication of any PLC assemblies. PLCs that are fabricated prior to the approval of these shop drawings are subject to alteration to conform with the approved shop drawings by the supplier at the suppliers cost.

1. Submit samples for approval by the Engineer. The Engineer will retain samples. Submit samples as follows:

a. A 1-foot sample of a single 14-gage wire as used to wire discrete I/O within the PLC panel. Wire shall be labeled with the following text on the label:

b. Line 1: “YI-6789 to PLC-SPS”

c. Line 2: “123456789”

d. A 1-foot sample of a single 16-gage T.S.P. as used to wire analog I/O inside the PLC panel. Wire shall utilize the heat shrink sheath proposed at each termination of such cable. Wire shall be labeled with the following text on the label:

1) Line 1: “FI-6789 to PLC-SPS”

2) Line 2: “12345678”

e. One terminal block with labeling in-place.

f. One machine engraved nameplate used for labeling the PLC enclosure and subpanel devices with text as follows:

1) Line 1: “City of Frederick”

2) Line 2: “Frederick Stormwater P.S. 3”

3) Line 3: “PLC-SPS”

g. Using AutoCAD 2016, or higher, provide these drawings for each PLC in the following order. Label all components with manufacturer and complete model numbers on the drawings. Typical drawings are not acceptable.



h. Scaled enclosure layout drawings in 11-inch by 17-inch format, detailing locations of all components on the subpanel, door, and all other enclosure faces. Label each view as “Enclosure Door”, “Enclosure Subpanel”, “Enclosure Side”, etc. Drawing shall display layout of completed assemblies, including, but not limited to, PLC backplane, PLC I/O modules, empty slots, radios, UPS, Ethernet switches, terminal blocks, installed spare equipment, power supplies, power line isolators, surge suppression, grounding lugs, wireway, disconnect switches, fuses, control relays, acceptable regions for conduit penetrations of both AC and DC wiring separately, and external power. Illustrate handles, hasps, hinges, and dimensions of exterior mounted devices. Identify equipment manufacturer and model numbers by placing a number next to the piece of equipment on the drawing and cross-referencing with the Bill of Materials. In addition to the Bill of Materials cross-reference labeling, label PLC I/O modules on the drawing with the manufacturers complete model numbers.

i. Elementary diagram drawings in 11-inch by 17-inch format, detailing all enclosure electrical components including, but not limited to, power line isolators, surge suppression, UPS, power supplies, fuses, duplex receptacles, indicating lights, switches, and control relays. Diagrams shall include terminal point designations, line reference numbers, and wire numbers. All wires shall maintain the same wire number for the entire contiguous segment of wire. Diagrams shall illustrate all network cabling and DC and AC electrical distribution. Drawing shall illustrate all available instrument terminations, both used and unused, and be labeled with the manufacturer’s terminal point label as will be found on the installed instrument. Provide a legend on this sheet for all symbols and general notes used on this sheet and on the PLC I/O module detail drawings.

j. Scaled PLC I/O module detail drawings, in 11-inch by 17-inch format, for each card installed in the PLC backplane. Detail the wiring of all terminations on the PLC I/O module including, wiring of all I/O points and power. Illustrate all terminations points for each signal including termination points for terminal blocks, relays, etc. Identify each wires color and wire number. Utilize NFPA 79 standards to illustrate termination points: to an MCC, to a device terminal, to a control panel terminal, to fused blocks, to surge suppressor blocks, etc. Label the each point on PLC I/O modules with the PLCs physical address. Utilize NFPA 79 standards for illustration of wiring: internal to the PLC enclosure, outside the PLC panel, and integral to a device. Progression of I/O modules detail drawings shall be in the order of the orientation of the I/O modules in the PLC backplane (e.g. Slots 1 and 2 on sheet 7, Slots 3 and 4 on sheet 8, etc.). Not more than two card details shall be shown on any one drawing. Each I/O module shall be labeled with the installed rack and slot number. Illustrate installed spare I/O modules, but it is not necessary to detail slot filler cards. Each drawing title shall have the following format:

1) Line 1: PLC Name (e.g. “Stormwater Pump Station 3, PLC-SPS”)

2) Line 2: Module Type (e.g. “Discrete Inputs”, “Combo Module: AI, AO, DI, DO”, etc.)



3) Line 3: Installed Rack and Slot (e.g. “Rack 1, Slots 3 and 4”)

k. Label all PLC I/O module termination points an I/O point description as shown on the PLC I/O lists. For I/O list points that lack certain information, create descriptions that are in accordance with ISA Standard 5.1. Each point description shall utilize the following format:

1) Line 1: Equipment Description (e.g. “Sewage Transfer Pump 1, P- 7005”, “Sewage Pump 2, P-7006”, “Wet Well Level Transmitter, LT- 7001”, etc.)

2) Line 2: Signal Description (e.g. “Run Indication”, “Flow Indication”, etc.)

3) Line 3: Signal Functional Designation (e.g. “YI-XXXX”, “FI-XXXX”, where “XXXX” is the instrument loop number.)

l. Include one AutoCAD drawing of the SCADA system network architecture. Detail all Ethernet switches, Category 6 cabling, radios, antennas, PC Ethernet cards, PLC CPUs, and all other details required to illustrate to the Engineer that the Contractor is proposing a communication network that meets the requirements of the completed system as specified in the Division 17 specifications and on the Contract Drawings. Illustrate location of the detailed equipment in the appropriate buildings and rooms. Label all communication cabling and connector types. Illustrate all communication ports of the equipment as they will be found in the field, including spare and unused ports. Illustrate all DIP-switch and jumper settings.

m. Provide two copies of all the above specified AutoCAD *dwg. files on DVD- ROM at the end of the project. Drawing files must be capable of being used by others and saved to the disk in *.dwg format.

2. Submit manufacturer information on all software.

3. Calculations to substantiate sizing of each UPS. For each UPS, itemize all equipment drawing from the UPS and compare the respective current and power draws and to the manufacturer’s rating of current draw for the specified amount of time.

4. Unless the manufacturer is specifically named in these specifications, the following must be provided along with the manufacturer information for the proposed “or equals”. Provide the following information for a minimum of 20 references for the Engineer to verify seven of these installations: name and address of the client and location of installation, if different; name of the person in direct responsible charge; consulting design engineer; system programmer; details of the equipment; installation date; startup date; and full performance details. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide this information. Include all travel costs for Engineer to visit two of the referenced installations.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section



17000, Instrumentation. Substantial completion for this section will not be approved until the Engineer and Owner has approved Operation and Maintenance manuals.

1. Maintenance, troubleshooting, and replacement of PLC cards, racks, CPU, battery, and all associated equipment.

2. All “as built” AutoCAD *.dwg files on CD ROM and 11-inch by 17-inch printed hardcopies.

3. Warranties – Provide the warranties for the PLC, cards, programming software, operator interface, and all other PLC enclosure equipment in a section entitled “Warranties.” Equipment covered, dates of expiration, contacts and procedures to exercise each warranty, and limitations of warranty shall be explicitly noted. All warranty papers shall be completely filled out by the Contractor with all necessary serial and model numbers.

4. One manufacturer supplied programming manual for the supplied PLC(s).

C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Sections 01640, Equipment - General and 01300, Submittals. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Revise AutoCAD drawings of individual I/O cards to reflect all scaling. Coordinate with the PLC programmer for each points scaling.

2. Update the Operation and Maintenance Manual AutoCAD, or higher, drawing hardcopies and CD-ROM with the “as built” drawings.

3. Updated AutoCAD drawings to indicate any changes made during installation or startup of the equipment provided under this section.

4. Updated Bill of Materials reflecting any changes in manufacturers, models, or quantities.

5. Updated Bill of Materials for spare parts supplied.

1.7. QUALIFICATIONS

A. All PLC communication modules shall natively support the Modbus TCP communication protocol.

B. PLC Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 10 years' documented experience, and with authorized service facilities within 250 miles of the project site. Field technicians dispatch sites (i.e. home residences, etc.) do not satiate this distance requirement.

C. System Supplier – Company specializing in the fabrication of control panels incorporating PLCs.

1. System supplier shall have a minimum of five years of experience fabricating industrial and municipal control panels, with a minimum of three projects of equal



or greater size as this project.

2. Submit names and telephone numbers for a minimum of three similarly sized projects. Names and telephone numbers shall be for the project end users and design engineers.

3. System supplier shall employ in excess of 25 personnel, including no less than15 technical staff to include engineers, programmers, and field technicians. Engineer may request documentation to substantiate this requirement.

D. Minimum of one professional engineer in the direct employ of the system supplier.

1.8. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with shipping.

B. Contractor is responsible for preparing the assembled PLCs and associated equipment for shipping and shipping them to the project site.

C. Deliver, Store, protect, and handle products to the site under provisions of Sections 01600, Materials and Equipment; 01640, Equipment – General; and 16050, Electrical - General.

1. Shipping to all locations for all equipment provided under this section shall utilize accelerometer or 3-axis dye packets to indicate whether acceleration or deceleration of three times the force of gravity (3G) has been exceeded. If acceleration/deceleration has been exceeded, Contractor shall pay for disassembly, damage repair, and reassembly of the shipped units. If any damage is apparent from inspection at time of delivery, Contractor is responsible for all costs involved in disassembly, damage repair, reassembly, and additional shipping back to the manufacturer’s facility if deemed necessary by Engineer. Accelerometers shall be dye packet devices and shall not be reusable or resettable.

D. Accept products on site in factory containers unless systems are completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.

E. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.

F. Contractor shall provide risk/hazard insurance for property of Owner/Engineer/Contractor for all equipment provided under this section.

1. Insurance shall be in accordance with Supplementary Conditions, Article 5.

2. Submit proof of insurance prior to shipping PLCs.

G. Shop Testing - Systems integrator shall perform shop testing of all PLC panels in the system integrator’s facility prior to shipment of any PLC panels to the job site. Testing shall include:

1. System integrator shall create and install a basic program in the PLC CPU to monitor the status of all physical PLC I/O.



2. Utilize one copy of the Engineer-approved PLC shop drawing I/O module wiring diagrams as a checklist and simulate I/O states on the field instrument connect side of the PLC enclosure terminal strip. To test discrete points, physically make contact closures for all discrete signals. To test analog inputs, utilize a signal generator to drive a three 4-20 mA input signal, 4mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA. To test analog outputs, write three analog outputs in the basic PLC program and verify the signal using a digital multimeter, using 4 mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA as write values.

3. Document testing by marking up each point on the shop drawing. Supply the marked up shop drawing to the Engineer for approval before panel shipment.

H. Contractor shall provide risk/hazard insurance for property of Owner/Engineer/Contractor for all equipment provided under this section.

1. Insurance shall be in accordance with Supplementary Conditions, Article 5.

2. Submit proof of insurance prior to shipping PLCs.

1.9. MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish manufacturers, or designated authorized representatives, service and maintenance for Programmable Logic Controllers a minimum of two years from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide Owner with a toll-free phone number for technical information and assistance on the PLC and system programming or reimburse Owner for calls made due to system maintenance, debug, tuning, etc. requirement during the two-year warranty period.

C. PLC Equipment Replacement During Construction – Contractor shall replace PLC components when directed to do so by the Programmer. Contractor shall provide all costs necessary to return components that are suspect of damage to the manufacturer for testing and are responsible for returning repaired modules and reinstalling in place of the temporary replacement module. When available, temporary replacement modules may be taken from uninstalled spare inventory. When the required temporary replacement modules are not available in the uninstalled spare inventory, Contractor shall obtain the necessary temporary replacement module(s) within 48 hours of directive by the Programmer.

1.10. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the compatibility of the power supplies and PLC cards with the new instrumentation, existing systems, and equipment. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Power supplies provide powered equipment with adequate voltage and amperage according to the connecting equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Refer to Contract Drawings for designations and verify with Owner.

C. Coordinate PLC panel shop acceptance test demonstration specified in Section 17010, Control Systems Integrator, with the Owner and Engineer. Request for demonstration date shall be in writing no less than two weeks in advance of the proposed date.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PLC MANUFACTURERS

A. For PLCs listed in Table 17100-1, provide the following type of PLC:

1. Modicon, Model M340. No like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item is permitted.

2.2. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)

A. General Description

1. Programmable controller manufactured to NEMA ICS 3 with component circuit boards manufactured to NEMA ICS 2.

2. Rack-mounted design. Modular.

3. Provide all terminal blocks, wiring arms.

4. Ability to program through an IBM compatible computer.

5. Provide all power supplies, cabling, surge protection, input/output (I/O) racks, extensions, and ladder logic program to accommodate required I/O and system control as specified in previous sections.

6. PLC Programmable software shall be Unity XL Group, in strict accordance with IEC 1131-3 standards. No exceptions.

7. OIT Programming software shall be Schneider Electric, Vijeo Designer configuration software version 6.1 or higher.

B. Configuration

1. Processor Unit - Include processor, power supply, EEPROM memory, input/output modules, and special modules required to communicate with other PLCs and other equipment designated to communicate digitally with the PLCs.

2. PLC Module Capacity

a. Utilize BMXXBP1200 12-slot backplanes exclusively.

b. Provide a minimum of five spare slots for the PLC. Distribute spare slots such that each I/O rack has a minimum of two spare slots.

c. Provide covers for empty slots.

C. PLC CPUs

1. Memory Size - Minimum 8K of logic memory, 512k RAM, minimum.

2. Processing Speed – Final program scan time shall not exceed 5 milliseconds in any



one PLC. In PLCs where the scan time exceeds this requirement, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Reserve Memory – Final program shall not exceed 65 percent of the available CPU program capacity. In PLCs where the program occupies more than this amount, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. CPU microprocessor shall be by Intel, AMD, or Motorola.

5. Each CPU shall be able to address a minimum of 1024 I/O points. Provide quantities of CPUs as recommended by the manufacturer for the quantities of I/O points for each PLC provided.

6. CPU shall have a minimum of one communication port for Modbus TCP and one serial communication port for programming and interface with setpoint station. Minimum speed of the serial communication ports shall be 19,200 BPS. Ethernet port shall provide 10 MBS data transfer to the network, hence intermediary communication adapters that reduce this data transfer rate are not acceptable.

D. Input/Output Units

1. PLC

a. All I/O modules for PLCs shall be of the same form-factor as the PLC CPU and shall plug into the PLC backplane (rack).

b. Use discrete I/O modules with a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 16 points each, 24VDC or 120VAC as required by I/O lists. Discrete outputs shall be isolated. All discrete input modules shall have the same number of points. All discrete output modules shall have the same number of points.

c. Use analog I/O cards with a maximum of 8 channels per card. Use voltage, current, or other analog arrangements as required by I/O lists. Analog I/O shall have minimum 12-bit resolution. All analog inputs and outputs shall be isolated. All analog modules shall have the same number of points.

d. Combination I/O modules are not acceptable.

2. Installed Spare I/O - Provide the following installed spare I/O:

a. Provide a minimum of eight (8) discrete inputs at the PLC.b. Provide a minimum of eight (8) discrete outputs at the PLC.

c. Provide a minimum of four (4) analog inputs at the PLC.

d. Provide a minimum of four (4) analog outputs at the PLC.

e. Wire all installed spare points to terminal strips. These terminal blocks do not count toward installed spare terminal blocks.

f. Discrete outputs shall be isolated using an interposing relay. Provide relays



for used and installed spare discrete outputs.

g. In PLC enclosures where signal isolators are used to isolate analog inputs or analog outputs, provide signal isolators for each installed spare analog I/O point.

3. Refer to I/O list for I/O points for each PLC enclosure.

a. All I/O shall be wired to terminal strips. Where relays, intrinsically safe barriers and/or surge protection for I/O are required, wiring shall be from the I/O module to the relay, barrier, or surge protector to the terminal strip.

b. Provide intrinsically safe barriers for I/O originating in hazardous areas as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Installation and separation of wiring shall be in full accordance with the latest revision of the NEC.

c. Provide surge protection in accordance with Section 17000, Instrumentation. Surge protection shall be located on a separate DIN rail from the terminal strips.

d. Provide loop and external power supplies for all field devices that require such power.

e. Provide 120 VAC power for all 120 VAC discrete outputs.

f. Provide 24 VDC power for all discrete inputs.

E. Local monitoring and control of the system shall be through an OIT panel mounted to the system control panel.

1. OIT manufacturer and model shall be Schneider Electric, Magelis GTO.

2. OIT shall be door mounted with a centerline height 5 feet 0 inches above the finished floor.

3. Communications between the OIT and PLC shall be via Ethernet through an Ethernet switch in the system control panel.

4. OIT Screen size shall be 12.1 inch minimum.

2.3. STRATEGIC WIRING OF I/O

A. Wiring of I/O shall be planned such that the failure of any single PLC I/O module minimally affects an overall process. The following guidelines shall be adhered to:

1. Control outputs for multiple pumps of similar purpose shall be distributed across separate PLC output modules.

2. Where redundant monitoring is designed, such as redundant level transmitters, the signals shall be located on separate I/O modules.



3. For system components that are distributed across multiple modules, the wiring location on the PLC I/O module shall be consistent for that signal across each of the I/O modules over which similar equipment is distributed. To illustrate, if pump 1’s run indication is wired to input 1 on module 5, then pump 2 and pump 3’s run indication shall also be wired to input 1 on their respective input modules.

4. It is understood that the above strategic I/O wiring requirements will result in the use of additional modules with installed spares that are not necessarily in contiguous ranges.

5. Relocate I/O points as directed by the Engineer through the shop drawing reviews.

2.4. PLC ASSEMBLY

A. All PLCs shall be housed in a section of the respective MCC. All PLC sections shall be appropriately sized to accommodate all I/O modules, power supplies, communication equipment, etc. as specified within this Section and as necessary to perform the required functions.

B. Power shall originate from each side of the split bus bars, located in the MCC. Provide two 480 Volt to 120 Volt control power transformers fused on primary and secondary sides.

C. Reserve/allocate space within the assembly for the future provision of a 10-slot rack on the rear subpanel. Label “Reserved for Future Provisions” on drawings.

D. Refer to Electrical Contract Drawings for locations and space available for PLCs.

E. Each assembly shall have two ground busses, one for instrumentation cable shields and assembly grounding and one for signal grounding.

F. Provide grounding lugs for connection to the external grounding system.

G. Provide a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), 15-amp duplex receptacle in each PLC assembly. To be used as a service outlet with both outlets available.

H. Provide a fluorescent light package in each assembly. Florescent light shall utilize a manual light switch, terminal block, and non-yellowing PVC lens. Light shall not energize automatically when door is opened. Light shall be Hoffman, Model A-LF16M24, or equal.

I. Provide one externally mounted NEMA 4X rated RJ-45 Ethernet port with 120 VAC outlet. Manufacturer shall be GracePort, Model P-ES-M4RFIS or equal.

J. Terminal Blocks

1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN-Rail mounted compression-screw type.

2. Label via machine printed zack strips as supplied by the terminal block manufacturer. Zack strips shall be plastic labels specifically designed for the supplied terminal block. Zack strips shall be capable of being separated to label stand-alone terminal block, if necessary.



3. Screwless terminal blocks are not acceptable.

4. Provide installed spare terminal blocks to accommodate wiring of PLC I/O modules provided in empty slots. Of the remaining empty slots, estimate half will be 8-point analog cards and half will be 16-point discrete cards. Mount installed spare terminal blocks in a contiguous strip next to the utilized discrete input, output, analog input, or output strips.

5. For discrete I/O, utilize single tier terminal blocks (Phoenix Contact, Model UK 5N, or equal). For analog I/O, utilize double tier terminal blocks with grounding foot (Phoenix Contact, Model SLKK 5, or equal).

K. Fuse Blocks

1. Fuse blocks shall utilize slow or fast blow glass fuses as appropriate for the protected device.

2. Fuse block shall have an LED that illuminates when the fuse has blown.

3. Label via machine printed zack strips as supplied by the fuse block manufacturer. Zack strips shall be plastic labels specifically designed for the supplied fuse block. Zack strips shall be capable of being separated to label stand-alone fuse block, if necessary

4. Provide installed spare fuse blocks to accommodate wiring of additional PLC I/O modules. Estimate as is done for terminal blocks.

5. Fuse block manufacturer shall be Phoenix Contact, model UK5-HESI, or equal.

L. Relays

1. Provide relays for all discrete outputs.

2. Characteristics: Plug-in, spade terminal style with pilot light and retainer clip. All relays shall be DPDT rated 10A, minimum. Din-rail mount relays.

3. Manufacturer shall be Square D, type KU, or equal.

M. Wireway

1. Employ plastic wireways a minimum of 4 inches wide x 3 inches deep or 3 inches wide x 4 inches deep complete with fine fingers. Wireways must be suitably sized for both field and internal panel wiring. Wireways to not be filled beyond 80 percent capacity during the initial fabrication.

2. Provide Velcro tie wraps where segregation is required.

3. Segregate signal wiring within the same raceway from control power wiring according to the following categories: power 120VAC, analog 24 VDC, digital 120VAC, digital 24VDC and communication wiring.



4. All wiring to be installed so that only 3 to 4 inches of slack is within the wireways.

5. Provide covers for all wireways.

6. Minimum distance to be maintained between wireway, terminal strips, and 120VAC connections (circuit breakers) is 2 inches.

7. Size width and depth based on 50 percent of area fill. Check the applicable codes to verify fill.

N. Provide Intrinsically-Safe Barriers and Intrinsically-Safe Relays for all circuits passing thru hazardous areas. Hazardous Areas are identified on Contract Drawings.

O. Assembly Nameplates – Provide the following machine engraved nameplates permanently affixed to the front door of each PLC assembly:

1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) – Calculate and display SCCR per UL508A Supplement SB. Contractor shall establish the SCCR of individual, relevant power circuit components; apply current limiting components to modify the SCCR in a portion of a circuit in the panel; and determine the overall SCCR of the panel. Submit itemized SCCR calculations with PLC shop drawings. On the nameplate, identify:

a. The panel builder company name and address.

b. Main supply voltage, phase, and frequency.

c. Electrical power full load current, largest motor FLA, and SCCR.

d. Assembly type rating.

e. The lighting panel name (i.e., LP-1) and circuit breaker position (i.e., CB-15).

2. Assembly Nameplate – Nameplate as required by Table 17100-1.

P. Install pertinent final I/O lists, elementary diagrams, and PLC card wiring diagrams in the assembly of each PLC provided under this Contract. Drawings shall be laminated and bound via a plastic zip strip through a metallic grommet in the upper left-hand corner of each drawing.

2.5. DOOR CONTACT

A. Provide a door contact as required by Contract Documents.

B. Specifications

1. Classifications

a. UL and ULC approved

b. UL 10C Fire Rates



2. Wide gap up to 3 inches.

3. Screw terminals.

4. Screw mount.

5. Concealed terminals.

6. Spacer and mounting screws included.

7. Maximum Switching Current - .4 A.

8. Switch Type – Form A (SPST).

9. Lifetime warranty.

C. Manufacturer - George Risk Industries, Model 400WG-W.

2.6. RADIO EQUIPMENT

A. Licensing (or General)

1. The system supplier shall be responsible for obtaining the FCC station and operating licenses, which will entail:

a. Obtaining FCC approval for system operation

b. Preparing all materials required by the FCC

c. Obtaining all license application forms, write in all required information, forward to the Owner for signature(s), and deliver the completed forms to the appropriate person(s).

d. Providing all information required by the area frequency coordinator.

e. All other cost associated with the application process.

2. Completed license application(s) shall be submitted with shop drawings. Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation, and submittals of this section.

B. Transceivers shall be 100-percent solid state units operating in the ISM 902-928 license-free frequency Mega-Hertz range. All radio connections shall be via plug-in connectors. FM transceivers shall meet the following as a minimum:

1. Transceiver

a. 1-watt power output.

b. Data Rate- 300… 57, 6 kBit/s



c. File format/coding – Asynchronous

d. Power Supply – 24 VDC

e. Transmit Capacity, Minimum – 10 dBm

f. Transmit Capacity, Minimum – 30 dBm

g. DIN Rail mountable

2. Transmitter/receiver shall be integral to one transceiver. Only one transceiver shall be required to retransmit information passed from another PLC as well as perform its own communications.

3. The radio shall include system diagnostic capability to permit continuous and automatic monitoring of key radio operating parameters and alarm conditions.

4. Manufacturer shall be Phoenix Contact Wireless Modem, model RAD-ISM-900-EN- BD.

5. Provide transceivers for PLCs as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.7. ANTENNAS

A. General Description – Provide antennas, and associated appurtenances, at the location as shown on the Contract Drawings. The PLC shall communicate via a spread spectrum radio sending and receiving signals with the assistance of an antenna. Optimal communication requires (minimally) that each antenna have a straight line of transmission, free from natural obstruction, to other site antennas.

1. Yagi (Directional) Antennas

a. Gain - 8.5 dBi.

b. Horizontal beamwidth – 100°.

c. Vertical beamwidth - 62°.

B. System supplier shall provide an antenna for the PLC as required to achieve the overall communications requirements of the system (refer to PLC communication system quality requirements). Antennas shall be directional (Yagi) and suitable for outdoor environments. Mounted antennas shall be of all aluminum construction and rated to withstand at least 124 MPH winds with 0.5-inch radial ice.

C. Antennas shall be attached to the pump station unless the pump station or poles are not available, in which case the Contractor shall provide poles to mount antennas. Particular attention shall be given to the correct installation of the antennas to give adequate protection from nearby lightning strikes.

D. System supplier shall provide all mounting masts, or poles, as required to support the antennas at the elevations (not to exceed 20 feet from the top of structure unless justified to



the Engineer) and orientations required. Masts and poles shall be suitable for outdoor environmental conditions, provide adequate support and protection for transmission lines and be provided complete with all necessary mounting accessories.

E. Provide TVSS in the Pump Control Panel as illustrated on the Contract Drawings.

F. Cable

1. Manufacturer – Phoenix Contact, model RAD-CAB-RG213-XX (where XX is the length of cable) or equal.

2. Adequate lengths of cable shall be provided for connection to the antenna to the radio transceiver at the site. Involve Manufacturer of PLC in sizing of cable length.

3. Other Requirements

a. Impedance - 50 Ohm.

b. Operating Temperature - -40 to 75 degrees C.

4. Transmission line shall be terminated only with connectors rated for the required service.

5. Provide a lightning arrestor between the transceiver and coaxial cable.

6. Installer is responsible for cable damage due to neglect of manufacturer stated bending radius.

G. Installation

1. Mount antennas as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Provide 316 stainless steel mounting hardware, including, but not limited to, nuts, bolts, washers, lock-washers, and U-bolts.

3. Where entering a structure/enclosure/building from out-of-doors, manage the cable into a drip loop. Where cabling enters structures from outside, provide a rubber boot with skirt to surround penetration by six times the penetration diameter. Fill gap between skirt and structure with appropriate adhesive. Shrinkwrap or use adhesive to permanently fix rubber boot to exterior exposed antenna cable for 6 inches outside penetration.

4. Yagis Antennas – Mounted antenna shall be able to rotate 360 degrees free from obstruction. Antenna shall be accessible, as future calibration of radio signal strength will require handling the antenna.



2.8. PLC ACCESSORIES

A. 24 VDC Power Supply

1. Provide a sufficient quantity of 24 VDC power supplies as necessary to power PLC equipment and instrumentation connected to the PLC.

2. Power supplies shall be manufactured by Phoenix Contact Quint-PS Series, Schneider Electric Phaseo ABL8 Series or equal. Power supplies shall meet, or exceed, the following requirements.

a. UL 508 listed, CE approved.

b. Din rail mounted.

c. Removable, pluggable connections for input and output power.

d. Local output status indication light.

e. Overload protection - Current limited to a preset value.

f. 86 percent efficient.

g. Output Voltage - 24 VDC +5 percent adjustable.

h. Temperature range: -20 to 50 degrees C.

i. Mean lifetime of 500,000 hours.

j. Two-year warranty.

k. Ripple and Noise - 24 mV RMS, 200-mV peak to peak.

l. Accept input voltages of both 120 VAC and 240 VAC.

m. Fully enclosed, touch-safe.

3. Power supplies shall be supplied in redundant pairs, with each pair provided with a redundancy module of the same manufacturer as the power supplies and specifically designed for use as a redundancy module for the furnished power supplies. Redundancy module shall accept two independent inputs and provide one power source output. Redundancy module shall automatically decouple the standby power supply to remove the load from the standby power supply when the primary power supply is operational and functioning properly. Redundancy module shall provide dry contact outputs indicating the health of each power supply. The redundancy module shall have integral LEDs indicating the status of each power supply. Transition of power between the primary and standby power supply shall not affect continuity of power to any of the supplied loads.



B. I/O Signal Surge Suppressors

1. Provide I/O surge suppression for all discrete and analog signals terminating or originating outdoors or in other buildings and as specified in Section 17000.

2. PLC Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) – Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) based surge suppression with an active tracking filter.

a. Provide one power protection device for each PLC enclosure.

b. Manufacturer –Phoenix Contact, Model Islatrol IE; or equal.

c. Minimum of 160 Joules protection between line-neutral, line-ground, and neutral-ground for a total of 480 Joules protection.

d. Response time – less than 1 nanosecond (in Normal Mode).

e. 40kOhm surge capability on an 8x20 microsecond waveform.

f. UL1449 listed for safety and performance.

g. Manufactured by an ISO 9001 company.

h. Load side sine wave tracking circuitry.

i. Arrays of MOVs shall be located directly on the load side terminals and line side terminals to minimize response time.

j. Enclosure – sand packed or epoxy filled.

2.9. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Characteristics

1. Provide one Online Double Conversion UPS for each PLC. Line Interactive, Offline-Standby, Double Conversion On Demand, and Ferro-resonant technologies are not acceptable.

2. Minimum Watt Capacity - See “C” below.

3. Minimum Volt-ampere Capacity - See “C” below.

4. Four 120 volt, 5-15R, output receptacles, minimum.

5. Alarms - Battery backup operation, low run time remaining, and overload. Alarms to be over ethernet communications.

6. Automatic current and over-voltage output protection.

7. Operating Input Voltage - 99 VAC - 138 VAC.



8. No interruption (no transfer time for normal power to battery backup) of power to the PLC system.

9. Efficiency - 95 percent.

10. Brownout protection for input voltages of 88 VAC without the use of the batteries.

11. Lightning and Surge Protection - ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Categories A and B with 0.3 percent to 0.7 percent.

12. Radio Frequency Noise Isolation - 38 dB common mode, 47 dB normal mode.

13. Power Reserve Time at Full Power Draw - One hour, minimum. See “C” below for power draw requirements. SCADA system supplier shall submit calculations to substantiate sizing.

B. Manufacturer - Powerware, Model 9130, or equal.

C. PLC power supply shall be backed up by the UPS. The required capacity of the UPS shall be determined by the load requirements of the PLC and its peripherals. As a minimum, the UPS shall maintain power to the entire panel, all communication devices and modules, all relays, all loop power supplies, all indicators, the PLC, and all PLC I/O that is powered from the panel, setpoint station, but not the heating/cooling system for the panel.

D. It is preferred that the UPS be located in the same enclosure as the PLC, unless panel size or cooling requirements make it impractical. In that case, it shall be located on a wall shelf located above the PLC enclosure. Shelf shall be provided by the Contractor.

2.10. INTERNAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

A. Characteristics

1. Provide one wall mount temperature sensor for each PLC enclosure within 18 inches of the PLC CPU. Provide all mounting, power supplies and cable needed to connect the sensor to an analog input card on the PLC.

2. The temperature range shall be 0 to 135°F.

3. The output shall be 4-20 mA.

4. The input power shall be 24 Vdc.

B. Manufacturer – OMEGA EWS-TX, Veris Industries TEA Series or equal

2.11. ETHERNET SWITCHES (DIN-RAIL MOUNTED)

A. General

1. Provide DIN-rail mounted Fast Ethernet switches for mounting in PLC enclosures as identified on the SCADA Architecture diagram.



2. Provide quantities of switches in each location shown in the SCADA Architecture diagram as necessary to achieve the total quantity of copper Ethernet ports required. Provide the quantities of copper ports illustrated on the SCADA Architecture Diagram, with the following minimum: maintain 100-percent spare ports in each enclosure with a minimum of two (2) unused ports in each Ethernet switch and/or expansion module.

3. Specifications

a. Software Layer 2 Enhanced with Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping enabled.

b. DIN-rail mounted, fanless design.

c. Manufacturer-rated for industrial use, including temperatures of 0 to 60 degrees C, humidity 10 to 95 percent non-condensing, and an Mean Time Between Failures (MTBE) manufacturer rating greater than 40 years.

d. IEC 60068-2-27 conformity for shock. Capable of withstanding 18 shocks at 15 g of 11 ms in duration.

e. IEC 60068-2-6 conformity for vibration.

f. EN 61000-4 conformity for immunity to electro-magnetic interference (EMI).

g. Support 256 virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).

h. Removable terminal blocks with screw compression.

i. Capable of being powered from redundant/dual DC power supply sources.

j. LEDs for Link and Activity per port. Failure LED for switch.

k. Device configuration and monitoring shall be achieved through a web- browser interface via the Ethernet TCP/IP protocol. The device shall include an embedded web server to access configuration and status pages. Ethernet switches that utilize separate configuration software packages are not acceptable.

l. One Form C relay output contact, user-configurable to indicate start-up failure, a broken ring segment, or other warning events.

4. Manufacturers shall be:

a. Phoenix Contact

b. N-Tron equipment is not acceptable

5. Completely compatible and optimized by the CSI for use with the supplied PLC CPU’s and other networked equipment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.

E. Verify grounding of system.

3.2. PANEL FABRICATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Wire Labeling

1. All wiring shall be labeled within 1.0-inch of stripped sheathing.

2. Wire label text shall be visible in its installed location without manual manipulation.

3. Wire shall carry the same wire number for an entire contiguous segment.

4. Wires shall be labeled, black lettering on white background, via machine-generated print, on heat-shrink polyolefin, wire marker sleeves.

5. In the event that labels begin to fall off or text begins to smudge, or otherwise begin to become illegible, within one year of panel delivery to the site, the Contractor shall remove all labels within the panel with new labels at the Contractor’s own expense. In this case, the Engineer must approve replacement labels.

C. Device Labeling - All subpanel mounted devices shall be labeled.

1. Devices that do not require external power (24 VDC or 120 VAC) shall be labeled via machine-generated print on polyester or polyvinyl film. Print shall not be capable of being washed off, smudged, or erased. Labeled components include, but are not limited to, individual terminal blocks, control relays, individual fuses, individual I/O surge suppressors, and grounding bars.

2. Devices that require 24 VDC external power or 120 VAC shall be labeled via machine engraved plastic nameplates utilizing white text on black background. Nameplates shall be secured to the subpanel via permanent adhesives. Labeled components include, but are not limited to, disconnect switches, TVSS, power supplies, PLC backplanes, circuit breakers, DIN-rail strips, radios, Ethernet switches, UPSs, and convenience receptacles.

3. Exemptions – Individual PLC I/O modules only.



D. Supplier Fabricated Cabling – All cabling fabricated by the panel fabricator

3.3. SHOP TESTING

A. To verify that all PLCs are ready for system programming, the system’s integrator shall perform the following shop testing prior to shipment to the site:

1. Perform a test configuration on all PLC modules to verify that all PLC CPUs communicate with the associated I/O modules, including inter-rack communication.

2. Perform a test configuration of all device servers to verify that the PLC communicates with a Modbus device connected to each device server. Install the battery backup, UPS, and power supplies, simulate all device outputs to the PLC, and verify that the signals are read properly at the PLC. As part of the testing of the UPS, fully charge the UPS battery and disconnect line power from the UPS and verify that:

a. “Power Loss” is sensed by the PLC when line power is disconnected.

b. Verify that when the UPS battery low that “Low UPS Battery” is sensed by the UPS.

c. Record the time it takes for the UPS battery to completely drain from full charge once line power is disconnected from the PLC panel.

3. Point test all PLC I/O to verify that all I/O modules are correctly wired to the terminal strips and that the PLC I/O modules function properly. Testing shall be performed between terminal points on the I/O module to the terminal strip the electrician will terminate field wiring to.

4. For PLC communicating via radio, load configuration programs in each PLC to establish communication synchronization.

5. Leave all configuration programs in the PLC CPU.

6. Perform testing to verify that the Ethernet communication between the PLCs is in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.

B. After all testing has been successfully completed, contact the Engineer to schedule an in- shop inspection by the Engineer. Contractor shall have the personnel that performed the testing present to perform random verification of the tests performed by the integrator.

C. Submit a written report to the Engineer prior to scheduling Engineer’s in-shop inspection.

D. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and a qualified engineer to properly perform all tests required.

E. FAT shall not be approved and authorized for shipment from the fabricator’s facility until PLC wiring diagrams are updated to reflect “As Fabricated” conditions and marked “As Built”.



3.4. INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All electrical work performed in fabrication and installation of Programmable Logic Controller systems shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Division 16 (Electrical) Specifications.

C. Contractor is responsible for aligning all antennas and testing communication strength in the field.

D. Radio Communication Requirements with Remote PLC via Radio – The MTU shall communicate with the RTU located remotely, in regards to the water treatment facility, with a 92 percent hit rate of successful pollings within a 24-hour period for five consecutive days. Should this quality stipulation not be obtained one week after the last RTU is brought on-line, the system supplier shall provide replacement RTUs, labor, wiring, power, and all necessary supporting equipment, to be strategically placed and retransmitted from at their own expense until this stipulation is obtained during a 24-hour period for 5 consecutive days.

3.5. SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. The programmer shall provide all system programming to implement system description in accordance with Section 17101, Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Programming. The programmer shall modify all programming to meet the requirements of the Owner.

B. The programmer shall provide additional programming services as required by Owner if system needs modification to function properly.

C. Programmer shall provide for programming of an additional 10 points of I/O. If these services are not used a credit shall be provided to the Owner.

D. The Contractor and programmer shall schedule system programming with the Owner. Upon request, the programmer shall visit the site within 24 hours of request.

3.6. MANUFACTURER’S OR SYSTEM INTEGRATOR’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide a minimum of three, four-hour days of on-site time for supervision of installation and hardware troubleshooting at Engineer’s request. The three days of on-site time may be required over a span of one month. Written notification of the days required for troubleshooting and installation supervision will be sent to the Contractor 10 business days prior to the first required day.

3.7. DEMONSTRATION AND OPERATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Sections 01600, Materials and Equipment and 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Demonstrate operation and programming of controller.

C. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:



1. Demonstrate all alarms.

2. Demonstrate changing of all setpoints.

3. Demonstrate actions upon alarm.

4. Demonstrate actions upon power loss.

5. Demonstrate all control logic.

3.8. TRAINING

A. Provide one, four-hour sessions of training to the operations staff covering the following content:

1. Reading PLC wiring diagrams. Using the Engineer reviewed and approved as-built set of the PLC wiring diagrams.

2. Identification of each component within the PLC enclosure.

3. Identify incoming sources of power and instruct on how to disconnect AC power, including bypassing and discharging the UPS.

4. UPS Maintenance and Troubleshooting – Demonstrate UPS battery replacement, bypassing UPS, interpreting integral indicator lights, determining when UPS has primary power, when UPS is on battery, when the battery is low, and when the battery requires replacement. For UPSs with USB or Ethernet accessible web status pages, demonstrate how to get online with the UPS and assess status.

5. DC Power Supply Troubleshooting – Describe methods to troubleshoot power supply operation, including measuring output voltage and comparing to required voltage. Define indicator light functions.

6. Fusing – Describe purpose and function of fuses and circuit breakers. Identify the devices each fuse/CB protects and demonstrate how to identify a blown fuse both visually as well as with a DMM. Demonstrate fuse replacement and provide guidance on identifying required Amp rating of each fuse per the As Builts.

7. PLC CPU, Communication Modules, and I/O Modules – Identify each component and detail their purpose integrating As Builts into the training. Demonstrate how to ascertain when discrete signals are energized, when analog signals are open loop, and identifying indicator light functions.

8. Module Replacement – Demonstrate proper PLC module troubleshooting and replacement procedure. Address the relationship between module fusing with module testing and distinguishing between a blow fuse, defective module, and defective field device or defective field wiring.

9. CPU Replacement – demonstrate proper PLC CPU replacement.



10. CPU Memory Battery Replacement – demonstrate proper memory battery replacement. CPU shall not lose program through demonstration.

11. Ethernet Switch Troubleshooting – Identify indicator lights and how to access Ethernet switch’s web utility for troubleshooting. Identify indicator lights and, using the link and activity lights, instruct on how to identify a disconnected link and how activity lights display when properly functioning. Demonstrate Ethernet switch replacement.

12. TVSS – Identify TVSS and demonstrate troubleshooting and replacement.

13. Analog Signal Testing – Using a DMM, provide hands on demonstration on how to test an analog circuit for 4-20 mA current, including breaking the loop and inserting the DMM in series with the load.

14. Discrete Signal Testing – Using a DMM, provide hands on demonstration on how to test a discrete circuit for continuity and voltage.

15. Networking Equipment – Identify and explain purpose of all networking equipment within the PLC enclosure.

16. Address additional questions by Owner to complete each training session.

B. All procedures shall be as recommended by the respective equipment manufacturer.

C. Procedures shall be physically performed rather than discussed in theory.

D. Training shall be video recorded and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

3.9. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING

A. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall be given the Owner at least two weeks in advance.

3.10. TEST EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and a qualified engineer to properly perform all tests required.

3.11. FACTORY-TRAINED SUPERVISION

A. The Contractor shall include in his work the providing of necessary factory trained supervision to check over equipment for proper functioning before putting the equipment into operation as may be required by these specifications. This shall include establishing a simulated fault on checking out the coordination of the protective devices.



B. Point-to-point test of all wiring.

C. Functional test of all equipment, modes, alarms, controls.



PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PROGRAMMING 17101 - 1

SECTION 17101 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PROGRAMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Functional requirements for the programming of the PLCs and Operator Interface Terminals (OITs) specified under Section 17100, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).


A. The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:

1. Division 1.

2. All Division 17 specifications.

1.3. REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems

B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems

C. ISA - Standards 5.1 and 5.4

D. IEC – 1131.3 Programming Standards

1.4. DEFINITIONS

A. Input/Output List – When references are made to the “I/O list”, it is implicit that derived I/O, included in the “Functional Designation” column, shall be included.

B. Physical I/O Point – An input or output wired to a PLC I/O module.

C. Equipment Identification Number – Numbers developed by the Engineer to identify equipment in the field, in PLC programs, and in supervisory programs. Equipment Identification Numbers are shown on the PLC I/O lists in “Item No” and “Equipment Designation” columns. Equipment Identification Numbers are in accordance with ISA standards 5.1 and 5.4.

D. Functional Designation – Column of the PLC I/O lists that identifies some of the PLC I/O registers required for each physical I/O point. Functional designations are in accordance with ISA standards 5.1 and 5.4. The functional designation shall always be identified in conjunction with the item number for each physical I/O point.

E. I/O Type – A PLC register type. Referring to either an integer, floating point (or real), or



digital register.

1.5. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the programmer. Submit the programmer’s qualifications and experience along with the names, addresses, telephone numbers, and dates of a minimum of three clients for whom the proposed programmer has programmed the specified PLC with similar complexity to the work specified herein. Provide names, addresses, and phone numbers to contact these references.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Printed PLC program bound with rigid front and back covers. Three-ring binders are not acceptable. Insert a Table of Contents outlining different files within the program, a discussion of the final operational sequence, and a final I/O list associating a PLC address to each input and output to the PLC. Printed program shall include all logic documentation. Provide tabbed pages for each item listed in the Table of Contents.

2. Two copies of the fully documented program on CD-ROM including all custom created function block (DFB) logic.

C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Revise AutoCAD drawings of individual I/O cards to reflect all scaling.

2. Provide a minimum of two printed copies of the final, debugged program for the PLCs. Printed copies shall be fully documented including, but not limited to, the following:

a. All equipment names referenced in a manner consistent with the equipment names in the Contract Documents.

b. All I/O points referenced in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents.

c. Rung number cross-references for contacts, coils, timers, etc.

d. Written description of actions performed by the program.

e. All logic used in custom function blocks (DFBs).



1.6. QUALIFICATIONS

A. PLC Programmer – Shall be the CSI (MTD).

1.7. TRAINING

A. Provide training at the Owner’s facility for a minimum total time as specified below.

B. Training shall consist of one day after startup.

C. Training shall include the following:

1. Basic system concepts and maintenance procedures for all hardware and software provided.

2. Basic system concepts, troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures shall include:

a. Procedures for restarting and reloading PLC programs upon PLC failure.

b. Procedures for troubleshooting and replacement of I/O modules, CPUs, power supplies, communication modules, and other devices associated with the PLCs.

c. All installed PLC program capabilities.

d. Use of all password protected areas. Provide the Owner with all passwords.

3. Videotape the sessions and provide training manuals and two copies of the videotape. Two copies shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Engineer will forward one copy to the Owner after video review and approval.

D. Provide an additional two days of training on the general system and the final PLC program configuration during the year following Substantial Completion of the SCADA system. The training shall be held at the Owner’s facility at the Owner’s request. Coordinate scheduling with the Owner. The training subject matter shall be as requested by the Owner. Videotape the sessions and provide two copies to the Owner.

E. All training times are on-site times. All times referenced as “days” are eight hours.

1.8. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the compatibility of the hardware, software, and programming with the existing system and facility operation. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Programs effectively address all of the requirements of the system for control, display, and operation.



2. Equipment will execute the programs to obtain the intended operation.

B. Coordinate with equipment suppliers to verify that the appropriate signals and signal scaling are available to control the processes as specified.

C. Make changes in programming to provide the intended operation.

D. Coordinate demonstration to Owner with the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer. Request for demonstration date shall be in writing no less than two weeks in advance of the proposed date.

E. Provide for a minimum of one, four-hour meetings with the Owner and Engineer at the Owner’s facility to coordinate requirements for PLC programming. As a minimum, meetings shall cover:

1. Operational sequences.

2. Setpoint station configuration.

3. Sequence of construction.

F. Coordinate I/O states accordingly:

1. Communicate normal state of I/O contacts in new and existing equipment with the supervisory software programmer.

2. Communicate whether I/O contacts to and from new and existing equipment are momentary or maintained.

3. Communicate the type, zero, and span for analog signals, new and existing, which are I/O to and from the SCADA system PLCs.

G. Obtain AutoCAD PLC I/O module drawings from the supplier of the PLC enclosure revise to indicate analog I/O scaling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SOFTWARE

A. Shall be by the manufacturer of the provided PLC and support IEC 1131.3 programming standards. Provide one licensed copy of PLC programming software.

2.2. OWNERSHIP AND DELIVERY OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS

A. Software License Agreement (SLA) – Included with the cost of this specification section shall include all licensing fees and royalties (i.e., compensation) necessary for the Owner to possess, troubleshoot, maintain, append, and modify the PLC and OIT programs furnished with the system supplied herein. It is understood by the Owner that modification of these



software programs by the Owner within the warranty period, without the written consent of the program supplier, may void the remainder of the product warranty.

B. Interim Delivery of Programs – Furnish current-to-date electronic copies of PLC and/or OIT programs at the request of the Owner or an Owner’s assignee.

C. Final Delivery of Programs – At the time of Final Completion, furnish to the Owner two electronic copies of the completed programs on DVD-ROM. Furnish two replacement copies each time the program is modified thereafter. Utilize the date in the program revision number, i.e. a program modified on December 12th 2012, shall carry the revision number 12212012.

D. All programs, as well as all aspects of the programs, shall be unlocked, unencrypted, and unprotected. Custom function blocks shall not be protected or hidden.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. All programming shall be in accordance with the latest revision of IEC 1131-3 (PLC Programming Standards). All PLC programming shall be performed using the Function Block editor with function blocks, not ladder logic or any other editors.

B. Scale all inputs and outputs in units agreed upon with the Owner.

C. Interaction with the supervisory software – The PLC shall store all data within its own memory completely configured and ready to be accessed by the supervisory software program without further modification within the supervisory program. Program all I/O as described in the I/O lists accordingly:

1. All analog inputs and outputs listed in the I/O lists shall be available in registers scaled within the PLC to engineering units, as agreed upon with the Owner. Utilize floating point registers for all analog input data. Integers may be used for runtimes, counters, and totalizers.

2. All discrete inputs and outputs listed in the I/O lists shall be available in digital registers in the PLC. Discrete signals may be packed into integer registers only as follows: for Hand-Off-Auto selectors switches, Local-Remote selector switches.

3. All setpoints shall be written to the appropriate PLC real (floating point) registers. Develop default setpoints with the Owner and Engineer during system startup. Default setpoints shall be stored in non-volatile RAM and shall not be lost during PLC power outages.

4. Run Time Totalization – Provide individual runtimes in registers for all pumps, mixers, drives, and other motors that have run indication wired to a PLC. Run times shall be configured in hours, resettable only by plant personnel through the supervisory software.



5. Alarm Enable – Provide an alarm suppression digital register for each physical and derived alarm. Alarm enables shall be enabled (high/1) by default. Identify alarm enable bits in the PLC program by using the tag modifier _AE. Setting an alarm enable bit low shall disable alarming of the associated alarm.

6. Provide all necessary PLC programming as required by the supervisory software to meet the requirements specified herein. This shall include, but not be limited to, the totalization, minimums, and maximums of data in the PLC for use in the supervisory software.

D. Program the Stormwater Pump Station 3 OIT. As a minimum, this OIT shall display all analog values, alarm conditions, and all local equipment statuses associated with the I/O shown in drawings. Configure the OIT to facilitate control of each sewage pump. User shall enter the appropriate password to make any changes to data through an OIT. User shall be capable of viewing status without passwords. Provide a password time out, initially set to 15 minutes, after which the currently logged in user is logged out and must log in again. These requirements are in addition to requirements specified in Article 3.03. Provide separate screens for user-adjustable setpoint changes. Screens are subject to submission and approval by the Engineer. Revise screens to address the Engineer’s comments.

E. Provide a list of all register addresses with register data content descriptions to the Engineer by the contract due date of PLC program completion. Submit in Microsoft Excel format on USB Thumb Drive.

F. Where changes in PLC programming are necessary to prevent nuisance alarming or unintentional nuisance operation of equipment, the programmer shall perform the programming at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2. PLC PROGRAM TAG FORMAT

A. Group Individual I/O Types (Floating Point, Integer, Digital Registers) in Contiguous Address Ranges – Prior to developing control logic, quantify the number of each I/O type that will be required within each PLC and provide contiguous blocks of I/O addresses that will accommodate the known PLC addresses and 20-percent expansion. Do not, for example, assign an integer register in the middle of a discrete block of I/O or a real (floating point) register in the middle of a block of integer I/O.

B. Equipment identification numbers and associated I/O addresses shall be consistent throughout the PLC system. For instance, if influent flow transmitter equipment designation is FIT-1000, the physical analog input should be FI_1000 and the high level alarm should be FAH_1000_AL, with an alarm enable bit of FAH_1000_AE, with a user-adjustable setpoint tag of FAH_1000_SP, with a running flow total of FQ_1000, with a daily flow total FQ_1000_Daily, with daily minimum of FI_1000_DLO, etc. Supervisory and PLC programs, operating, mechanical, and electrical documentation shall utilize the same equipment identification numbers.

C. Utilize functional designations. A short list of commonly used functional designations is as follows and shall be used whenever possible:



AI_ Analyzer Indication FAL_ Flow Alarm LowAAL_ Analyzer Alarm Low FQ_ Flow TotalizationAAH_ Analyzer Alarm High IAH_ Current Alarm HighAALL_ Analyzer Alarm Low-Low II_ Current (amps) IndicationAAHH_ Analyzer Alarm High-High JA_ Power AlarmFI_ Flow Indication KQ_ Runtime TotalizationFAH_ Flow Alarm High LI_ Level IndicationLAH_ Level Alarm High VAH_ Vibration Alarm HighLAL_ Level Alarm Low VAL_ Vibration Alarm LowLQ_ Level Totalization WI_ Weight IndicationOC_ Open/Stop Control WAH_ Weight Alarm HighCC_ Close/Start Control WAL_ Weight Alarm LowPI_ Pressure Indication WQ_ Weight TotalizationPAL_ Pressure Alarm Low YI_ Run IndicationPAH_ Pressure Alarm High YA_ Fail IndicationSI_ Speed Indication YQ_ Start CounterSC_ Speed Control ZI_ Position IndicationTI_ Temp Indication ZIO_ Position Indication OpenTAH_ Temp Alarm High ZIC_ Position Indication ClosedTAL_ Temp Alarm Low ZC_ Position ControlVI_ Vibration Indication

D. Utilize “modifiers” to tag names to further identify registers. A short list of commonly used modifiers is as follows and shall be used whenever possible:

_AL Alarm bit (digital) _DAVG Daily average (real)_SP Setpoint (real) _DAILY Daily total (real)_DLO Daily low/minimum (real) _AE Alarm enable (digital)_DHI Daily high/maximum (real) _AT Alarm type (real)_SEL Alarm channel select (real) _AUTO Auto position (digital)_HAND Hand position (digital) _OFF Off position (digital)_LOC Local position (digital) _REM Remote position (digital)

1. Integers may be used to indicate multiple switch positions. When integers are used for this purpose, the tag shall be formatted as follows: HSI_XXXX_HOA, as in Hand Switch Indication, loop number XXXX, Hand-Off-Auto. For instance, if the switch is two-position “Local/Remote” switch the tag may be HSI_1000_LR.

2. Do not use tag modifiers such as _SPH for “Setpoint High”.

E. Alarming – Provide physical registers and alarm registers (_AL tag) for all physical



alarm inputs. Alarms derived from an analog input only require an alarm tag (_AL).

3.3. SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. PLC Diagnostics – As a minimum, for each PLC provide communication failure alarms, low memory battery alarms, PLC panel power loss alarms, and PLC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) battery low alarm. If the supplied PLC or UPS has additional diagnostics, provide programming to accommodate these additional indications or alarms. Provide PLC Cabinet Temperature High-High, PLC Cabinet Temperature High, PLC Cabinet Temperature Low, and PLC Cabinet Temperature Low-Low alarms that are user-adjustable.

B. Stormwater Pump Station 3 PLC, PLC-SPS

Stormwater Pumps - Stormwater Pumps shall utilize a three-position Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switch, located at the pumps start panel, in the MCC.

1. In Hand, each pump shall run continuously. PLC control of this equipment shall be prohibited.

2. In Off, the pump shall not run. PLC control of this equipment shall be prohibited.

3. In Remote-Auto, a virtual three position Hand-Off-Auto selector switch graphic in the supervisory software is enabled.

a. In Remote-Hand the pump shall start and run continuously until the virtual HOA is manually returned to Remote-Off position.

b. In Remote-Off, the pump shall not run.

c. In Remote –Auto, both pumps shall operate in a LEAD-LAG Configuration. The LEAD pump will be started based upon a user-adjustable LEAD PUMP ON level setpoint (units: feet). The LAG pump will be started based upon a user-adjustable LAG PUMP ON level setpoint (units: feet). There shall be a user-adjustable ALL PUMPS OFF level setpoint (units: feet) that shall turn off all pumps operating.

d. There shall also be a user-adjustable time setpoint (units: hours) that will start the LEAD pump when neither pump has operated after the user- adjustable time setpoint has expired and the wet well level exceeds a user- adjustable level setpoint (units: feet) and run the pump until level in the wet well falls to the LOW LEVEL setpoint, bypassing the ALL PUMPS OFF level setpoint.

e. When the level in the wetwell activates a High-High level float being monitored in the Backup Float Control Panel (BUFCP), the BUFCP shall assume control of the pumps and PLC control of the pumps shall be prohibited. Once the BUFCP has been reset at the BUFCP, the PLC shall resume control of the pumps.

4. Alternation – When operating in Remote-Auto, the pumps shall alternate their LEAD-



LAG status on each pump-down cycle. Once the LEAD pump has shut down, the LAG pump shall assume LEAD status and the LEAD pump shall assume LAG status.

5. Shutdown Conditions- Equipment protective measures shall be handled by each pump’s local starter panel in the MCC or from the level transducer. The pumps shall not operate when their respective HOA switch is in the Remote position and one or more of the shutdown conditions below are activea. Motor Overloadb. MWTS (Motor Winding Thermal Switch) Alarmc. RVSS Faultd. Wetwell low-low level float switche. Wetwell Low level (Transducer)

6. Wet well level control setpoints shall not be user-adjustable past the baffle wall.

7. When loss of utility power is detected at the pump station, the PLC shall shut down the pumps if they are running. When utility power is back online, the PLC shall start the pumps if they are placed in REMOTE AUTO.

8. There shall be four user-adjustable setpoints derived from the level in wet well as dictated by the level transducer. The alarm setpoints shall be Wet Well Level High-High, Wet Well Level High, Wet Well Level Low and Wet Well Level Low-Low. When the level in the wet well rises above the Wet Well Level High and/or Wet Well Level High-High the respective alarms shall be triggered and displayed in the OIT. When the level in the wet well falls below the Wet Well Level Low and/or Wet Well Level Low-Low the respective alarms shall be triggered and displayed in the OIT.

C. Intrusion System - The intrusion system consists of a magnetic-type door contact. Provide programming to facilitate the following operation:

1. Provide a user-adjustable time delay, accessible through the supervisory software, between the time that the door contact has been opened and the initiation of an alarm. Time delay units shall be in seconds, initially set for 120 seconds.

D. Lighting Control - The lighting system consists of a of photocell control device, that energizes a relay when the photocell detects no light outside. A contact is sent to the PLC from the relay to signal to the PLC that the lights should turn on. The lighting control shall utilize a two- position Auto-Manual Bypass switch, located virtually in the OIT. Provide programming to facilitate the following operation:

1. Auto- When the contact from the photocell is closed, the output contact for the light control should energize.

2. Manual Bypass – When the virtual push button turning on the lights is pressed, the PLC shall energize the output contact for the light control. When the virtual push button turning off the lights is pressed, the PLC shall de-energize the output contact for the light control.

3.4. PLC PROGRAMMER’S FIELD SERVICES



A. In addition to time required for PLC program installation, provide a minimum of a one four-hour day of on-site time for PLC program troubleshooting at Engineer’s request. The on-site time may be required over a span of one month. Written notification of the day required for troubleshooting and installation supervision will be sent to the Contractor 10 business days prior to the required day.

3.5. ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING SERVICES

A. The programmer shall provide all system programming to implement system description.

B. The programmer shall provide additional programming services as required by Engineer if system needs modification to function properly.

C. Programmer shall provide for programming of an additional 25 points of physical I/O and the derived I/O associated with each physical point. Provide a credit to the Owner for programming services not utilized towards the additional 25 I/O points.

D. The Contractor and programmer shall schedule system programming with the Owner. Upon request, the programmer shall visit the site within 24 hours of request.



LEVEL MEASUREMENT 17375 - 1

SECTION 17375 - LEVEL MEASUREMENT (ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER TYPE)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready to operate, the following level sensing systems, complete with all necessary accessories to monitor level as indicated herein in compliance with the following specifications and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

1. It is a requirement of this specification that the elements of the system be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the equipment and services specified in this section, as well as all other Division 17 specifications.

2. For ease of identification, designations for the various components of the metering systems to be furnished and installed are given in Table 17375-1.

TABLE 17375-1SCHEDULE OF ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCERS

Service Nameplate DesignationEquipment

DesignationApproximate Span

OutputWet Well Level Refer to Drawings Refer to Drawings Liquid depth in

feet


A. All Division 16 Specifications

B. All Division 17 Specifications

1.3. REFERENCES




D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings – Submit under provisions of Division 1.

1. Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation, for shop drawing format and content.

2. Scaled AutoCAD drawings illustrating the actual mounting locations for each



transmitter. Indicate dimensions of mounting area, centerline of the transducer cable, distances from the centerline of the transducer cable and the walls, and any nearby obstructions. Indicate distance from transducer to floor.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Division 1.

1. Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation, for operation and maintenance manual format and content.

C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Division 1.

1. Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation, for project record documents format and content.

1.5. WARRANTY

A. Two-year warranty covering the transmitter and transducer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS

A. The ultrasonic transducer-type level sensing equipment shown in Table 17375-1 shall be the following or equal:

1. Endress+Hauser, Model FMU41.

2. Vega, Model Vegason 62.

3. Or Equal.

2.2. EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Sensors/Transducer

1. Sensor shall be housed in a 316 stainless steel housing and shall be mounted as shown in the Drawings.

2. Stainless steel sensor housing shall have a removable cover to access wiring terminations.

3. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel or non-metallic.

B. Level Transmitter

1. Housed integral to the transducer.

2. Transmit a 4-20mA DC signal directly proportional to level in the wet well.



3. Provide labeled terminal strips for all external electrical connections.

4. Provide an intrinsically safe barrier to have the transducer rated as Class I, Division 1 if the selected transducer requires it.

C. Performance Requirements

1. The systems shall have a minimum accuracy of +0.2 percent of range.

2. Response time not to exceed 600 ms.

3. Linearity – 0.2 percent of measurement range.

4. Temperature Operating Range – (-40 to 170 degrees F).

5. Power Requirements - 24 VDC.

2.3. ACCESSORIES

A. Nameplates – Refer to Section 17000, Instrumentation. Wording of nameplate shall be as specified in Table 17375-1.

B. Mounting Hardware – Provide stainless steel mounting hardware as necessary to mount equipment in locations as described in the Contract Documents.

C. Cabling – Provide power, and signal, cable and conduit to locate transmitters in locations listed in Table 17375-1 and the Contact Documents according to Section 17000, Instrumentation.

D. Lightning and Surge Protection – Provide lightning and surge protection for the equipment listed in Table 17375-1 in accordance with Section 17000, Instrumentation.

2.4. CONTROLS

A. All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full conformance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications.

B. Refer to Contract Drawings for wiring requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements/suggestion.

B. All electrical work performed in fabrication and installation of the transmitters shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Division 16 specifications.

C. Mount all equipment provided herein in accordance with Section 17000, Instrumentation.



D. Verify the integrity of the wall to which the stilling well is mounted. If the wall exhibits corrosion or other disrepair, provide a sound mounting surface.

3.2. MANUFACTURER’S OR SYSTEM INTEGRATOR’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Manufacturer authorized service representative to test equipment to demonstrate that:

1. The transmitter and transducer are properly installed, properly calibrated, and is functioning as specified.

2. Configuration and setpoints are not lost upon power loss. This shall be tested by disconnecting the transmitter from power for 30 minutes.

B. Training – Provide instruction per Division 1, to be conducted at the project site with a manufacturer’s representative. Notify the Engineer and Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance. Training shall include calibration, troubleshooting, and maintenance.

3.3. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING

A. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. Certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall be given the Owner at least two weeks in advance.



SCADA SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING 17500 - 1

SECTION 17500 - SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section does not specify hardware. It does include functional requirements for the programming of Wastewater Treatment Facility (WWTF) supervisory software (SCADA software). Programming of the supervisory software encompasses report generation, trending, graphical requirements, and more. In addition to programming services, this section outlines training services to be provided.


A. Division 1.

B. All Division 17 specifications

1.3. DEFINITIONS

A. SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system refers to a network of controllers communicating data to a central computer, or computers in the case of a computer network.

B. Supervisory Node – Refers to any type of interface device that executes the supervisory software. Types of interface devices are personal computers (PCs) and Industrial Workstations.

C. Physical I/O Point – A wired input or output to a PLC I/O module.

D. Equipment Identification Number – Numbers developed by the Engineer to identify equipment in the field, PLC programs, and supervisory programs. Equipment Identification Numbers are listed on the PLC I/O lists in “Item No” and “Equipment Designation” columns. Equipment Identification Numbers are in accordance with ISA standards 5.1 and 5.4.

E. Functional Designation (Derived I/O) – Column of the PLC I/O lists that identifies some of the PLC I/O registers required for each physical I/O point. Functional designations are in accordance with ISA standards 5.1 and 5.4. The functional designation shall always be identified in conjunction with the item number for each physical I/O point.

F. I/O Type – A PLC register type. Referring to an integer, floating point (or real), or digital register.

G. Security Area – Restricts access to a database block (tagname) or an operator display.

H. Security Group Account – Assigns access to the most commonly used privileges that two or more users must share. Users assigned to a group account have access to all the application features and security areas defined for the group.



I. Security User Account – Defines the privileges assigned to one person. Identifies each user account with a log-in name and password.

1.4. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the programmer. Submit programmer’s qualifications and experience along with the names, addresses, telephone numbers, and dates of a minimum of three clients for whom the proposed programmer has programmed the specified supervisory software. Provide names, addresses, and phone numbers to contact these references.

2. Provide detailed written descriptions of all SCADA system functions, including but not limited to, descriptions of control sequences, monitoring, and means of historical archiving. Provide these descriptions in a Microsoft Word document custom created for this specific project. Provide sufficient detail to indicate to the engineer that the system programmer has a firm grasp of how, and where, monitoring and control are utilized. Detail shall include and surpass that which is provided in this Section.

3. Where necessary for clarity reference loop diagrams provided under other Division 17 submittals.

4. Submit color printouts of supervisory screens from projects the system supplier has completed in the previous five years.

5. Provide color printouts of objects proposed to depict equipment including, but not limited to, vertical centrifugal pumps, process piping (including pipe junctions and other fittings), analog displays, PLCs, historical archiving, trending charts, a minimum of one report generated, valves, pressure transmitters, plant overview screens, and all other screens, or specific graphic samples, necessary to ascertain the system suppliers SCADA design methodology to the engineer and Owner.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000, Instrumentation.

1. Color printouts of all screens and pop-up windows.

2. Provide detailed discussions for all systems portrayed through the supervisory software, including, but not limited to, detailed procedures for navigating the screens, all “hotkeys”, login procedure, changing of setpoints, configuring trending charts, and configuring report format and contents.

3. In addition to the printed copy, provide an electronic copy of the entire O&M Manual in Microsoft Word 2016, or higher format, on CD-ROM. Electronic copies of all SCADA screens shall be provided in *.JPEG format.

C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Division 1. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 17000,



Instrumentation.

1. Provide two copies of the final supervisory program on USB Thumb Drive. Submit one copy to the Engineer and one copy to the Owner. Engineer will retain their copy.

1.5. MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Provide Owner with the cell phone number of the supervisory software developer. This contact person shall be capable of responding to a call immediately, capable of implementing supervisory software changes, and be available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week until final completion of the SCADA system. When contacted, this person shall arrive at the plant within three hours when the Owner requires such response time.

B. Implement all software updates, including, but not limited to, Windows updates, security virus definition updates, supervisory software patches, and system backups at three-week intervals beginning at the time of computer setup and ending at the time of final completion for the SCADA system.

1.6. COORDINATION

A. See that the programs effectively address all of the requirements of the system for control, display, and operation.

B. See that the equipment will execute the programs to obtain the intended operation.

C. Implement program changes at the request of the Owner or Engineer to provide the intended operation.

D. Travel to site when presence is requested (other than emergency calls) by Owner a minimum of four separate four-hour units. Times are on-site times.

E. Coordinate one intermediary demonstration and one final demonstration with the Owner and Engineer. Schedule demonstrations in writing to the Owner and Engineer one week in advance of proposed demonstration date.

F. SCADA system programmer shall have a minimum of one four-hour meeting with the Owner and Engineer at the Owner’s facility to coordinate requirements for supervisory software programming and PLC programming. As a minimum, meeting shall cover:

1. Operational sequences.

2. Screen configuration.

3. Trending requirements.

4. Report generation.

1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one copy of completed supervisory software program on USB Thumb Drive and intermediary supervisory program backups to the Engineer at the Engineer’s request.



1.8. SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. General Requirements - Provide all programming for equipment to implement supervisory control and data acquisition for the new SCADA system. Refer to Part 3 of this specification section for other programming requirements. This shall include provision of the following:

1. Programming of supervisory software for all physical and derived I/O as listed in the Contract Drawings.

2. Programming of all graphic screens and data files.

3. Providing software documentation, intermittent submittals, and final copies of all programs.

4. Providing uniform formats throughout the system for signal names, data files, variables, set points, signals, abbreviation, and user assigned keys.

5. Programming of security levels and access rights per Engineer and Owner requirements.

6. Programming supervisory and local control as described.

7. Provide programming services for a minimum of 25 additional tags. Tag shall be considered a tag within the supervisory software, not physical I/O. Additional programming services shall include all necessary graphics, datalinks, animations, etc. associated with the addition of these tags. Provide a credit for the unused additional I/O points not used.

8. Perform modifications and clean-up of supervisory software screens based on Owner input during the startup and troubleshooting phase.

1.9. TRAINING

A. Training

1. Provide training for at the Owner’s facility.

2. Training shall also be in accordance with Division 1.

3. Training shall consist of one day of training prior to system startup and three days after startup.

4. Training shall include the following:

a. Programming of supervisory software, including basic system installation, pre-programmed control functions, monitoring functions, alarming capabilities, networking, screen generation, screen modifications, and system communications. The training shall include applications and examples typically used for water treatment and distribution systems. The



training shall use personal computers with the applications developed for the Owner.

b. Basic system concepts, troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures including basic programming of supervisory software. Include changing of setpoints, generation of animated screens, and control strategies.

1) Procedures for restarting and reloading supervisory software programs upon PC failure.

2) Procedures for troubleshooting and replacement of I/O modules, CPUs, power supplies, communication modules, and other devices associated with the PLCs.

3) All installed system capabilities.

4) Generation of reports and the changing of the report format.

5. Provide a minimum of two copies of the manufacturer’s printed manuals for all software, including supervisory software programming instruction manuals.

6. Provide a copy of the video recorded DVD training sessions in a binder that is specifically designed to hold DVD’s. Only two copies need to be submitted, one to the Engineer for review and one to the Owner. Engineer will retain their copy.

B. Provide training on the general system and the final system configuration during the year following Substantial Completion of the SCADA system. The training shall be held at the Owner’s facility at the Owner’s request for one day. Coordinate scheduling of this training with the Owner. The training subject matter shall be as requested by the Owner.

1. Video record, on DVD, the sessions and provide training manuals and two copies of the DVD to personnel.

1.10. PASSWORDS AND OTHER CRITICAL CONFIGURATIONS

A. All critical configurations shall be turned over to the Owner and Engineer at the time of Substantial Completion of the SCADA system. Submit twice, once prior to Operation and Maintenance manual submission and once in the Operation and Maintenance manual. Create a custom Microsoft Word or Excel file that identifies the following:

1. PC names, PC domain, PC workgroup, PC login accounts including user names, passwords, and privileges for each, PC IP addresses, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server addresses (if used), preferred DNS server addresses, and alternate DNS server addresses.

2. Supervisory software security configuration including, individual user names, passwords, and security group assignments. Export configuration settings alone are not acceptable.

3. List of screens and tags security group protected.



PART 2 - MATERIALS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

A. The contractor is responsible for all system programming to implement the system described in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall modify setpoints to meet the requirements of the Owner during the SCADA system startup and troubleshooting phase.

1. Contractor shall work with the Owner in determining and fine-tuning the system operation for all portions of control sequences during the SCADA system startup and troubleshooting phase.

B. Provide software licenses for all software required to accomplish system functions as described.

C. Provide all software and drivers as required to accomplish system described.

D. All control logic shall be performed in the PLCs. The supervisory program shall not directly perform any control functions.

E. All determination of alarm conditions shall be performed in the PLCs.

F. Communication of status changes for any I/O point shall be report-by-exception.

3.2. GENERAL PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. Software Initial Configuration

1. Node Names

a. Existing- SCADA1, SCADA2, CLIENT1, CLIENT2 and CLIENT3

b. New- None.

2. Project Database - Frederick

3. Utilize the Local Logical Name “FREDERICK” for all tags to simplify the addition of a future backup SCADA node.

B. Task Startup Configuration

1. Startup all necessary programs and scripts in the supervisory software task configuration file.

2. Configure each task to run in the foreground, normal, or background as necessary



and as directed by the Engineer.

C. Picture Format

1. Develop screen with the monitor display set to 1024 by 786 resolution.

2. Pictures, or screens, shall be comprised of the following:

a. Upper-Window – The only upper-window in this system shall be the Title Bar Picture. Upper-Window and Title Bar will be used interchangeably. Upper- window shall be 16 percent of the monitor height.

b. Lower-Windows – The window that fills the void between the Upper-Window and the bottom of the screen. Lower-Window and Full-size picture will be used interchangeably. Lower-Window shall be 82 percent of the monitor height.

c. Pop-up windows shall only consist of two standard width windows.

1) All alarm setpoint pop-up windows shall be the same width and open on the left-hand side of the lower-window with the upper left-hand corner of the alarm setpoint pop-up window opening in the upper left- hand corner of the lower-window.

2) All control setpoint pop-up windows shall be the same width and open on the right-hand side of the lower-window with the upper right-hand corner of the control setpoint pop-up window opening in the upper right-hand corner of the lower-window.

3) The setpoint pop-up window and main menu pop-up windows may be whatever width is necessary, however it is preferred that the main menu be the width of three buttons evenly spaced.

3. Fonts

a. All fonts shall be the same. Use Arial.

b. Utilize the same size and style font for all indications of analog values. Use font size 10 or 11.

c. Utilize the same size and style font for all lower-screen picture labels. Use font size 17.

d. Utilize the same font size and style on all buttons.

e. Utilize the same font size and style to label equipment on screens.

4. Buttons – All buttons shall be the same height. Width may change from screen to screen, however on screens where there is a large quantity of buttons, such as the Main Manu screen, all buttons arranged in an array shall be the same width.



5. Picture Setup – Pictures shall not be resizable and the Windows-style “title bar” shall not be shown, disable its appearance.

6. Picture Labeling – Label pictures by centering the text description of the screen at the top of the picture. Text label shall be in the same relative location on all lower-screen pop-up windows. Do not label the Title Bar picture.

7. Picture Background Colors

a. Lower-Screens – Utilize the same background colors for all lower-screen full- size windows.

b. Alarm Setpoint Screens – Utilize a separate color than that of other screens, all alarm setpoint screens shall utilize the same background color.

c. Control Setpoint Screens – Utilize a separate color than that of other screens, all control setpoint screens shall utilize the same background color.

d. Main Menu and Setpoint Pop-up Navigation Window – Utilize the same background color for each.

D. Graphic Development

1. Guidelines - Show all the processes as installed. Include interconnecting pipe to wet wells and pumps. Label where all process pipes are going to and coming from. All pipe graphics shall be three-dimensional. Detailed graphics for transmitters and analyzers are not necessary; simply illustrate the analog value near where it is located in the process with units and a title.

2. Development – Graphics on screens depicting processes shall be in reasonable approximation to scale.

E. Indication of Equipment Operational Status on Animated Screens

1. All equipment items indicated on the I/O lists (excluding instrumentation) shall be shown on screens as graphical object in near approximation of their actual appearance, animated with color for the equipment operational status. Colors shall be as follows:

a. Equipment Running, Valve Open, or Filter On-line - Red

b. Equipment Not Running, Valve Closed, or Filter Off-line – Green

c. Modulating Valve in not fully opened or fully closed - Yellow

d. Alarm - Flashing Red

1) Do not utilize colors that indicate operational status in any other graphics. Colors that indicate operational status shall be strictly reserved for such indication.



2. Do not indicate alarm conditions on the animated screen via animated lights or blinking text.

3. Changing levels in the wet well shall be shown through animation of geometric shapes to show level in the wet well and by numerical values representing wet well level. Engineering units for values shall be as directed by Owner and Engineer.

4. Animated equipment symbols shall be as approved by Owner and Engineer.

5. Use global threshold tables for all color animation and text replacement. The use of global threshold tables enables the Owner to change the colors that are used to indicate run, not running, and fail (for example) in one place in lieu of at individual graphics.

F. Title Bar Picture

1. Locate Title Bar picture at the top of every screen. Name the picture “Title_Bar”

2. Indicate computer network time and date.

3. Indicate facility name.

4. “Log On”, “Log Off”, “Menu”, and “Setpoint” buttons.

a. Log On button – Shall produce a pop-up window that facilitate username and password entry. Configure the F10 key to produce this login screen as well. Log on pop-up window shall be centered on the lower screen.

b. Log Out button – Shall log out the current user.

c. Menu button - Shall produce a pop-up window containing an array of buttons that serve as links to other screens. Provide links to all other full size screens from the Menu pop-up window. Name this pop-up window “Main_Menu”.

d. Setpoints button – Shall produce a pop-up window horizontally centered on the lower full-screen with the upper edge of the window aligning with the bottom of the title bar picture. Provide button links to all pop-up setpoint screens. Name this setpoint pop-up window “Setpoints”.

5. Show the five most current alarms with a scroll bar to view a list of ten of the most recent alarms. Enable the appropriate password user to acknowledge the alarm.

6. It is not acceptable to list the system integrator’s name or employer’s name on any screens.

G. Configure supervisory software’s historical collection groups.

1. Historical data shall be archived using the supervisory software’s native historical collection.



2. SCADA system supplier is responsible for programming an ODBC-compliant database for historical archiving of data at operator-definable intervals.

3. Historically collect all physical analog inputs.

4. Historically collect pump and system start statues.

5. Intervals for archiving each data item shall be user-definable and adjustable. Coordinate intervals with the Owner and Engineer.

6. Each data point shall be time and date-stamped.

7. Do not overload individual historical collection groups. Individual historical collection groups shall not exceed 50 tags.

H. Trending

1. Provide historical pen plots for all physical analog I/O.

2. Reduce the total quantity of historical screens by utilizing buttons on screen to load different pen sets. Do not provide more than 11 loadable pen sets within any one historical trending screen. If more pen sets are required, provide another historical trending screen.

3. Provide the ability to zoom in and out of trends.

4. Utilize a Microsoft Calendar Control object to select dates of pen data to be recalled in a trend.

5. Each pen shall be identified with the tagname, description, data value, and engineering units.

6. Provide the ability to identify the value of each pen at any time of the trend.

7. Color code pens. Utilize same colors for same data values whenever possible. Do not use faint pen colors. Trend background shall be white.

8. Modify trending configuration based upon Engineer’s comments and to eliminate all nuisance operation of trends.

I. Alarm Summary Object

1. Provide alarming on all physical input alarms and all derived alarms.

2. Utilize the supervisory software’s native alarming objects.



3. Sort alarms by first in, first out (according to alarm event time).

4. Provide the following column headers: acknowledge status, date in, time in, alarm description, tagname, current status, value, and alarm area.

5. Configure alarm tags (_AL tags) alarm priority. Coordinate alarm priorities with Owner.

6. Enable alarm horn.

7. Disable alarm deletion.

8. Color code alarm background color according to severity of alarm.

9. Color code alarm text color according to alarm state (active, inactive, acknowledged, unacknowledged)

10. Synchronize alarming between nodes weekly.

11. Provide one full screen, less title bar, alarm summary object window. Provide one alarm summary object in title bar to show the most recent five alarms.

12. Coordinate alarm acknowledgement with user-based security configuration. Operator acknowledgements of alarm conditions shall be stored with time and date stamp as well as the operator’s username who acknowledged the alarm.

J. Password Protection

1. Do not enable security until all the screens have been approved by the Engineer.

2. Provide a minimum of seven security group accounts. Accounts shall be as follows:

a. Developer – Unrestricted access to all application features and security areas.

b. Assistant Developer – Same as the Developer security group except restricted access to stop background tasks, change any system configurations, access visual basic, edit global variables/files, and any other features of the software not utilized in the development of the program. In short, the Assistant Developer security group shall have access to modifying pictures, adding tags to the database, and adding tags to historical collection.

c. Security Administrator – Access to all features necessary to change user account usernames and passwords. Assume that the person that may be assigned this security group is not fluent with configuration of the supervisory program and that their primary function is an ISD administrator; hence prevent them from altering the program.

d. Chief Operator – Access to get in and out of runtime mode for the purpose of ultimately shutting down the supervisory software should the computer lockup or exhibit abnormal behavior that has a history of being rectified by a



reboot. Enable <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del>, and task switching.

e. Operator – Access to the runtime mode of the supervisory software only. User shall not be capable of exiting, minimizing the supervisory software, or gaining access to the PC desktop.

f. Laborer – Same as the Operator security group. Setpoint changes only on setpoints as agreed upon with Owner. Start/stop control only as agreed upon with Owner.

g. Public – Same as the Laborer security group except users shall not be capable of changing any setpoints or starting/stopping any equipment.

3. Provide user accounts for each individual employee.

a. Username shall be the initials of the user’s full name containing three characters.

b. Passwords shall be six digit alphanumeric. Passwords shall not spell out anything or have any cognitive meaning. Staff shall not select their own passwords. Create passwords randomly.

c. Utilize group accounts to the greatest extent possible in define individual user’s account access.

d. Provide one user account for the Engineer. User account shall have Developer group account access.

e. Provide two spare user accounts with Operator group account access.

f. Provide one user account with Developer group account access, 5-minute login time, and label the username as TEMP and provide a password.

g. All other users shall be logged out after 15-minutes. Upon time out, the access rights shall be that of the Public group account.

4. Create a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet for submission to the Engineer for approval of the structure of security groups. This spreadsheet shall utilize a column for “Application Features”, “Allows the user to…”, and one column for each security group. In the “Application Feature” column, list each available application feature in rows. For each application feature, describe what access to the security feature enables the user to do under the “Allows the user to…” column. Place “Yes” or “No” under each group account column to indicate which application features the group account has access to. Submit this spreadsheet to the Engineer within 160 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued.

K. Configure reporting software. Reporting software based in Microsoft Excel.

1. Configure a minimum of one report.

2. Extract data points from supervisory software database, not historical database.



3. Provide uniform format of text font style, text font size, alignment, page headers, page footers, etc. between all reports.

4. Obtain the Owners official logo in *.jpeg format and insert into the header of the first page of all reports.

5. Format and function of all reports are subject to review and approval by the Engineer. Make changes to reports per the Engineer’s request.

6. All reports shall be fully functional, approved by Engineer, and data must be reading correctly prior to training.

7. Schedule reports to automatically print out at the appropriate intervals.

8. Consolidate reports by creating new sheets within an Excel workbook for each day. Generate a new workbook each month. New Excel workbooks shall be created once a month, maximum. Individual Excel files shall not exceed 700 KB.

9. Generate the following reports:

a. Daily Report – List the critical data for each day including: running and daily pump runtimes; etc. Provide one sheet for each day and one workbook for each month. List tag description, corresponding data value, and corresponding engineering units in each row, populate down.

b. Generate remaining reports as directed by the Owner and Engineer during construction.

10. User accessing the supervisory software remote shall be required to log-in with their user name and password.

3.3. SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. Develop screens for portions of the treatment process as requested by Owner and Engineer.

B. In the following screen descriptions where equipment is referenced, it is implicit that all equipment status indications shall be provided along with the equipment graphic in accordance with the Contract Drawings and this specification.

C. Program a minimum of 2 lower-window illustrating the following view:

1. Stormwater Pumping Station No. 3 – Illustrate each pump, and wetwell level.

a. Provide a button that serves as a link to the Stormwater Pump control setpoints pop-up window.

2. Alarm Enable – Provide a screen that lists all the alarms and utilized a checkbox to set the alarm enable bit of the associate alarm high or low. Setting an alarm enable bit low shall disable alarming of the associated alarm. By default, and for all testing, all alarm enable bit shall be set high to enable alarming on all alarms.



a. Provide a user-adjustable field to enter the length of time the horn will be energized upon unauthorized entry.

D. Program a minimum of 2 pop-up windows for use as alarm setpoint pop-up windows, control setpoint pop-up windows, and other window as necessary.

1. When tag groups are utilized in a pop-up window, the pop-up windows that utilize the same tag group shall count as one pop-up window.

2. Control Setpoint Pop-Up Window – Provide a pop-up window that is accessed from the Setpoints pop-up window and from the appropriate Stormwater PS No. 3 screen. This window shall display each pump control setpoint that control the pumps when they are operating in REMOTE AUTO. Provide user-adjustable pump control setpoints as datalinks, based on the requirements set forth in Section 17101, Programmable Logic Controller Programming.

3. Alarm Setpoint Pop-Up Window – Provide a pop-up window that is accessed from the Setpoints pop-up window and from the appropriate Stormwater PS No. 3 screen. This window shall display each wet well alarm setpoint that is set forth in Section 17101, Programmable Logic Controller Programming. Provide user-adjustable pump control setpoints as datalinks, based on the requirements set forth in Section 17101, Programmable Logic Controller Programming.

E. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner, during the specified workshops, to illicit any additional data to be monitored over Ethernet. Such as information from the TeSys equipment, etc.

3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.

B. Perform operational testing on control systems to verify proper operation of all supervisory software functions.

3.5. FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1.

3.6. DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration. Coordinate scheduling of demonstration with Engineer.

B. Demonstrate to the Owner the following:

1. All alarm points and setpoints.

2. All communication.

3. All networking capabilities.



4. All control functions and setpoints.

5. Basic system operating procedures.

3.7. MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide services in accordance with Division 1.


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - AWS

Documents

Transcript of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - AWS